ADONIS

Version 3.81

Volume III

Method Manual
ADONIS
Standard Method

Volume 1:

Introduction Manual

Volume 2:

User Manual

Volume 3:

Method Manual

Volume 4:

Method definition and Administration Manual

Volume 5:

Installation and Database Administration Manual

Addresses:
Austria:

BOC Information Technologies Consulting GmbH

A-1010 Wien, Baeckerstrasse 5

Germany:

BOC Information Technologies Consulting GmbH

Mosse-Palast am Leipziger Platz
D-10117 Berlin, Vossstrae 22

Spain:

BOC Business Objectives Consulting Ibrica, S.A.

E-28006 Madrid, Calle Velzquez 71 - 1 Izda.

Ireland:

BOC Information Technologies Consulting Ltd.

Haddington Hall
Dublin 4 Ireland, 80 Haddington road

Greece:

BOC Information Technologies Consulting EPE

GR-10680 Athen, Mavromichali 16

Poland:

BOC Information Technologies Consulting Sp. z o.o.

PL-00-679 Warsaw, ul. Wilcza 44/8

Hotline:

[email protected]

Home page:

http://www.boc-eu.com
http://www.boc-us.com

User documentation for ADONIS Version 1.0

User documentation for ADONIS Version 2.0
User documentation for ADONIS Version 3.0x
User documentation for ADONIS Version 3.53
User documentation for ADONIS Version 3.7
User documentation for ADONIS Version 3.8/3.81

1996
1997
1999/2000
2002
2003
2005

No part of this work covered by the copyright hereon may be reproduced or used in any form or by any
means graphic, electronic, or mechanical, including photocopying, recording, or information storage
and retrieval systems without the prior written approval of BOC GmbH.

Table of Contents
Preface ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.

I.
II.
III.

1.

Note .......................................................................................................................................................................... 1

ADONIS............................................................................................................... 3
The ADONIS standard method ........................................................................ 5
Information for ADONIS users ......................................................................... 7

Model types........................................................................................................................................................... 7
1.1
Company map......................................................................................................................................... 8
1.2
Business Process Model...................................................................................................................... 9
1.3
Working Environment model.......................................................................................................... 10
1.4
Document model................................................................................................................................. 11
1.5
Use Case Diagram............................................................................................................................... 11
2. Classes ................................................................................................................................................................. 13
2.1
Class "Actor" .......................................................................................................................................... 13
2.2
Class "Use case"................................................................................................................................... 14
2.3
Class "System boundary"................................................................................................................. 14
2.4
Class "Process start" .......................................................................................................................... 15
2.5
Class "Subprocess"............................................................................................................................. 17
2.6
Class "Activity" ...................................................................................................................................... 19
2.7
Class "Decision" ................................................................................................................................... 24
2.8
Class "Parallelity"................................................................................................................................. 25
2.9
Class "Merging" .................................................................................................................................... 26
2.10 Class "End"............................................................................................................................................. 27
2.11 Class "Variable" .................................................................................................................................... 28
2.12 Class "Random generator" .............................................................................................................. 29
2.13 Class "Resource" (__BP_Resource__).......................................................................................... 30
2.14 Class "Process"..................................................................................................................................... 31
2.15 Class "Performance indicator overview" .................................................................................... 33
2.16 Class "Performance indicator" ....................................................................................................... 34
2.17 Class "Document"................................................................................................................................ 38
2.18 Class "Note" ........................................................................................................................................... 38
2.19 Class "Aggregation" ............................................................................................................................ 39
2.20 Class "Swimlane (horizontal)" ........................................................................................................ 40
2.21 Class "Swimlane (vertical)".............................................................................................................. 41
2.22 Class "Organizational unit" .............................................................................................................. 42
2.23 Class "Performer" ................................................................................................................................ 43
2.24 Class "Role"............................................................................................................................................ 45
2.25 Class "Resource" (__WE_Resource__) ......................................................................................... 45
2.26 Class "Cost center".............................................................................................................................. 46
3. Relations.............................................................................................................................................................. 48
3.1
Relation "Subsequent" ...................................................................................................................... 48
3.2
Relation "Sets variable"..................................................................................................................... 49
3.3
Relation "Sets" ...................................................................................................................................... 50
3.4
Relation "Uses" ..................................................................................................................................... 50
3.5
Relation "communicates"................................................................................................................. 50
3.6
Relation "contains".............................................................................................................................. 51
3.7
Relation "extends" ............................................................................................................................... 52
3.8
Relation "Generalisation".................................................................................................................. 52
3.9
Relation "uses"...................................................................................................................................... 53
3.10 Relation "Has process" ...................................................................................................................... 54
3.11 Relation "has Subdocument" ......................................................................................................... 54
3.12 Relation "Owns".................................................................................................................................... 54

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page I

Table of Contents

4.

5.

6.
7.

3.13 Relation "has Note" .............................................................................................................................55

3.14 Relation "Is subordinated" ...............................................................................................................55
3.15 Relation "has Resource"....................................................................................................................55
3.16 Relation "Belongs to"..........................................................................................................................56
3.17 Relation "Is manager" ........................................................................................................................56
3.18 Relation "Has role" ..............................................................................................................................56
3.19 Relation "Uses resource"...................................................................................................................57
3.20 Relation "Is charged to".....................................................................................................................57
3.21 Relation "Is cost center manager" ................................................................................................57
Predefined queries and relation tables...................................................................................................58
4.1
Analysis component ...........................................................................................................................58
4.1.1
Evaluation of the open questions in company maps ...............................................58
4.1.2
Consistency checks on Business Process Models.....................................................59
4.1.3
Predefined queries on Business Process Models ......................................................61
4.1.4
Evaluation of the open questions in Business Process Models ...........................62
4.1.5
Predefined queries on Working Environment models .............................................63
4.1.6
Evaluation of the open questions in Use Case diagrams .......................................65
4.1.7
Activity-Resource table..........................................................................................................66
4.1.8
Activity-Document table .......................................................................................................67
4.1.9
Activity-Input document table............................................................................................67
4.1.10
Activity-Output document table ........................................................................................68
4.1.11
Variable-Activity table ............................................................................................................68
4.1.12
Role table....................................................................................................................................69
4.1.13
Organisational hierarchy table...........................................................................................69
4.2
Evaluation component.......................................................................................................................70
4.2.1
Process-oriented queries on Business Process Models..........................................70
4.2.2
Activity-oriented queries on Business Process Models ...........................................72
4.2.3
Queries on Working Environment models ....................................................................73
Library specific functions..............................................................................................................................76
5.1
Acquisition component .....................................................................................................................76
5.1.1
HOMER scenarios....................................................................................................................76
5.2
Modelling component ........................................................................................................................78
5.2.1
Class cardinality.......................................................................................................................78
5.2.2
Intermodel references (multiple models)......................................................................80
5.2.3
Number objects .......................................................................................................................82
5.2.4
Reset object numbering .......................................................................................................83
5.2.5
Object conversion....................................................................................................................84
5.2.6
Display visualised attributes in English/German .......................................................85
5.2.6.1
Requirements.................................................................................................................86
5.2.6.2
Implementation .............................................................................................................88
5.2.7
Page layout ................................................................................................................................90
5.2.8
Process Stepper.......................................................................................................................90
5.2.8.1
Process animation........................................................................................................91
5.2.8.2
Play back process animation...................................................................................92
5.2.8.3
Additional functions ...................................................................................................92
5.3
Simulation component......................................................................................................................93
5.3.1
Activation of manual random generator........................................................................93
5.3.2
Activation of automatic random generator...................................................................94
5.4
Evaluation component.......................................................................................................................95
5.4.1
Monitoring ..................................................................................................................................95
5.4.1.1
Current value initialisation .........................................................................................95
5.4.1.2
Current value calculation ..........................................................................................96
5.5
Import-/Export-Component.............................................................................................................97
5.5.1
HTML-Generation ....................................................................................................................97
5.5.2
HTML Generation (copy referenced documents).......................................................99
5.5.3
Delta generation (HTML)................................................................................................... 101
5.5.4
RTF Generation ..................................................................................................................... 102
5.5.5
Options (Documentation).................................................................................................. 104
5.5.6
Attribute and class filter .................................................................................................... 109
Expressions...................................................................................................................................................... 112
Attribute profiles............................................................................................................................................ 114

page II

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Table of Contents

8.
9.

IV.

1.

Tables .................................................................................................................................................................116
Example models.............................................................................................................................................117
9.1
Models of the file Example-General.adl....................................................................................117
9.1.1
Problem description ............................................................................................................118
9.1.2
Modelling in ADONIS .........................................................................................................118
9.1.2.1
Company map "Applying for vacation" .............................................................118
9.1.2.2
WE Model "Department 5" .....................................................................................119
9.1.2.3
BP Model "Application for vacation"....................................................................120
9.1.2.4
BP model Decline application" ..............................................................................122
9.2
Models from the file Example-General_with_resources.adl.............................................123
9.2.1
Problem description ...........................................................................................................124
9.2.2
Modelling in ADONIS .........................................................................................................124
9.2.2.1
Company map "Application for vacation (resource)" ...................................124
9.2.2.2
WE Model "Application department (resource)".............................................125
9.2.2.3
BP Model "Application for vacation (resource)""............................................126
9.2.2.4
BP Model "Decline application (resource)".......................................................127
9.3
Models from the file "example-insurance.adl" ......................................................................127
9.3.1
Problem description ............................................................................................................128
9.3.2
Modelling in ADONIS .........................................................................................................129
9.3.2.1
WE Model "customer service dept."" ...................................................................130
9.3.2.2
BP Model "Contract value enquires (written)" ...............................................131
9.3.2.3
"BP Model "Change of address" ............................................................................133
9.3.2.4
BP Model "Change name of policy holder" .....................................................134
9.3.2.5
BP Model "BP change of beneficiary""..............................................................135
9.3.2.6
BP Model "SP Dispatch written evaluation" .....................................................136
9.3.2.7
BP Model "SP Policy update"................................................................................137
9.3.2.8
Document model "Customer service department" ......................................138
9.3.2.9
Use case diagrams "Customer database"........................................................138
9.4
Models of the example-bank.adl.................................................................................................139
9.5
Models of the file "Example - Public Sector.adl" ..................................................................140
9.6
Models of the "example-health.adl"...........................................................................................141
9.7
Models of the file "example-telecomunication.adl" .............................................................141

Information for ADONIS administrators .....................................................143

The class attributes.......................................................................................................................................143

1.1
GraphRep..............................................................................................................................................143
1.1.1
Class "Actor"............................................................................................................................145
1.1.2
Class "Use case" ....................................................................................................................145
1.1.3
Class "System boundary" ..................................................................................................146
1.1.4
Class "Process start"............................................................................................................146
1.1.5
Class "Subprocess" ..............................................................................................................147
1.1.6
Class "Activity"........................................................................................................................148
1.1.7
Class "Decision" .....................................................................................................................150
1.1.8
Class "Parallelity" ..................................................................................................................151
1.1.9
Class "Merging"......................................................................................................................152
1.1.10
Class "End" ..............................................................................................................................152
1.1.11
Class "Variable"......................................................................................................................153
1.1.12
Class "Random generator" ................................................................................................153
1.1.13
Class "Resource" ...................................................................................................................154
1.1.14
Class "Process" ......................................................................................................................155
1.1.15
Class "Performance indicator overview"......................................................................157
1.1.16
Class "Performance indicator".........................................................................................158
1.1.17
Class "Document" .................................................................................................................159
1.1.18
Class "Note".............................................................................................................................162
1.1.19
Class "Aggregation"..............................................................................................................164
1.1.20
Class "Swimlane (horizontal)"..........................................................................................165
1.1.21
Class "Swimlane (vertical)" ...............................................................................................172
1.1.22
Class "Organizational unit"................................................................................................180
1.1.23
Class "Performer"..................................................................................................................180
1.1.24
Class "Role" .............................................................................................................................181
1.1.25
Class "Resource" ...................................................................................................................181
1.1.26
Class "Cost center" ...............................................................................................................182

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page III

Table of Contents

1.1.27
Class "Aggregation" ............................................................................................................. 183
1.1.28
Class "Note" ............................................................................................................................ 184
1.1.29
Relation "Subsequent" ....................................................................................................... 186
1.1.30
Relation "Sets variable"...................................................................................................... 187
1.1.31
Relation "Sets" ....................................................................................................................... 188
1.1.32
Relation "uses"....................................................................................................................... 188
1.1.33
Relation "communicates".................................................................................................. 188
1.1.34
Relation "contains"............................................................................................................... 188
1.1.35
Relation "extends" ................................................................................................................ 189
1.1.36
Relation "Generalisation"................................................................................................... 189
1.1.37
Relation "Uses (use case)" ................................................................................................ 189
1.1.38
Relation "Has process" ....................................................................................................... 190
1.1.39
Relation "has Subdocument" .......................................................................................... 190
1.1.40
Relation "Owns"..................................................................................................................... 190
1.1.41
Relation "has Note".............................................................................................................. 191
1.1.42
Relation "Is subordinated" ................................................................................................ 191
1.1.43
Relation "has Resource" .................................................................................................... 191
1.1.44
Relation "Belongs to "......................................................................................................... 191
1.1.45
Relation "Is manager" ......................................................................................................... 191
1.1.46
Relation "Has role" ............................................................................................................... 192
1.1.47
Relation "Uses resource" ................................................................................................... 192
1.1.48
Relation "Is charged to" ..................................................................................................... 192
1.1.49
Relation "Is cost center manager" ................................................................................. 193
1.1.50
Relation "has Note".............................................................................................................. 193
1.2
AttrRep .................................................................................................................................................. 193
1.2.1
Class "Actor" ........................................................................................................................... 194
1.2.2
Class "Use case".................................................................................................................... 195
1.2.3
Class "System boundary".................................................................................................. 195
1.2.4
Class "Process start" ........................................................................................................... 195
1.2.5
Class "Subprocess".............................................................................................................. 196
1.2.6
Class "Activity" ....................................................................................................................... 197
1.2.7
Class "Decision" .................................................................................................................... 198
1.2.8
Class "Parallelity".................................................................................................................. 198
1.2.9
Class "Merging" ..................................................................................................................... 199
1.2.10
Class "End".............................................................................................................................. 199
1.2.11
Class "Variable" ..................................................................................................................... 199
1.2.12
Class "Random generator" ............................................................................................... 200
1.2.13
Class "Resource"................................................................................................................... 200
1.2.14
Class "Process"...................................................................................................................... 200
1.2.15
Class "Performance indicator overview" ..................................................................... 201
1.2.16
Class "Performance indicator" ........................................................................................ 202
1.2.17
Class "Document"................................................................................................................. 202
1.2.18
Class "Note" ............................................................................................................................ 203
1.2.19
Class "Aggregation" ............................................................................................................. 203
1.2.20
Class "Swimlane (horizontal)" ......................................................................................... 204
1.2.21
Class "Swimlane (vertical)"............................................................................................... 204
1.2.22
Class "Organizational unit" ............................................................................................... 204
1.2.23
Class "Performer" ................................................................................................................. 205
1.2.24
Class "Role"............................................................................................................................. 205
1.2.25
Class "Resource"................................................................................................................... 206
1.2.26
Class "Cost center"............................................................................................................... 206
1.2.27
Class "Aggregation" ............................................................................................................. 206
1.2.28
Class "Note" ............................................................................................................................ 207
1.2.29
Relation "Subsequent" ....................................................................................................... 207
1.2.30
Relation "communicates".................................................................................................. 208
1.2.31
Relation "contains"............................................................................................................... 208
1.2.32
Relation "extends" ................................................................................................................ 208
1.2.33
Relation "Generalisation"................................................................................................... 208
1.2.34
Relation "uses"....................................................................................................................... 209
1.3
Model pointer ..................................................................................................................................... 209
1.3.1
Class "Use case".................................................................................................................... 209
page IV

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Table of Contents

1.3.2
Class "Subprocess" ..............................................................................................................209
1.3.3
Class "Process" ......................................................................................................................209
1.3.4
Class "Organizational unit"................................................................................................210
1.4
Class cardinality.................................................................................................................................210
1.4.1
Class "Process start"............................................................................................................210
1.4.2
Class "Subprocess" ..............................................................................................................210
1.4.3
Class "Activity"........................................................................................................................211
1.4.4
Class "Decision" .....................................................................................................................211
1.4.5
Class "Parallelity" ..................................................................................................................211
1.4.6
Class "Merging"......................................................................................................................211
1.4.7
Class "End" ..............................................................................................................................211
1.4.8
Class "Variable"......................................................................................................................212
1.4.9
Class "Random generator" ................................................................................................212
1.4.10
Class "Performance indicator overview"......................................................................212
1.4.11
Class "Cost center" ...............................................................................................................212
1.5
Conversion............................................................................................................................................212
1.5.1
Class "Subprocess" ..............................................................................................................213
1.5.2
Class "Subprocess" ..............................................................................................................213
2. Library attributes ...........................................................................................................................................214
2.1
Key words (Description) .................................................................................................................215
2.2
Description (Description) ...............................................................................................................215
2.3
Comments (Comments) .................................................................................................................215
2.4
Service (Description)........................................................................................................................215
2.5
Author (Description).........................................................................................................................216
2.6
Creation date (Description)...........................................................................................................216
2.7
Last user (Description)....................................................................................................................216
2.8
Date last changed (Description)..................................................................................................216
2.9
Modes (Layout) ..................................................................................................................................216
2.10 Versioning format (Layout) ...........................................................................................................219
2.11 Page layout (Layout) ........................................................................................................................219
2.12 Object arrangement (Layout) .......................................................................................................219
2.13 External coupling (Layout).............................................................................................................220
2.14 Connector marks - Numbers (Layout) .....................................................................................225
2.15 Connector marks - Graphical representation (Layout)......................................................225
2.16 Quick access bars - User defined (Layout).............................................................................225
2.17 Quick access bars - Library bars (Layout) ..............................................................................226
2.18 Configuration of documentation (Layout)...............................................................................226
2.19 Default settings (Layout) ................................................................................................................237
2.20 Relation analysis (Analysis)...........................................................................................................237
2.21 Simulation definition - Simtext (Simulation) .........................................................................238
2.22 Simulation definition - Simmapping (Simulation)...............................................................239
2.23 Simulation definition - Sim result mapping (Simulation) ................................................239
2.24 Simulation definition - Variable check (Simulation) ...........................................................240
2.25 Agent definition (Simulation) .......................................................................................................240
2.26 Enterprise time - days per year (Simulation) ........................................................................241
2.27 Enterprise time - hours per day (Simulation) .......................................................................241
2.28 Process cost analysis - CCC Mapping (Evaluation).............................................................241
2.29 Process cost analysis - CCC Default setting (Evaluation) .................................................242
2.30 Dynamic evaluation modules (Evaluation) .............................................................................242

V.

Index................................................................................................................243

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page V

Preface
Welcome to

The integrated Business Process Management and Knowledge toolkit from BOC GmbH.
ADONIS offers you a wide-range of various functionalities in the following operational areas:
E-Business:
E-business application development, as well as constant and integrated modelling of business
models, Business Processes, products, IT systems and IT infrastructures.
Business process management:
Acquisition, modelling, analysis, simulation, evaluation, documentation and realisation of
Business Processes.
Process-based application development:
Application development with workflow, CASE-, groupware and object technology as well as
process-based introduction of standard software.
Process Warehouses:
Operational data management and Evaluation based on business process and integrated
solutions with different workflow products .
Knowledge management - Training and Learning:
Production of training supports through graphic models and process orientated knowledge
management.
ADONIS is a client/server multi-user system, which has an object-oriented structure.
Additionally, ADONIS has a remarkable adaptation possibility, so it can be configured according
to your needs and developed according to your requirements(ADONIS-customising)".
We hope that our tool meets your requirements and that you have a lot of fun working with
ADONIS.
Your BOC team
Vienna, 2005

1.

Note

Designation of people within this documentation

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 1

Preface

We would like to explicitly state here that wherever the third person singular is used within this
manual, this is intended to include female as well as male persons. The use of the male form of
description is not intended to be discriminatory in any way but is simply used in order to ensure
consistent descriptions.

Pictures within this documentation

The pictures within this documentation were created using ADONIS 3.81 for Windows 2000 and
Windows XP. If you are using different operating system, the appearance of some screens may
be slightly different.
IMPORTANT:

page 2

Further publication of this documentation in any form (including

copies) is not permitted without the express permission of BOC GmbH.

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Part I
ADONIS
Successful and dynamic enterprises can achieve decisive competitive advantage through the
ability to adapt their Business Processes quickly to the rapidly changing market conditions and
through the active arrangement of their core competencies. The increasing dynamic,
globalisation and increasing competition makes efficient Business Process Management an
essential goal.
To enable this, the Procedural Modelling, Analysis, Simulation and Evaluation of Business
Processes is an decisive success factor. The goals of Business Process Management are the
optimisation of both the processes of an enterprise as well as the resources and technology
which execute those processes.
The ADONIS Business Process Management toolkit, which was developed by BOC Information
Technologies Consulting GmbH in co-operation with the University of Vienna offers essential tool
support for Re-engineering and Reorganisation of projects.
ADONIS was specifically designed for the particular needs of financial services organisations and
provides functionality primarily for the following application areas:
Business Process Optimisation / Business Process Re-engineering (BPR)
Quality Management / ISO9000 Certification and Maintenance
Controlling (Process Costing)
Personnel Management (Personnel and Resource planning)
Organisation Management (Enterprise documentation, Job descriptions etc.)
Information Management (Creation of technical concepts for IT systems, Interfaces to
Workflow and CASE systems, Introduction of ERP Systems)
Creation of electronic handbooks which can be made available over an intranet with the use
of powerful multi media functionality
Evaluation of Business Processes (Benchmarking, Monitoring, "Should-be" comparison)
The "Meta-concept" of ADONIS means that through customising, the tool can be configured to
optimally suit the particular requirements of any user. The ADONIS user can decide by himself
how he should build the processes and how he can best use the ADONIS mechanisms. As
ADONIS is method independent, the management of Business Processes on different levels is
guaranteed.

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 3

Part II
The ADONIS standard method
The ADONIS standard method describes a universal modelling technique to model diagrams
and organisation charts.
The method is based on the experience and know-how collected by BOC in business process
and knowledge management projects and is a industry-neutral methodology for modelling,
documentation and optimisation of the business. The available model types (see chap. 1., p. 7)
enable an integrated and consistent representation of strategy to deployment-relevant
information on different levels.

Within this document you will find:

Information for ADONIS users
-

Model types (see chap. 1., p. 7)

Classes (see chap. 2., p. 13)

Relations (see chap. 3., p. 48)

Pre-defined queries and relation tables (see chap. 4., p. 58)

Library specific functionality (see chap. 5., p. 76)

Example models (see chap. 9., p. 117)

Information for ADONIS administrators

-

Class attributes (see Part IV., p. 143)

Library attributes (see chap. 2., p. 214)

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 5

Part III
Information for ADONIS users
Within this part of the method manual you will find an overview of the model types, classes, and
relations contained in the ADONIS standard application library 3.81. Moreover it should explain
which queries and relation tables can be used and which library specific functions are available.
An introduction together with example models should make easier to understand the ADONIS
standard method library version 3.81 and its features.
The areas are:
Model types (see chap. 1., p. 7)
Classes (see chap. 2., p. 13)
Relations (see chap. 3., p. 48)
Predefined queries and relation tables (see chap. 4., p. 58)
-

Analysis component (see chap. 4.1, p. 58)

Evaluation component (see chap. 4.2, p. 70)

Library-specific functions (see chap. 5., p. 76)

-

Modelling component (see chap. 5.2, p. 78)

Simulation component (see chap. 5.3, p. 93)

Import-/Export component (see chap. 5.5, p. 97)

Example models (see chap. 9., p. 117)

Attribute profiles (see chap. 7., p. 114)

Records (see chap. 8., p. 116)

1.

Model types

In the ADONIS standard application library the following model types are defined:
Company map (see chap. 1.1, p. 8)
Business Process Model (see chap. 1.2, p. 9)
Working Environment model (see chap. 1.3, p. 10)
Document model (see chap. 1.4, p. 11)
Use case diagram (see chap. 1.5, p. 11)
The dependencies and relationships between the model types are summarized in the figure
(see fig. 1, p. 8) below.

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 7

Part III

Figure 1: Model type dependencies in the ADONIS standard application library

The arrows represent the references between the model types. The arrow label indicates name
of attribute that contains a defined reference to the respective model type.

1.1

Company map

Company maps are used to model an overview of Business Process Models (see chap. 1.2, p. 9)
or other company maps. Therefore a company map can be seen as a navigation help and entry
point into the hierarchy of your Business Process Models.
The following classes are available in company maps:
Process (see chap. 2.14, p. 31)
Performance indicator overview (see chap. 2.15, p. 33)
Performance indicator (see chap. 2.16, p. 34)
Note (see chap. 2.18, p. 38)
Aggregation (see chap. 2.19, p. 39)
The following relations are available in company maps:
Has process (see chap. 3.10, p. 54)
Owns (see chap. 3.12, p. 54)
Has Note (see chap. 3.13, p. 55)

page 8

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS users

For company maps only the mode "Standard" has been defined, i.e. all available classes and
relations will always be shown.

1.2

Business Process Model

Business Process Models represent process flows in an organisation. In Business Process

Models the sequence of tasks is modelled with use of (activities) that are needed to resolve a
specific task (process). The control objects (Process start, Decision, Parallelism, Merging and
End) and the Subsequent relation enable to clearly map the tasks and the process as it happens
in the real world (Order, Alternatives, Parallelisms).
In Business Process Models the following classes are available:
Process start (see chap. 2.4, p. 15)
Subprocess (see chap. 2.5, p. 17)
Activity (see chap. 2.6, p. 19)
Decision (see chap. 2.7, p. 24)
Parallelism (see chap. 2.8, p. 25)
Merging (see chap. 2.9, p. 26)
End (see chap. 2.10, p. 27)
Variable (see chap. 2.11, p. 28)
Random generator (see chap. 2.12, p. 29)
Resource (see chap. 2.13, p. 30)
Note (see chap. 2.18, p. 38)
Aggregation (see chap. 2.19, p. 39)
In Business Process Models the following relations are available:
Subsequent (see chap. 3.1, p. 48)
Sets variable (see chap. 3.2, p. 49)
Sets (see chap. 3.3, p. 50)
Uses (see chap. 3.4, p. 50)
Has Note (see chap. 3.13, p. 55)

The following modes are available for Business Process Models:

"Flow"
containing the classes Process start, Subprocess, Activity, Decision, Parallelism, Merging
and End as well as the relation Subsequent.
"Flow - including variables and random generators"
containing the classes Process start, Subprocess, Activity, Decision, Parallelism, Merging
and End, Variable and Random generator as well as the relations Subsequent, Sets
variable and Sets.
"Flow including resources"
containing the classes Process start, Subprocess, Activity, Decision, Parallelism, Merging
and End and Resource as well as the relations Subsequent and Uses.
2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 9

Part III

"Flow including performance indicators"

containing the classes Process start, Subprocess, Activity, Decision, Parallelism, Merging,
End, Performance indicator overview and Performance indicator as well as references
Subsequent and Owns.
"All modelling objects"
containing all available classes and relations.
Note: The classes Note and Aggregation are available in all modes.

1.3

Working Environment model

Working Environment models describe the structure of an organisation (organisation chart).

In Working Environment models the following classes are available:
Organisational unit (see chap. 2.22, p. 42)
Performer (see chap. 2.23, p. 43)
Role (see chap. 2.24, p. 45)
Resource (see chap. 2.25, p. 45)
Cost centre (see chap. 2.26, p. 46)
Note (see chap. 2.18, p. 38)
Aggregation (see chap. 2.19, p. 39)
In Working Environment models the following relations are available:
Is subordinated (see chap. 3.14, p. 55)
Has resource (see chap. 3.15, p. 55)
Belongs to (see chap. 3.16, p. 56)
Is manager (see chap. 3.17, p. 56)
Has role (see chap. 3.18, p. 56)
Uses resource (see chap. 3.19, p. 57)
Is charged to (see chap. 3.20, p. 57)
Is cost centre manager (see chap. 3.21, p. 57)
Has note (see chap. 3.13, p. 55)

In Working Environment models the following modes are available:

"Standard"
containing the classes Organisational unit, Performer and Role as well as the relations Is
subordinated, Belongs to, Is manager and Has role.
"Standard - including Resources"
containing the classes Organisational unit, Performer, Role and Resource as well as the
relations Is subordinated, Has resource, Belongs to, Is manager, Has role and Uses
resource.

page 10

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS users

"Standard - with cost centre"

containing the classes Organisational unit, Performer, Role and Cost centre as well as the
relations Is subordinated, Belongs to, Is manager, Has role, Is charged to and Is cost centre
manager.
"Organisation"
containing the class Organisational unit as well as the relation Is subordinated.
"Role diagram"
containing the classes Performer and Role as well as the relation Has role.
"Resource diagram"
containing the classes Organisational unit, Performer and Resource as well as the relations
Has resource and Uses resource.
"All modelling objects"
containing all available classes and relations.
Note: The classes Note and Aggregation are available in all modes.

1.4

Document model

Document models contain documents (templates), which are utilised in the processes (input,
output to activities etc.).
In document models the following classes are available:
Document (see chap. 2.17, p. 38)
Note (see chap. 2.18, p. 38)
Aggregation (see chap. 2.19, p. 39)
In document models the following relations are available:
Has note (see chap. 3.13, p. 55)
Has Subdocument (see chap. 3.11, p. 54)
For document models only the mode "Standard" has been defined, i.e. all available classes and
relations will always be shown.

1.5

Use Case Diagram

In Use case diagrams interactions between systems and involved parties are shown and
described.
The involved parties have requirements for the system in order to reach goals. These
requirements lead to a number of interactions with the system. Then the system performs
actions to fulfil these requirements.
The ideal way (i.e. a series of steps and the communication with the involved parties) to deal
with such a request is called a scenario in Unified modelling Language (UML). UML is a method
to model object-oriented systems in complex software systems. Scenarios in UML are not
explicitly modelled but can be additionally described in textual form.
There are many methods and scenarios to accomplish the user's goal such as I would like to
withdraw money from my bank account. The money can e.g. be withdrawn using an ATM machine
or by going to a bank counter. These are two of the possible scenarios. Later on, it is possible

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 11

Part III

that the transaction cannot be completed and the customer cannot withdraw the money. Also
scenarios have to be described to deal with exceptions, errors, etc.
All scenarios relating to the same user target are grouped into a use case which is represented
by the ellipse in the diagram. The use case Withdraw money from account summarises all
possible scenarios to withdraw money from an account. The use case, on the one hand,
describes the responsibility of the system bank in relation to its customers. On the other hand it
describes the requirements from the customers to the system.
In use case diagrams the users interacting with a system are shown and the requirements from
the users which have to be fulfilled by the system are modelled. The requirements describe the
internal system and the users the system environment. In use case diagrams particular
importance is given to the interface between systems and the system environment. With the
third modelling element, the system interface, this distinction can be emphasized.
Use cases are often used in the early phases of an IT project to support the requirements
analysis. Requirements for a future or existing system and the involved parties are defined.
Involved parties put requests to the system and therefore have a relation to the system. These
relationships can be shown very clearly using a use case diagram.

In use case diagrams the following classes are available:

Actor (see chap. 2.1, p. 13)
Use case (see chap. 2.2, p. 14)
System boundary (see chap. 2.3, p. 14)
Note (see chap. 2.18, p. 38)
In use case diagrams the following relations are available:
Communicates (see chap. 3.5, p. 50)
Contains (see chap. 3.6, p. 51)
Extends (see chap. 3.7, p. 52)
Generalisation (see chap. 3.8, p. 52)
Has note< (see chap. 3.13, p. 55)
Uses (see chap. 3.9, p. 53)

For use case diagrams only the mode "Standard" has been defined, i.e. all available classes and
relations will always be shown.

page 12

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS users

2.

Classes

The list mentioned below contains all the classes needed to create models. Its availability in a
model depends on the chosen Model type (see chap. 1., p. 7) and on the selected view mode.
Note: The description of the view modes you can find in the chapters on particular
model types Company map (see chap. 1.1, p. 8), Business Process Model
(see chap. 1.2, p. 9), Working Environments model (see chap. 1.3, p. 10), Document
model (see chap. 1.4, p. 11) and Use case diagram (see chap. 1.5, p. 11).

2.1

Class "Actor"

An actor describes a role participating and interacting with the system.

When modelling a system interface it is not important, which of the actual persons (e.g. Smith,
McDyes, etc.) are querying the system. All participating persons are grouped into roles due to
their requirements and are assigned a role according to this. This ensures that from a modelling
point of view only homogenous groups (e.g. customers or managers) will remain. Different
participants within one group have the same demands towards the system, the same role and
are modelled with a single actor-symbol.
For the class "Actor" the following attributes are defined:
Name (Description):
Description (Description): Enter a description of the "Actor".
For documentation purposes.
Comment (Description): Enter a comment.
For documentation purposes.
Open questions (Description): You can enter questions that are still open for this object.
If you enter text here, a red question mark appears above the object symbol on the drawing
area.
Bezeichnung (Deutsch): Geben Sie eine Bezeichnung ein.
Dient der Dokumentation.
Beschreibung (Deutsch): Geben Sie eine Beschreibung ein.
Dient der Dokumentation.
Kommentar (Deutsch): Geben Sie einen Kommentar ein.
Dient der Dokumentation.

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 13

Part III

2.2

Class "Use case"

A use case describes a function that is visible for the user. It helps the user to achieve a certain
goal.
The size and number of use cases for a system are not defined and can be selected depending
on the user, for particular circumstances.
For the class "Use case" the following attributes are defined:
Name (Description):
Description (Description): Enter a description of the "Use case".
For documentation purposes.
Comment (Description): Enter a comment.
For documentation purposes.
External documentation (Description): The "External documentation" enables the
integration of existing design documents, as well as complementary external documents.
Details (Description): The attribute "Details" can be used to decompose the current use
case within a separate Use case diagram.
Open questions (Description): You can enter questions that are still open for this object.
If you enter text here, a red question mark appears above the object symbol on the drawing
area;
Bezeichnung (Deutsch): Geben Sie eine Bezeichnung ein.
Dient der Dokumentation.
Beschreibung (Deutsch): Geben Sie eine Beschreibung ein.
Dient der Dokumentation.
Kommentar (Deutsch): Geben Sie einen Kommentar ein.
Dient der Dokumentation.

2.3

page 14

Class "System boundary"

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS users

With the system boundary several use cases, which build a logical unit, can be summarised..
For the class "System boundary" the following attributes are defined:
Name (Description):
Representation (Description): Select whether the object name should be displayed inside
or outside the object.
Description (Description): Enter a description of the system boundary.
For documentation purposes.
Comment (Description): Enter a comment for the system boundary.
For documentation purposes;
Open questions (Description): You can enter questions that are still open for this object.
If you enter text here, a red question mark appears above the object symbol on the drawing
area.
Bezeichnung (Deutsch): Geben Sie eine Bezeichnung der Systemgrenze ein.
Dient der Dokumentation.
Beschreibung (Deutsch): Geben Sie eine Beschreibung der Systemgrenze ein.
Dient der Dokumentation.
Kommentar (Deutsch): Geben Sie einen Kommentar zur Systemgrenze ein.
Dient der Dokumentation.

2.4

Class "Process start"

Every business process model must contain exactly one Process start object, which symbolizes
the beginning of the business process model.
The object "Process start" has no predecessor and only one subsequent and variables can be
assigned to the Process start.
For the class "Process start" the following attributes are defined:
Name (Description):
Order (Description): This attribute can be set with the help of the "Object numbering"
function, which numbers the objects of the business process model.
This can be useful for example within the component "Documentation", to ensure that all
objects are documented in the required order.
Description (Description): Enter a description of the "Process start".
For documentation purposes.
Comment (Description): Enter a comment for the Process start.

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 15

Part III

For documentation purposes.

Trigger (Description): Enter a trigger for the business process model.
For documentation purposes.
Result (Description): Enter the result of the business process for documentation purposes.
External documentation (Description): The "External documentation" enables the
integration of existing design documents, as well as complementary external documents.
Referenced documents (Description): You can reference a desired document from a
Document model.
Process responsibility (Description): Enter into this attribute the information for the
Process responsibility as follows:
Role/Performer: Select a role or a performer from a working environment model. This role
or this performer is responsible for the process.
Classification: Enter whether the responsible role/performer is mainly responsible/on behalf
of/supporting.
Description: Enter a detailed description for the ownership.
Open questions (Description): You can enter questions that are still open for this object.
If you enter text here, a red question mark appears above the object symbol on the drawing
area.
Input (Input/Output): Reference the input document from a document model here.
Output (Input/Output): Reference the output document from a document model here.
Quantity (Simulation data): Please enter the number of occurrences of the business
process within the chosen time period.
The value in this field will be used by the "Capacity Analysis" simulation algorithm.
Time period (Simulation data): Please select the time period (per day, per month or per
year) in which the business process occurs "quantity" number of times.
The selected option will be used by the "Capacity Analysis" simulation algorithm.
Process calendar (Simulation data): The Process start calendar is evaluated and used in
the simulation algorithm "Workload Analysis".
It describes the occurrences of the business processes over one year. It is possible to define
a number of "typical" day profiles, which can then be assigned to all the days of the year.
The day profile is constructed by time intervals within which a probability distribution is
assigned. Those probability distributions within the various day profiles describe the time
between two process starts.
Tolerance waiting time (Simulation data): Enter the tolerance waiting time, after which the
process should be cancelled.
This will only be evaluated during the Workload Analysis.
Abandon after tolerance waiting time (Simulation data): Define whether the process should
be canceled, if the time interval between the process start and the execution of the first
activity is greater than the tolerance waiting time.
This will only be evaluated during the Workload Analysis.
Cost driver (Simulation data): Enter the cost driver for the process cost analysis.
Cost driver quantity (Simulation data): Enter the quantity of the cost driver for the process
cost analysis.
Aggregated cycle time (Simulation results): The value of this attribute contains an
estimator for the expected cycle time of the business process.
More information about the relevant period can be found in the attribute "Info on results".
page 16

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS users

Aggregated execution time (Simulation results): The value of this attribute contains an
estimator of the expected value of the execution time of the business process.
More information can be found in the attribute "Info on results".
Aggregated waiting time (Simulation results): The value of this attribute contains an
estimator for the expected value of the waiting time of the business process.
More information can be found in the attribute "Info on results".
Aggregated resting time (Simulation results): The value of this attribute contains an
estimator for the expected value of the resting time of the business-process.
More information about the relevant period can be found in the attribute "Info on results".
Aggregated transport time (Simulation results): The value of this attribute contains an
estimator for the expected value of the transport time of the business-process.
More information about the relevant period can be found in the attribute "Info on results".
Aggregated costs (Simulation results): The value of this attribute contains an estimator for
the expected activity-costs of this business process.
More information about the relevant period can be found in the attribute "Info on result".
Aggregated personnel costs (Simulation results): The value of this attribute contains an
estimator for the expected value of the personnel costs of the business process.
More information about the relevant period can be found in the attribute "Info on results".
Info on results (Simulation results): The value of this attribute gives more information
about the last evaluation carried out.
Bezeichnung (Deutsch): Geben Sie eine Bezeichnung des Prozestarts an.
Dient der Dokumentation.
Beschreibung (Deutsch): Geben Sie eine Beschreibung des Prozestartes ein.
Dient der Dokumentation.
Kommentar (Deutsch): Geben Sie einen Kommentar zum Prozestart ein.
Dient der Dokumentation;

2.5

Class "Subprocess"

It is possible to call other processes with the object "Subprocess". Rather than repeating the
same process steps within a larger model a number of times, it makes sense to create a
subprocess, which can be called wherever necessary. The Subprocess object can also be useful
when you want to structure your business processes to maximise clarity.
It must have at least one predecessor and at most one subsequent.
If the name of a business process model is entered in the attribute "Referenced subprocess",
then that name will be visualised, otherwise the object name will be visualised by default.
For the class "Subprocess" the following attributes are defined:
2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 17

Part III

Name (Description):
Referenced subprocess (Description): Enter the model name of the subprocess which is to
be called.
Please be careful that the name entered here matches that of the model to be called.
Display name and reference (Description): Activate this option, so that both the object
name and the model name of the subprocess are displayed in the model graphic.
Order (Description): This attribute can be set with the help of the "Object numbering"
function, which numbers the objects of the business process model.
This can be useful for example within the component "Documentation", to ensure that all
objects are documented in the required order.
Description (Description): Enter a description of the "Subprocess".
For documentation purposes.
Comment (Description): Enter a comment for the subprocess.
For documentation purposes.
Open questions (Description): You can enter here questions that are still open for this
object.
If you enter text here, a red question mark appears above the object symbol on the drawing
area.
Performer (Working environment): You can assign performers, i.e. you can link business
processes to working environments.
The expression entered here is used in all activities of the referenced process (and of the
subprocesses that it possibly references), if no performer assignment has been entered in
these activities.
The dialogue button on the right above the input field "Performer" calls the support dialogue
for entering the performer assignment.
The value of this attribute is required for the simulation.
In addition to the static elements of AQL you can use the two dynamic constructions
"Performer of" and "Done by" for the assignment of performers in the capacity and workload
analysis.
"Performer of": process intern, syntax: performer of <Activity>
The result is the performer of the working environment model, who executed the activity
during simulation.
This way it is secured that an activity will be executed by the same performer as assigned in
the performer field (useful, when e.g. many performers work in the same department, but
only one of them executes the whole process flow).
Example: Performer of "Contract be filed"
"Done by": process inter-referenced, syntax: done by <Variable>
The result is the performer of the working environment model, who executes the activity
during simulation, at which the variable refers to. To use this construction the name of the
variable of the refered activity should be entered in the "Done by" attribute.
Example: Done by "Contract performer"
Aggregated execution time (Simulation results): This attribute contains the aggregated
execution time determined by the simulation for the business process model entered in the
attribute "Referenced subprocess" with respect to a year or a business process.
More information about the relevant period can be found in the referenced business process
model in the attribute "Info on results" of the Process start object.
If no model has been referenced, the default value "00:000:00:00:00" is displayed.

page 18

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS users

Note: The attribute value is automatically updated and cannot be changed.

Aggregated waiting time (Simulation results): This attribute contains the aggregated
waiting time determined by the simulation for the business process model entered in the
attribute "Referenced subprocess" with respect to a year or a business process.
More information about the relevant period can be found in the referenced business process
model in the attribute "Info on results" of the Process start object.
If no model has been referenced, the default value "00:000:00:00:00" is displayed.
Note: The attribute value is automatically updated and cannot be changed.
Aggregated resting time (Simulation results): This attribute contains the aggregated resting
time determined by the simulation for the business process model entered in the attribute
"Referenced subprocess" with respect to a year or a business process.
More information about the relevant period can be found in the referenced business process
model in the attribute "Info on results" of the Process start object.
If no model has been referenced, the default value "00:000:00:00:00" is displayed.
Note: The attribute value is automatically updated and cannot be changed.
Aggregated transport time (Simulation results): This attribute contains the aggregated
transport time determined by the simulation for the business process model entered in the
attribute "Referenced subprocess" with respect to a year or a business process.
More information about the relevant period can be found in the referenced business process
model in the attribute "Info on results" of the Process start object.
If no model has been referenced, the default value "00:000:00:00:00" is displayed.
Note: The attribute value is automatically updated and cannot be changed.
Aggregated costs (Simulation results): This attribute contains the aggregated costs
determined by the simulation for the business process model entered in the attribute
"Referenced subprocess" with respect to a year or a business process.
More information about the relevant period can be found in the referenced business process
model in the attribute "Info on results" of the Process start object.
If no model has been referenced, the default value "00:000:00:00:00" is displayed.
Note: The attribute value is automatically updated and cannot be changed.
Bezeichnung (Deutsch): Geben Sie eine Bezeichnung des Prozeaufrufes ein.
Dient der Dokumentation.
Beschreibung (Deutsch): Geben Sie eine Beschreibung des Prozeaufrufes ein.
Dient der Dokumentation.
Kommentar (Deutsch): Geben Sie einen Kommentar zum Prozeaufruf ein.
Dient der Dokumentation.

2.6

Class "Activity"

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 19

Part III

Activities describe which tasks in a business process model are to be executed.

The object "Activity" has at least one predecessor and at most one subsequent. The level of
detail at which activities are described can vary according to the requirements of the modeller.
One or more variables can be assigned to an activity.
For the class "Activity" the following attributes are defined:
Name (Description):
Order (Description): This attribute can be set with the help of the "Object numbering"
function, which numbers the objects of the business process model.
This can be useful for example within the component "Documentation", to ensure that all
objects are documented in the required order.
Description (Description): Enter a description of the "Activity".
For documentation purposes.
Comment (Description): Enter a comment for the activity.
For documentation purposes.
Responsible role (Description): Select the role, which executes this activity, from a working
environment model.
The role defined in this attribute is assigned to the attribute "Performer" (Simulation data).
By activating the option "Display responsible role", the role is displayed on the object area. A
"Hotspot" is created at the same time. That means you can switch from the activity to the
assigned role in the working environment model by a mouse click.
Display responsible role (Description):
Classification (Description): Select one or more options to classify this activity.
For documentation purposes.
Note - The selection of following values is displayed graphically in the top left corner of the
Activity object:
- "manual" with a hand symbol
- "checking" with an eye symbol
- "automatic" with a computer symbol
- "manual" AND "automatic" with a flash and the text "Error", since this combination should
not appear
External documentation (Description): The "External documentation" enables the
integration of the existing information sources (documents, tables, graphics and web
pages...) in the business processes.
Referenced documents (Description): You can reference a desired document from the
Document model.
Referenced use cases (Description): Here you can indicate a use case diagram for each
activity, which shows a use case in more detail.
Open questions (Description): You can enter here questions that are still open for this
object.
If you enter text here, a red question mark appears above the object symbol on the drawing
area.
Input (Input/Output): Reference the input document of your document model here.
Output (Input/Output): Reference the output document of your document model here.
Execution time (Time/Costs): This is the time taken to actually execute the activity.

page 20

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS users

The format for time is yy:ddd:hh:mm:ss (years-days-hours-minutes-seconds). The default

value for each time field is "00:000:00:00:00".
The value in this field is used in the simulation algorithms. If no time value is entered, the
value of each time type will be zero in the simulation.
Waiting time (Time/Costs): This is the time between the possible and the actual start of the
execution of the activity.
The format for time is yy:ddd:hh:mm:ss (years-days-hours-minutes-seconds). The default
value for each time field is "00:000:00:00:00".
The value in this field is used in the simulation algorithms. If no time value is entered, the
value of each time type will be zero in the simulation.
Resting time (Time/Costs): This is the time between the completion of an activity and its
transport to the following activity.
The format for time is yy:ddd:hh:mm:ss (years-days-hours-minutes-seconds). The default
value for each time field is "00:000:00:00:00".
The value in this field is used in the simulation algorithms. If no time value is entered, the
value of each time type will be zero in the simulation.
Transport time (Time/Costs): This is the time used for transport to the next activity.
The format for time is yy:ddd:hh:mm:ss (years-days-hours-minutes-seconds). The default
value for each time field is "00:000:00:00:00".
The value in this field is used in the simulation algorithms. If no time value is entered, the
value of each time type will be zero in the simulation.
Costs (Time/Costs): Enter the costs for the execution of the activity.
EDP transaction costs (Time/Costs): Enter the EDP transaction costs.
This attribute will be evaluated by the process cost analysis.
EDP batch costs (Time/Costs): Enter the EDP batch costs.
This attribute will be evaluated by the process cost analysis.
Print costs (Time/Costs): Enter the print costs.
This attribute will be evaluated by the process cost analysis.
Postal costs (Time/Costs): Enter the postal costs.
This attribute will be evaluated by the process cost analysis.
Performer (Working environment): It is possible to assign a performer that is a reference
between business processes and working environment.
The assigned performer will be used in all the called processes. If the process calls its
subprocesses, the performer will be used in all these subprocesses without his special
assignment to their activities.
At the top right of the field "Performer" you will find a dialogue button, which will give
assistance in making performer assignments.
The value of this attribute is needed for the simulation.
Apart from the static elements of AQL also the dynamic elements of "performer of" and
"done by" can be used in the Capacity and Workload analysis.
"performer of": process intern; syntax: performer of <Activity>
The result is the performer of the working environment model, who executed the activity
during simulation.
This way it is secured that an activity will be executed by the same performer as assigned in
the performer field (useful, when e.g. many performers work in the same department, but
only one of them executes the whole process flow).
Example: performer of "Contract be filed"
2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 21

Part III

"done by": process inter-referenced; syntax: done by <Variable>

The result is the performer of the working environment model, who executes the activity
during simulation, at which the variable refers to. To use this construction the name of the
variable of the refered activity should be entered in the "done by" attribute.
Example: done by "Contract performer"
Continuous execution (Working environment): If "continuous execution" is activated
(value=yes) then this means this activity will be executed by the same performer (if
possible) as in the previous activity.
This activity will be placed at the top of the list of orders that should be executed by the
performer, so that execution by the performer is secured in order to avoid (unrealistic)
waiting time.
Note: The "Continuous execution" is evaluated by the simulation algorithm "Workload
Simulation".
Execution interruptible
(Working environment): When the activity is "Execution
interruptible" (value=yes) then the execution of the process is interrupted at this activity
when the working time of the performer is ended.
When the activity is not execution interruptible the process will continue also in the
performers free time.
Note: This attribute is evaluated only in the Workload Simulation.
Task stack (Working environment): Choose "personal" when the activity is to be executed
directly by a specific performer. The assignment will be successful even if the performer is
not currently available. The activity remains in the performer's task stack until he executes it.
Choose "global" when the activity may be executed by the next free performer. Only
available performers may execute activities.
Note: This attribute is only evaluated in the Workload Analysis.
Done by (Working environment): By entering a variable name into this attribute, the name
of the performer who executes the activity will be saved into that variable. Through the
"done by" construct it is possible to refer to this variable during execution of interreference
AQL expression (Capacity and Workload analysis).
Example:
Assign to the "done by" field: Application performer
The reference to the application performer through an AQL expression: done by "Application
performer"
Cooperative (Other simulation data): An activity is co-operative (value=yes) when more
than one performer, out of potential performers, is chosen to execute it, when the activity is
delegated to all potential performers.
The execution of the activity by the performers starts when enough performers are available
(see "Average number of participants" and "Max. start period"). The execution of an activity
by the performers may be either synchronous which means that all performers must
execute it at the same time or asynchronous where there is a time slack (see "Cooperation
mode").
Cooperation mode (Other simulation data): A synchronous activity (value=synchron) is
executed by all performers to whom the activity has been delegated at the same time (see
"Average number of participants" and "Min. quota of presence").
An asynchronous executed activity (value=asynchron), is being executed by all performers
with the time slack, i.e. as soon as one performer is available for the execution of the
delegated activity.
Average number of participants (Other simulation data): This attribute is evaluated by the
simulation algorithm "Path Analysis" during the execution of co-operative activities.

page 22

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS users

During path analysis, activities are not assigned to specific performers. Therefore a cooperative activity is doubled during analysis by the "Average number of participants" and
these are then executed like parallel activities.
Min. quota of presence (Other simulation data): This attribute is evaluated during the
execution of the co-operative activities by the simulation algorithm "Workload Analysis".
It refers to the minimum number of performers who must be present before a synchronous,
co-operative activity can be executed.
If a sufficient number of performers are not available, the activity is delayed until they
become available. The maximum delay period is held in the attribute "Max. start period".
Max. start period (Other simulation data): This attribute is evaluated during the execution
of the co-operative activities by the simulation algorithm "Workload Analysis".
The value of the "Max. start period" attribute indicates the maximum length of time for
which a co-operative activity may not be executed until a sufficient number of performers is
available (see "Min. quota of presence").
Priority (Other simulation data): Enter the priority for the activity to be executed.
The larger the value of this attribute, the higher the activity's priority. Then, the execution of
such an activity in the simulation is done according to its priority. Activities with the same
priority are worked out according to their delivery order.
Max. resource waiting time (Other simulation data): The maximum resource waiting time
declares the resource waiting time period for which a performer awaits the necessary
resources to become available.
If the resource waiting time is greater than declared, the performer will reassign the activity
within the task stack.
Example:
If the value of this attribute is: "00:000:00:05:00".
This means that the performer of this task will wait maximum 5 minutes for the necessary
resource to become available. This task will then be attempted again when the following task
has been completed.
Number (Simulation results): The number contains the number of times this activity was
executed concerning the last evaluation carried out.
Aggregated execution time (Simulation results): This attribute contains the whole execution
time of an activity (either referenced to a year or a business process).
More information can be found in the attribute "Info on results".
Aggregated waiting time (Simulation results): This attribute contains the whole waiting
time of an activity (either referenced to a year or a business process).
More information can be found in the attribute "Info on results".
Aggregated resting time (Simulation results): This attribute contains the whole resting time
of an activity (either referenced to a year or a business process).
More information about the relevant period can be found in the attribute "Info on results".
Aggregated transport time (Simulation results): This attribute contains the whole transport
time of an activity (either referenced to a year or a business process).
More information about the relevant period can be found in the attribute "Info on results".
Aggregated costs (Simulation results): This attribute contains the costs of an activity (either
referenced to a year or a business process).
More information can be found in the attribute "Info on results".
Aggregated personnel costs (Simulation results): This attribute contains the personnel
costs of an activity (either referenced to a year or a business process).
More information can be found in the attribute "Info on results".
2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 23

Part III

Info on results (Simulation results): The value of this attribute gives more information
about the last evaluation carried out.
External tool coupling (External tool coupling):
Bezeichnung (Deutsch): Geben Sie die Bezeichnung der Aktivitt ein.
Dient der Dokumentation.
Beschreibung (Deutsch): Geben Sie die Beschreibung der Aktivitt ein.
Dient der Dokumentation.
Kommentar (Deutsch): Geben Sie einen Kommentar zur Aktivitt ein.
Dient der Dokumentation.

2.7

Class "Decision"

The decision object within a business process model allows pre-defined variables to be queried
in order to determine the path through the process.
A decision has at least one predecessor and at least two subsequents.
During a simulation only one of the subsequents must be "true" that is an correct value in the
attribute "Transition condition" of the "Subsequents".
During the analytical evaluation, the subsequent connectors of the decisions have to be set with
a transition probability, where the sum of all transition probabilities of the subsequent
connectors outgoing from a decision object must always be (1).
If the sum of all transition probabilities of the subsequent connectors outgoing from a decision
object is not (1), it will be displayed in the graphical representation with a red "!" (on the right
above the decision object) meaning that no analytical evaluation is possible.
For the class "Decision" the following attributes are defined:
Name (Description):
Order (Description): This attribute can be set by the "Object numbering" function, which
numbers the objects of the business process model.
This can be useful for example within the component "Documentation", to ensure that all
objects are documented in the required order.
Description (Description): Enter a description of the "Decision".
For documentation purposes.
Comment (Description): Enter a comment for the decision.
For documentation purposes.
Open questions (Description): You can enter questions that are still open for this object.
If you enter text here, a red question mark appears above the object symbol on the drawing
area.

page 24

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS users

Bezeichnung (Deutsch): Geben Sie eine Bezeichnung der Entscheidung ein.

Dient der Dokumentation.
Beschreibung (Deutsch): Geben Sie eine Beschreibung der Entscheidung ein.
Dient der Dokumentation.
Kommentar (Deutsch): Geben Sie einen Kommentar zur Entscheidung ein.
Dient der Dokumentation.

2.8

Class "Parallelity"

The parallelism makes it possible for several paths in a business process to be executed at the
same time.
Every parallelism ends with a union (Merging object).
The object parallelity has at least one predecessor and at least two subsequents. A transition
condition can be set on a subsequent relation following a parallelism object. This means that
one (or more) of the "parallel" paths may be followed only in certain conditions
The object "parallelity" should have the same number of subsequents as the corresponding
"Merging" object has predecessors. The only exception is allowed, when a "Decision" splits a path
into two or more (logical) paths. Only the paths which started from the object "Parallelity" may
lead to the corresponding object "Merging".
The name of a parallelism can be visualised, if required by changing the "Representation"
attribute in the Notebook.
For the class "Parallelity" the following attributes are defined:
Name (Description):
Representation (Description): State whether the name of the parallelity should be
visualised.
Order (Description): This attribute can be set by the "Object numbering" function, which
numbers the objects of the business process model.
This can be useful for example within the component "Documentation", to ensure that all
objects are documented in the required order.
Modeling direction (Description): Please select the modelling direction:
- from left to right (horizontal),
- up to down (vertical)
The graphical representation on the drawing area will be adjusted accordingly.
Description (Description): Enter a description of the "Parallelity".
For documentation purposes.
Comment (Description): Enter a comment for the parallelism.

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 25

Part III

For documentation purposes.

Bezeichnung (Deutsch): Geben Sie eine Bezeichnung der Parallelitt ein.
Dient der Dokumentation.
Beschreibung (Deutsch): Geben Sie eine Beschreibung der Parallelitt ein.
Dient der Dokumentation.
Kommentar (Deutsch): Geben Sie einen Kommentar zur Parallelitt ein.
Dient der Dokumentation.

2.9

Class "Merging"

With the "Merging" object, parallel paths are re-joined.

The object "Merging" has as many predecessors as the corresponding object "Parallelity" has
subsequents, and it has at most one subsequent. The only exception is allowed, when a
"Decision" splits a path into two or more (logical) paths. Only the paths which started from the
object "Parallelity" may lead to the corresponding object "Merging".
The name of a Merging object can be visualised, if required, by changing the "Representation"
attribute.
For the class "Merging" the following attributes are defined:
Name (Description):
Representation (Description): Select whether the name should be displayed on the drawing
area.
Order (Description): This attribute can be set by the "Object numbering" function, which
numbers the objects of the business process model.
This can be useful for example within the component "Documentation", to ensure that all
objects are documented in the required order.
Modeling direction (Description): Please select the modelling direction.
- from left to right (horizontal),
- up to down (vertical)
he graphical Representation on the drawing area will be adjusted accordingly.
Description (Description): Enter a description of the "Merging".
For documentation purposes.
Comment (Description): Enter a comment for the merging.
For documentation purposes.
Bezeichnung (Deutsch): Geben Sie eine Bezeichnung der Vereinigung ein.
Dient der Dokumentation.

page 26

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS users

Beschreibung (Deutsch): Geben Sie eine Beschreibung der Vereinigung ein.

Dient der Dokumentation.
Kommentar (Deutsch): Geben Sie einen Kommentar zur Vereinigung ein.
Dient der Dokumentation.

2.10

Class "End"

The object "End" marks the end of business process path. Several objects of the class "End" are
allowed in one model.
The object "End" has at least one predecessor and no subsequent.
The name of the end-object can be visualised with the appropriate adjustments of the attribute
"Representation".
For the class "End" the following attributes are defined:
Name (Description):
Representation (Description): Select whether the name of the End object should be
displayed.
Order (Description): This attribute can be set by the "Object numbering" function, which
numbers the objects of the business process model.
This can be useful for example within the component "Documentation", to ensure that all
objects are documented in the required order.
Type (Description): A local end indicates the end of the current business process and the
return to a calling business process. The path will then continue through the calling process.
However the path in the calling process is now interrupted and returns to its calling
process... and so on... until the entire process ends.
A global end indicates the end of the current business process and the return to the calling
business process.
If a global end occurs inside a parallelism, then the path continues until the corresponding
merging and then the process ends as described above.
Description (Description): Enter a description of the "End".
For documentation purposes.
Comment (Description): Enter a comment for the end.
For documentation purposes.
Bezeichnung (Deutsch): Geben Sie eine Bezeichnung des Endes ein.
Dient der Dokumentation.
Beschreibung (Deutsch): Geben Sie eine Beschreibung des Endes ein.
Dient der Dokumentation.

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 27

Part III

Kommentar (Deutsch): Geben Sie einen Kommentar zum Ende ein.

Dient der Dokumentation.

2.11

Class "Variable"

Variables are used to enable transition conditions to be defined in the model.

These transition conditions are set in the "Subsequent" relation (after a Decision or Parallelity).
The object "Variable" does not have any predecessors or any subsequents. The object "Variable"
can be related to the object "Random generator" with the relation "Sets variable".
A variable can be set with different values at different times through the use of several "Random
generator" objects.
For the class "Variable" the following attributes defined:
Name (Description):
Description (Description): Enter a description of the "Variable".
For documentation purposes.
Comment (Description): Enter a comment for the variable.
For documentation purposes.
Variable type (Description): Select the variable type:
- "float", when the value of the variable is to be defined by normal, exponential or uniform
distribution,
- "enumeration", when the value is to be defined by discrete distribution.
It is important to select the correct type as otherwise simulation may result in an error!
Variable scope (Description): The scope of a variable may be either local or global.
A local variable may only be referenced in the model in which the variable was defined. A
global variable may be referenced anywhere within the related model structure i.e. in any
subprocesses or parent processes of the model in which the variable was defined.
A local variable may however be passed as a parameter to a subprocess.
Bezeichnung (Deutsch): Geben Sie eine Bezeichnung der Variable ein.
Dient der Dokumentation.
Beschreibung (Deutsch): Geben Sie eine Beschreibung der Variable ein.
Dient der Dokumentation.
Kommentar (Deutsch): Geben Sie einen Kommentar zur Variable ein.
Dient der Dokumentation.

page 28

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS users

2.12

Class "Random generator"

The Random generator sets a variable with a certain value. The value can be set through a
steady or a discrete distribution function.
The object "Random generator" does not have any predecessors or any subsequents. The object
"Random generator" can be related to the following objects:
- "Variable" through the relation "Sets variable",
- "Process start","Activity" through the relation "Sets".
Several Random generators can set the same "Variable" object with values.
For the class "Random generator" the following attributes are defined:
Value (Description): Select the type of distribution and the corresponding parameters.
The syntax for entering a continuous distribution is:
- for normal distribution: Normal (<Number1>; <Number2>), where <Number1> is the
expectancy and <Number2> is the standard deviation.
Example: Normal (1200; 100) - the variable has a normal distribution with an expected
value of 1200 and a standard deviation of 100.
- for exponential distribution: Exponential (<Number>), where <Number> corresponds to 1
divided by the expectancy (1/E).
Example: Exponential (0,002) - the value is distributed exponentially with the expectancy of
500.
- for uniform distribution: Uniform (<Number1>; <Number2>), where <Number1> is the
lower boundary and <Number2> the upper one.
Example: Equal (0 ; 100) - the variable is distributed uniformly between the boundaries of
0 and 100.
The syntax for the discrete distribution is:
Discrete (<Symbol1> <Number1>; <Symbol2> <Number2> ; ...)
You can define one or more symbols with their probabilities of occurrence (Number1,
Number2, ...). Note the sum of all the probabilities for a discrete distribution must be 1!
Example: Discrete (YES 0.6; NO 0.4) - the variable is assigned with the value "YES" with a
probability of 0.6 and NO with a probability of 0.4. Note the transition conditions are defined
as follows <Variable name>="YES" or <Variable name>="NO".
For cycles, it is possible to assign more than one distribution to the attribute "Value" so that
the value is changed in every cycle. Separate the distribution with ";". During simulation the
first distribution will be run in the first cycle, the second distribution in the second cycle etc.
Description (Description): Enter a description of the "Random generator".
For documentation purposes.
Comment (Description): Enter a comment for the random generator.
For documentation purposes.

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 29

Part III

Information on data collection (Description): The "Information on data collection" enables

the integration of the existing information sources (documents, tables, graphics, web pages
...) in the business processes.
Enter into the path and file name into the field "Program arguments". If you want to open
the referenced document with a program which is different from the default one, select this
program in the field "Executable".
Manual random generator (Description): The activation of the manual random generator
(Value "Yes") enables the manual allocation of variables during the simulation.
The activation of the manual random generator is visualised by the system with a hand
symbol in the graphical representation (on the left above the random generator object).
Info zum Wert der
Variablenbelegung ein.

Variablenbelegung

(Deutsch):

Geben

Sie

den

Wert

der

Dient der Dokumentation.

Beschreibung (Deutsch): Geben Sie eine Beschreibung der Variablenbelegung ein.
Dient der Dokumentation.
Kommentar (Deutsch): Geben Sie einen Kommentar zur Variablenbelegung ein.
Dient der Dokumentation.

2.13

Class "Resource" (__BP_Resource__)

Resources are taken into consideration in the simulation by the algorithms "Workload analysis"
and "Capacity analysis". The object "resource" in a business process model represents exactly
one object "resource" from a working environment model.
The relation is executed by an AQL-expression, which is evaluated dynamically during the
simulation.
In the "Capacity analysis" the resource object is set at its first usage with the corresponding
resource from the working environment and that resource remains until the end of the process
run through.
For the class "Resource" the following attributes are defined:
Name (Description):
Order (Description): This attribute can be set by the "Object numbering" function, which
numbers the objects of the business process model.
This can be useful for example within the component "Documentation", to ensure that all
objects are documented in the required order.
Description (Description): Enter a description of the "Resource".
For documentation purposes.
Comment (Description): Enter a comment for the resource.
For documentation purposes.
page 30

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS users

Type of resource (Description): Select the type of the resource. The graphical
representation on the drawing area will be adjusted accordingly.
Selection (Description): The value of this attribute is used in the simulation algorithms
("Capacity Analysis" and "Workload Analysis"). It is possible to assign resources, i.e. to link
activities with the resources that are required to execute them.
The effect of resources on the cycle time and waiting time of a business process can be
examined by investigating the activities, which use resources.
Mouse-clicking on the dialogue button above the selection box will give support on assigning
resources. In addition to the static elements of AQL, it is possible to use the dynamic
construct "current Performer" for resource assignment (Syntax: current Performer ->
<Resource relation>).
It guarantees that the particular performer will use during the execution of the activity the
assigned resources.
Bezeichnung (Deutsch): Geben Sie eine Bezeichnung der Ressource ein.
Dient der Dokumentation.
Beschreibung (Deutsch): Geben Sie eine Beschreibung der Ressource ein.
Dient der Dokumentation.
Kommentar (Deutsch): Geben Sie einen Kommentar zur Ressource ein.
Dient der Dokumentation.

2.14

Class "Process"

A "Process" is a reference to a Company map or a business process model.

Depending on the model referenced, a process or a business process is symbolized in the
object.
For the class "Process" the following attributes are defined:
Name (Description):
Referenced process (Description): This attribute may contain a reference to a business
process model or a company map.
The graphical representation of the object adjusts itself automatically to the model type
referenced.
Display name and reference (Description): Activate this option, so that both the object
name and the model name of the subprocess, are displayed in the model graphic.
Order (Description): This attribute can be set by the "Object numbering" function, which
numbers the objects of the business process model.
This can be useful for example within the component "Documentation", to ensure that all
objects are documented in the required order.
Description (Description): Enter a description of the "Process".
2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 31

Part III

For documentation purposes.

Comment (Description): Enter a comment.
For documentation purposes.
Open questions (Description): You can enter here questions that are still open for this
object;
If you enter text here, a red question mark appears above the object symbol on the drawing
area.
Input (Input/Output): Reference the input document of your document model here.
Output (Input/Output): Reference the output document of your document model here.
Aggregated cycle time (Simulation results): This attribute contains the aggregated cycle
time of a business process model, which has been produced through simulation, with
respect to one year or one business process (more information about the relevant period
can be found in the attribute "Info on results" of the process start object).
If a model of type "Company map" or no model is referenced, the default value
"00:000:00:00:00" is displayed.
Note: The attribute value is automatically updated and cannot be changed manually.
Aggregated execution time (Simulation results):This attribute contains the aggregated
execution time of an activity with respect to one year or one business process (more
information about the relevant period can be found in the attribute "Info on results").
If a model of type "Company map" or no model is referenced, the default value
"00:000:00:00:00"is displayed.
Note: The attribute value is automatically updated and cannot be changed manually.
Aggregated waiting time (Simulation results): This attribute contains the aggregated
waiting time of an activity with respect to one year or one business process (more
information about the relevant period can be found in the attribute "Info on results").
If a model of type "Company map" or no model is referenced, the default value
"00:000:00:00:00" is displayed.
Note: The attribute value is automatically updated and cannot be changed manually.
Aggregated resting time (Simulation results): This attribute contains the aggregated resting
time of an activity with respect to one year or one business process (more information about
the relevant period can be found in the attribute "Info on results").
If a model of type "Company map" or no model is referenced, the default value
"00:000:00:00:00" is displayed.
Note: The attribute value is automatically updated and cannot be changed manually.
Aggregated transport time (Simulation results): This attribute contains the aggregated
transport time of an activity with respect to one year or one business process (more
information about the relevant period can be found in the attribute "Info on results").
If a model of type "Company map" or no model is referenced, the default value
"00:000:00:00:00" is displayed.
Note: The attribute value is automatically updated and cannot be changed manually.
Aggregated costs (Simulation results): This attribute contains the aggregated costs of an
activity with respect to one year or one business process (more information about the
relevant period can be found in the attribute "Info on results").
If a model of type "Company map" or no model is referenced, the default value "0,000000"
is displayed.
Note: The attribute value is automatically updated and cannot be changed manually.

page 32

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS users

Aggregated personnel costs (Simulation results): This attribute contains the aggregated
personnel costs of an activity with respect to one year or one business process (more
information about the relevant period can be found in the attribute "Info on results").
If a model of type "Company map" or no model is referenced, the default value "0,000000"
is displayed.
Note: The attribute value is automatically updated and cannot be changed manually.
Bezeichnung (Deutsch): Geben Sie eine Bezeichnung des Prozesses ein.
Dient der Dokumentation.
Beschreibung (Deutsch): Geben Sie eine Beschreibung des Prozesses ein.
Dient der Dokumentation.
Kommentar (Deutsch): Geben Sie einen Kommentar zum Proze ein.
Dient der Dokumentation.

2.15

Class "Performance indicator overview"

The class "Performance indicator overview" provides an overview of all performance indicators
defined in a business process or a company map.
In each business process model or a company map with performance indicators, exactly one
object of type "Performance indicator overview" has to be defined in order to perform
initialisation and calculation of current values.
For the class "Performance indicator overview" the following attributes are defined:
Name (Description):
Description (Description): Enter a description of the "Performance indicator overview".
For documentation purposes.
Comment (Description): Enter a comment.
For documentation purposes.
Performance indicator overview (Performance indicators): In each business process model
or a company map with performance indicators, exactly one object of type "Performance
indicator overview" has to be defined in order to perform initialisation and calculation of
current values.
Otherwise a corresponding message is displayed during initialisation or calculation.
Add references to performance indicators using the add button. After the calculation the
detailed information about each performance indicator (target value, current value, status,
score and updated) will be displayed on the drawing area.
Data access (Database parameter): Enter the instance name of the operational database.
Access to this database will be established during the calculation of performance indicators
of this business process model or company map.

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 33

Part III

Enter the user name to connect to the database.

Enter the password of the user to access the database.
Planning period (Period configuration): Enter a start of the planning period.
Enter a lengh of the planning period.
Bezeichnung (Deutsch): Geben Sie die Bezeichnung ein.
Dient der Dokumentation.
Beschreibung (Deutsch): Geben Sie die Beschreibung ein.
Dient der Dokumentation.
Kommentar (Deutsch): Geben Sie einen Kommentar ein.
Dient der Dokumentation.

2.16

Class "Performance indicator"

Use the class "Performance indicator" to define performance indicators in business process
models and company maps.
Performance indicators can be assigned to an activity and process objects using the "Owns"
relation.
For the class "Performance indicator" the following attributes are defined:
Name (Description):
Order (Description):
Description (Description): Enter a description of the "Performance indicator".
For documentation purposes;
Comment (Description): Enter a comment.
For documentation purposes.
Periodicity (Details): Define the periodicity of the performance indicator. You can select one
of the following values: "Year", "Half-year", "Quarter", "Month", "Week", "Day".
Please note that the target values have to be entered with the selected periodicity!
Change of referenced date (year) (Details): By using this attribute you can determine which
year is used to calculate the current values.
An entry of 0 results in a calculation corresponding to the current year.
If you choose -1 the calculation corresponds to the previous year.
Change of referenced date (month) (Details): By using this attribute you can determine
which month is used to calculate the current values.
An entry of 0 results in a calculation corresponding to the current month.
If you choose -1 the calculation corresponds to the previous month.
page 34

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS users

Indicator type (Details): Determines whether the indicator is an absolute or relative

indicator.
Absolute indicators are measured in a specific unit of measurement (e.g. revenue).
Relative indicators represent a ratio e.g. ROE (return on equity).
In case of absolute indicators the current value of the performance indicator concerning the
period which should be updated, is compared with the aggregated target values.
In case of relative indicators the current value of the performance indicator is compared
with the target value of the period which should be updated. In this case the target values
are NOT aggregated.
Unit (Details): Enter the unit of measurement.
Limit type (Details): Influence the calculation of status with the attribute "limit type". The
following options are possible:
- Less is better: current values higher than the target value are not desired (e.g. costs).
- More is better: Current values lower than the target value are not desired (e.g.
revenue)period; The threshold limits will be subtracted from the target values.
- Two-sided: The threshold types have an effect in both directions around the target value.
Threshold green/yellow (Details): Enter the value from which the status of the performance
indicator should be displayed with a yellow traffic light.
Examples: Target value = 150
Threshold green/yellow = 10
Threshold yellow/red = 20
Limit type = More is better
The following traffic light colours will be displayed:
- green: if current value > 135
- yellow: if current value <= 135 and > 120
- red: if current value <= 120
The performance indicator value = 140 is displayed with a green traffic light.
Enter an absolute target value.
Threshold yellow/red (Details): Enter the value from which the status of the performance
indicator should be displayed with a yellow traffic light:
Examples: Target value = 150
Threshold green/yellow = 10
Threshold yellow/red = 20
Limit type = More is better
The following traffic light colours will be displayed:
- green: if current value > 140
- yellow: if current value <= 140 and > 120
- red: if current value <= 120
The performance indicator value 140 is displayed with a green traffic light.
Enter an absolute target value.
Responsibility (Details): Enter a person defined in working environment models who is
responsible for the performance indicator.
History (History): This table is used to represent the results of the target/current
comparisons.

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 35

Part III

The menu entry "Current value initialisation" prepares the table. Afterwards the target values
for each time period can be entered.
The menu entry "Current value calculation" enters the current values in the corresponding
rows of the table. Additional target level achievements and score's are calculated.
Current values are entered in the column "Current value" and target values in the column
"Target value".
The Status is calculated using the current value, target value, limit type and threshold values
and is entered in the column "Status".
The Score is entered in the "Score" column and the calculation date in the column
"Updated".
Data source (DB Data source): Decide whether the value of the performance indicator from
files of a relational database, from files of an Excel sheet or from files of the attribute
"Manual data input" should be calculated.
If a "Database" is declared as a data source, the data access must be defined on the level of
the class "Performance indicator overview" either in the business process model, or the
company map. It should be done in the attribute "Database access". Additionally the
attribute "SELECT-Statement" in the class "Performance indicator" must be filled.
If an Excel sheet is declared as a data source, the attributes: "Table", "Sheet" and "Cell"
should be filled.
If the "Manual data input" is declared as a data source, the value entered into the attribute
"Manual data input" in chapter "Manual data source" is calculated.
SELECT-Statement (DB data source): You determine the value of the indicator with this
statement.
The SQL-statement must be entered only if a database is defined as the data source.
The interface to the operational database is entered for each business process model or a
company map in the object "Performance indicator overview" in the chapter "Database
parameter".
Data source (Excel data source): Decide whether the value of the performance indicator
from files of a relational database, from files of an Excel sheet or from files of the attribute
"Manual data input" should be calculated.
If a "Database" is declared as a data source, the data access must be defined on the level of
the class "Performance indicator overview" either in the business process model, or the
company map. It should be done in the attribute "Database access". Additionally the
attribute "SELECT-Statement" in the class "Performance indicator" must be filled.
If an Excel sheet is declared as a data source, the attributes: "Table", "Sheet" and "Cell"
should be filled.
If the "Manual data input" is declared as a data source, the value entered into the attribute
"Manual data input" in chapter "Manual data source" is calculated.
Table (Excel data source): Select the Excel file containing the data for the performance
indicator. The formula in "Cell" references to this table.
The table must only be selected if an Excel sheet is used as a data source.
Sheet (Excel data source): Please define the name of the Excel sheet of the referenced Excel
file.
Cell (Excel data source): The attribute "cell" determines the value of the indicator. The
format of the cell reference has to be as follows <Column>,<Row>. Allowed values for
columns and rows are numerical figures or expressions.
Example: the cell reference "4,(1+2*$(MONTH_END))" indicates the fourth column of an
Excel sheet. The indicated row is calculated by the current month * 2 + 1.
In this example, if the calculation takes place in MAY 2004, the result will be:
column 4 and row 11 (5 * 2 + 1 = 11).
page 36

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS users

The cell reference corresponds to the attributes "Sheet" and has to be defined only if "Excel
file" is chosen as data source.
The following values are available to create a dynamic cell reference, which depends on the
selected actualisation date. They can be used as described in the example above.
Year: $(YEAR_END)
Month: $(MONTH_END)
Week: $(WEEK)
Day: $(DAY)
The used value is replaced by an appropriate date/number value while actualising.
Example: for the actualisation date 08.09.2004 the variable $(YEAR_END) is replaced by the
value 2004, $(MONTH_END) by is replaced by 9 etc.
Note: The Excel functions can be used in the cell reference.
Data source (Manual data input): Decide whether the value of the performance indicator
from files of a relational database, from files of an Excel sheet or from files of the attribute
"Manual data input" should be calculated.
If a "Database" is declared as a data source, the data access must be defined on the level of
the class "Performance indicator overview" either in the business process model, or the
company map. It should be done in the attribute "Database access". Additionally the
attribute "SELECT-Statement" in the class "Performance indicator" must be filled.
If an Excel sheet is declared as a data source, the attributes: "Table", "Sheet" and "Cell"
should be filled.
If the "Manual data input" is declared as a data source, the value entered into the attribute
"Manual data input" in chapter "Manual data source" is calculated.
Manual data input (Manual data source): Enter the value of the indicator. This value is used
to calculate the current values of performance indicators for a specific time period in the
case of manual data input.
Font size (Representation): Choose the appropriate font size to display the description text.
Font style (Representation): Choose the appropriate font style to display the description
text.
Display current value (Representation): Choose whether the current value below the
performance indicator should be displayed or not.
Display score (Representation): Choose whether the score above the performance indicator
should be displayed or not.
Display periodicity (Representation): Choose whether the periodicity should be displayed
with the performance indicator or not.
Display status (Representation): Choose whether the status should be displayed or not.
Bezeichnung (Deutsch): Geben Sie eine Bezeichnung ein.
Dient der Dokumentation.
Beschreibung (Deutsch): Geben Sie die Beschreibung ein.
Dient der Dokumentation.
Kommentar (Deutsch): Geben Sie einen Kommentar ein.
Dient der Dokumentation.

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 37

Part III

2.17

Class "Document"

A "Document" contains information and supports the execution of an activity.

The required documents are referenced to from the activities of a business process model.
For the class "Document" the following attributes are defined:
Name (Description):
Referenced document (Description):"Referenced document" enables the integration of
existing documents, as well as external documents.
Description (Description): Enter a description of the "Document".
For documentation purposes.
Comment (Description): Enter a comment.
For documentation purposes.
Responsible role (Description): Select a role from a working environment model that is
responsible for the current document.
Referenced document model (Description): Enter the name of a document model to
display the current document in more detailed form.
Bezeichnung (Deutsch): Geben Sie eine Bezeichnung des Dokuments ein.
Dient der Dokumentation.
Beschreibung (Deutsch): Geben Sie eine Beschreibung des Dokuments ein.
Dient der Dokumentation.
Kommentar (Deutsch): Geben Sie einen Kommentar zum Dokument ein.
Dient der Dokumentation.

2.18

Class "Note"

The "Note" allows free text to be placed within a model.

For the class "Note" the following attributes are defined:
page 38

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS users

Text (Description): Enter the text of this note.

Font size (Description): Select the font size for the text that is displayed on the drawing
area.
Font style (Description): Select the font style for the text that is displayed on the drawing
area.
Color (Description): You can define the object colour as follows:
- Select a colour in the "Color" window which can be opened by clicking on the dialogue
button (on the right above the attribute field)
- Enter a colour name (e.g. "cornflowerblue"; a list of the colour names can be found in the
user documentation or in the online help)
- Enter an hexidecimal value (e.g. "$FFFFFF" for white), where the value begins with "$" and
contains then the red, green and blue values with respectively two digits.
External graphic (Description): Reference a Bitmap-file (*.bmp) which should be integrated.
If the file should be opened with a special tool, declare this in the selection. Otherwise the
default settings will be chosen "<automatically>".
Enter the path and the file name into the field "Program arguments".
Calculate size of graphic automatically (Description): This function allows it to calculate the
exact area a referenced graphic needs.
It is recommended to activate the automatic calculation before referencing an external
graphic.
If this function is activated, the size of the object "Note" is automatically adjusted to the
objects' size. When changing the size the aspect ratio will be kept.
If this function is deactivated, the graphic will be inserted minimised. The graphic must be
adjusted manually without keeping the aspect ratio.
Notiz (Deutsch): Geben Sie die Notiz ein.

2.19

Class "Aggregation"

The aggregation supports the logical structure of model contents on the drawing area.
From an object that is placed on Aggregation, there is an automatic creation of connnections
between the Aggregation and the objects in the model with the relation "Is inside". The relation
"Is inside" is not visualised!.
For the class "Aggregation" the following attributes are defined:
Name (Description):
Display name (Description): Select whether the object name should be displayed on the
drawing area.
Representation (Description): Select whether the object name should be displayed inside
or outside the aggregation.
2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 39

Part III

Font size (Description): Select the font size for the text that is displayed on the drawing
area.
Font style (Description): Select the font style for the text that is displayed on the drawing
area.
Description (Description): Enter a description of the "Aggregation".
For documentation purposes.
Comment (Description): Enter a comment.
For documentation purposes.
Color (Object display): You can define the object colour as follows:
- Select a colour in the "Color" window, which can be opened by clicking on the dialogue
button (on the right above the attribute field)
- Enter a colour name (e.g. "cornflowerblue"; a list of the colour names can be found in the
user documentation or in the online help)
- Enter an hexadecimal value (e.g. "$FFFFFF" for white), where the value begins with "$" and
contains then the red, green and blue values with respectively two digits.
Lines (Object display): Select the type of representation for the framework.
Bezeichnung (Deutsch): Geben Sie eine Bezeichnung der Aggregation ein.
Dient der Dokumentation.
Beschreibung (Deutsch): Geben Sie eine Beschreibung der Aggregation ein.
Dient der Dokumentation.
Kommentar (Deutsch): Geben Sie einen Kommentar zur Aggregation ein.
Dient der Dokumentation.

2.20

Class "Swimlane (horizontal)"

"Swimlanes"are areas of responsibilities (e.g. workgroups, units etc.).

Is a process executed in different areas of responsibilities, each area becomes its own swimlane
where each object can be placed according to its area.
In each swimlane the responsible role, performer or organisational unit from the working
environment can be referenced.
For the class "Swimlane (horizontal)" the following attributes are defined:
Name (Description):
Working environment (Description): Enter the instance (role, performer or organisational
unit) responsible for the process area.
Description (Description): Enter a description of the "Swimlane (horizontal)".

page 40

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS users

For documentation purposes.

Comment (Description): Enter a comment.
For documentation purposes.
Open questions (Description): You can enter here questions that are still open for this
object.
If you enter text here, a red question mark appears above the object symbol on the drawing
area.
Color (Representation): You can define the object colour as follows:
- Select a colour in the "Color" window which can be opened by clicking on the dialogue
button (on the right above the attribute field)
- Enter a colour name (e.g. "cornflowerblue"; a list of the colour names can be found in the
user documentation or in the online help)
Enter an hexadecimal value (e.g. "$FFFFFF" for white), where the value begins with "$" and
contains then the red, green and blue values with respectively two digits.
Display water marks (Representation):
Alignment (Representation):
Bezeichnung (Deutsch): Geben Sie eine Bezeichnung zur Schimmbahn ein.
Dient der Dokumentation.
Beschreibung (Deutsch): Geben Sie eine Beschreibung zur Schimmbahn ein.
Dient der Dokumentation.
Kommentar (Deutsch): Geben Sie einen Kommentar zur Schimmbahn ein.
Dient der Dokumentation.

2.21

Class "Swimlane (vertical)"

"Swimlanes" are areas of responsibilities (e.g. workgroups, units etc.).

Is a process executed in different areas of responsibilities, each area becomes its own swimlane
where each object can be placed according to its area.
In each swimlane the responsible role, performer or organisational unit from the working
environment can be referenced.
For the class "Swimlane (vertical)" the following attributes are defined:
Name (Description):
Working environment (Description): Enter the instance (role, performer or organisational
unit) responsible for the process area.
Description (Description): Enter a description of the "Swimlane (vertical)".

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 41

Part III

For documentation purposes.

Comment (Description): Enter a comment.
For documentation purposes.
Open questions (Description): You can enter questions that are still open for this object.
If you enter text here, a red question mark appears above the object symbol on the drawing
area.
Color (Representation): You can define the object colour as follows:
- Select a colour in the "Color" window which can be opened by clicking on the dialogue
button (on the right above the attribute field)
- Enter a colour name (e.g. "cornflowerblue"; a list of the colour names can be found in the
user documentation or in the online help)
- Enter an hexadecimal value (e.g. "$FFFFFF" for white), where the value begins with "$" and
contains then the red, green and blue values with respectively two digits.
Display water marks (Representation):
Alignment (Representation):
Bezeichnung (Deutsch): Geben Sie eine Bezeichnung zur Schimmbahn ein.
Dient der Dokumentation.
Beschreibung (Deutsch): Geben Sie eine Beschreibung zur Schimmbahn ein.
Dient der Dokumentation.
Kommentar (Deutsch): Geben Sie einen Kommentar zur Schimmbahn ein.
Dient der Dokumentation.

2.22

Class "Organizational unit"

The integration of the organisational units enables you to describe transparently the hierarchy of
your working environment.
- Performers belong to an organisational unit
- An organisational unit can have a manager
- Several organisational units can be subordinated by another organisational unit
- A organisational unit can use one or more resources
For the class "Organizational unit" the following attributes are defined:
Name (Desription):
Order (Desription): This attribute can be set by the "Object numbering" function, which
numbers the objects of the business process model.

page 42

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS users

This can be useful for example within the component "Documentation", to ensure that all
objects are documented in the required order.
Desription (Desription): Enter a description of the "Organizational unit".
For documentation purposes.
Comment (Desription): Enter a comment.
For documentation purposes.
Model reference (Desription): Select a working enviroment model, to break down further
the organisational structure of the organisation.
Bezeichnung (Deutsch): Geben Sie eine Bezeichnung der Organisationseinheit einperiod;
Dient der Dokumentation&.
Beschreibung (Deutsch): Geben Sie eine Beschreibung der Organisationseinheit ein.
Dient der Dokumentation.
Kommentar (Deutsch): Geben Sie einen Kommentar zur Organisationseinheit ein.
Dient der Dokumentation.

2.23

Class "Performer"

An object of this class represents a performer within a working environment.

Each performer can:
- have one or more role(s)
- belong to one or more organisational unit(s)
- be charged to one or more cost center(s)
- manage one or more organisational unit(s) and cost center(s)
- use one or more resource(s)
For the class "Performer" the following attributes are defined:
Name (Description):
Description (Description): Enter a description of the "Performer".
For documentation purposes.
Comment (Description): Enter a comment.
For documentation purposes.
Further education (Description): Enter the title of the seminar (course) for further education
of the employees in the column "Seminar title".
The column "Participated in" contains the time of the participation in the format MM.YYYY,
i.e. month and year of participation in the seminar/course (e.g. 02.2000 for a course made
in February 2000).
2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 43

Part III

Presence (Description): The presence indicates how many days per week and how many
hours per day the performer is present - i.e. available for work.
The entry of the values ("Days per week" and "Hours per day") occurs by selecting the
appropriate presence profiles.
Note: If none of the available presence profiles are appropriate, please ask your ADONIS
administrator to create the required profile.
Hourly wages (Simulation data): Enter the hourly wages of the performer.
Availability (Simulation data): The value "Availability" is referenced in the simulation
algorithm "Capacity analysis".
The availability is automatically calculated based on the presence.
Formula: Days per week Hours per day 40 100 (round number).
If necessary you can define the availability with an integer between 0 and 100.
Calendar (Simulation data): The value of the attribute "Calendar" is evaluated in the
simulation algorithm "Workload analysis".
It defines when a person is available for executing business processes respectively activities.
You can define the so-called "day profiles" and assign them to the days of a year.
Time dependent costs (Simulation data): The "time dependent costs" are evaluated in the
process cost analysis.
Personnel costs (Simulation results): The personnel costs are the product of working time
and hourly wage of the performer.
More information about the relevant period can be found in the attribute "Info on results".
Capacity (Simulation results): The capacity is the ratio of time a performer spent working
on activities to the time he was actually present.
Because the capacity analysis does not simulate on the time-axis, the capacity of more than
100% can occur.
More information about the relevant period can be found in the attribute "Info on results".
Workload (Simulation results): The workload is the ratio of time one performer spent
working on activities compared to the time he at his disposal in one year.
The performer cannot spend more time working on activities than he spends at work.
More information about the relevant period can be found in the attribute "Info on results".
Info on results (Simulation results): The value of this attribute gives more information
about the last evaluation carried out.
Bezeichnung (Deutsch): Geben Sie eine Bezeichnung des Bearbeiters ein.
Dient der Dokumentation.
Beschreibung (Deutsch): Geben Sie eine Beschreibung des Bearbeiters ein.
Dient der Dokumentation.
Kommentar (Deutsch): Geben Sie einen Kommentar zum Bearbeiter ein.
Dient der Dokumentation.

page 44

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS users

2.24

Class "Role"

A "Role" describes the range of tasks of a performer.

- Each performer can have one or more role(s)
- Several performers can have the same role
For the class "Role" the following attributes are defined:
Name (Description):
Description (Description): Enter a description of the "Role".
For documentation purposes.
Comment (Description): Enter a comment.
For documentation purposes.
Referenced actor (Description): Please select an "actor" from a use case diagram.
Bezeichnung (Deutsch): Geben Sie eine Bezeichnung der Rolle ein.
Dient der Dokumentation.
Beschreibung (Deutsch): Geben Sie eine Beschreibung der Rolle ein.
Dient der Dokumentation.
Kommentar (Deutsch): Geben Sie einen Kommentar zur Rolle ein.
Dient der Dokumentation.

2.25

Class "Resource" (__WE_Resource__)

Resources are considered during the simulation (capacity and workload analysis).
For the class "Resource" the following attributes are defined:
Name (Description):
Description (Description): Enter a description of the "Resource".
For documentation purposes.
2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 45

Part III

Comment (Description): Enter a comment.

For documentation purposes.
Type of resource (Description): Select the type of resource.
The graphical Representation on the drawing area will be adjusted accordingly.
Hourly wages (Description): Enter the hourly wages for using this resource.
Bezeichnung (Deutsch): Geben Sie eine Bezeichnung zur Ressource ein.
Dient der Dokumentation.
Beschreibung (Deutsch): Geben Sie eine Beschreibung der Ressource ein.
Dient der Dokumentation.
Kommentar (Deutsch): Geben Sie einen Kommentar zur Ressource ein.
Dient der Dokumentation.

2.26

Class "Cost center"

A "Cost center" is evaluated in the simulation (Cost Cutting Component).

For the class "Cost center" the following attributes are defined:
Name (Description):
Order (Description): This attribute can be set by the "Object numbering" function, which
numbers the objects of the business process model.
This can be useful for example within the component "Documentation", to ensure that all
objects are documented in the required order.
Description (Description): Enter a description of the "Cost center".
For documentation purposes.
Comment (Description): Enter a comment.
For documentation purposes.
Budget (Data for analysis): Enter the budget of the Cost center .
The value in this field is used by the Cost Cutting Component.
ON time (Data for analysis): Enter the output neutral times.
The value in this field is used by the Cost Cutting Component.
ON fixed costs (Data for analysis): Enter the output neutral fixed costs.
The value in this field is used by the Cost Cutting Component.
ON processes (Data for analysis): Enter the output neutral processes of the Cost center.
The value in this field is used by the Cost Cutting Component.

page 46

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS users

Bezeichnung (Deutsch): Geben Sie eine Bezeichnung der Kostenstelle ein.

Dient der Dokumentation.
Beschreibung (Deutsch): Geben Sie eine Beschreibung der Kostenstelle ein.
Dient der Dokumentation.
Kommentar (Deutsch): Geben Sie einen Kommentar zur Kostenstelle ein.
Dient der Dokumentation.

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 47

Part III

3.

Relations

The following section contains all the relations needed to create models. Its availability in a
model depends on the chosen Model type (see chap. 1., p. 7)and on the selected view mode.
Note: The description of the view modes you can find in the chapters on particular
model types Company map (see chap. 1.1, p. 8), Business Process Model
(see chap. 1.2, p. 9), Working Environments model (see chap. 1.3, p. 10), Document
model (see chap. 1.4, p. 11) and Use case diagram (see chap. 1.5, p. 11).

3.1

Relation "Subsequent"

The relation "Subsequent" defines the flow of activities and decisions in a Business Process. It
can be used to link all types of objects with the exception of "Variable", "Random generator",
"Resource", "Aggregation", "Performance indicator" and "Performance indicator overview". The
"Subsequent" relation may contain a transition condition when it follows a Decision or Parallelity.
For the relation "Subsequent" the following attributes are defined:
Denomination (Description): Enter a characterising denomination.
For documentation purposes.
Description (Description): Enter a description of the "Subsequent".
For documentation purposes.
Comment (Description): Enter a comment.
Optional. For documentation purposes.
Transition condition (Details): A transition condition consists either of one elementary
expression or several elementary expressions which are linked together by OR, AND or NOT.
The linking is succeeded with the expression NOT, OR or AND.
Examples:
(a) (<elementary expression1>) AND (<elementary expression2>)
(b) (<elementary expression1>) AND (<elementary expression2>)
(c) NOT (<elementary expression1>)
(d) (<elementary expression1>) AND (NOT (<elementary expression2>))
An elementary expression is defined as:
<Variable name><Operator><Constant>, where
- <Variable name> the name of an instantiated variable,
- <Operator> may be <,> or =

page 48

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS users

- <Constant> - a numeric or alphanumeric expression (a numeric expression may only

consist of integers; an alphanumeric expression must be delimited by single quotes).
Examples:
(a) X="YES" - this condition is fulfilled if the variable X has the value "Yes" (X is assigned
values through a discrete distribution!)
(b) (X="YES") AND (Y="YES") - this condition is fulfilled where variables X and Y have the
value "Yes" (X dnd Y are discrete distributed!)
(c) Z<1000 - this condition is fulfilled if Z is less than 1000 (Z is continually distributed!)
(d) NOT(Z<1000) - this condition is fulfilled if Z is greater or equal 1000 is (complementary
to Z<1000, Z is continually distributed!)
(e) (X="NO") OR (NOT (Z=1000)) - this condition is fulfilled if either X has the value "NO" or
Z is not equal to 1000 (X is discrete, Z is continually distributed!)
Transition probability (Details): Please enter the transition probability into this attribute (if
the transition probability should be defined instead of the transition condition).
The value must be between 0 and 1. The sum of all transition probabilities must be 1.
Visualied values (Details): Choose which attributes should be displayed.
Representation (Details): Choose where (relative to the relation) the transition condition
should be displayed.
Font colour (Details): Select the colour for the display of the transition condition resp. of the
transition probability.
Info zur bergangsbedingung (Deutsch): Geben Sie Info zur bergangsbedingung ein.
Dient der Dokumentation.
Bezeichnung (Deutsch): Geben Sie einen Namen ein.
Dient der Dokumentation.
Beschreibung (Deutsch): Geben Sie eine Beschreibung ein. Dient der Dokumentation.
Kommentar (Deutsch): Geben Sie einen Kommentar ein.
Dient der Dokumentation.

3.2

Relation "Sets variable"

The relation "Sets variable" connects 1 object of the class "Random generator" with 1 object of
the class "Variable". The relation is used from the random generator to the variable.
Note: For the relation "Sets variable" no attributes are defined.

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 49

Part III

3.3

Relation "Sets"

The relation "Sets" connects 1 object of the class "Random generator" with one object of
"Process start", "Subprocess", "Activity", "Decision", "Parallelity" or "Merging". The relation is
used from random generator to the target.
Note: For the relation "Sets" no attributes are defined.

3.4

Relation "Uses"

The relation "Uses" connects 1 object of the class "Activity" with 1 object of the class "Resource".
The relation is used from the activity to the resource.
Note: For the relation "Uses" no attributes are defined.

3.5

Relation "communicates"

The relation "communicates" connects "actors" with "Use Cases".

communicates with the "Use Case" but does not define how.

It denotes that the "actor"

For the relation "communicates" the following attributes are defined:

Name (Description):
Description (Description): Enter a description of the "communicates".

page 50

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS users

For documentation purposes.

Comment (Description): Enter a comment.
Optional. For documentation purposes.
Bezeichnung (Deutsch): Geben Sie eine Bezeichnung ein.
Dient der Dokumentation.
Beschreibung (Deutsch): Geben
"kommuniziert"-Beziehung ein.

Sie

eine

charakterisierende

Beschreibung

zur

Dient der Dokumentation.

Kommentar (Deutsch): Geben Sie einen Kommentar zur "kommuniziert"-Beziehung ein.
Dient der Dokumentation.

3.6

Relation "contains"

The relation "contains" hierarchically connects 2 objects of the class "use case". The relation
"contains" indicates the execution of a "use case" will implicitly trigger the execution of another
"use case". This relation is used to describe the parts separately, which occur often and are
referenced by other use cases. The contained use case is only a part of the whole in this case
(cp. "uses"). The relation is always used from the super ordered use case to the called use case.
For the relation "contains" the following attributes are defined:
Name (Description):
Description (Description): Enter a description of the "contains". For documentation
purposes.
Comment (Description): Enter a comment.
Optional. For documentation purposes.
Bezeichnung (Deutsch): Geben Sie eine Bezeichnung ein.
Dient der Dokumentation.
Beschreibung (Deutsch): Geben Sie eine charakterisierende Beschreibung zur "beinhaltet"Beziehung ein. Dient der Dokumentation.
Kommentar (Deutsch): Geben Sie einen Kommentar zur "beinhaltet"-Beziehung ein.
Dient der Dokumentation.

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 51

Part III

3.7

Relation "extends"

The relation "extends" hierarchically connects 2 objects of the class "use case". One of the "use
case" is seen as the "normal case" and the second one (its extension) is an addition, which
occurs only under certain conditions. The relation is used from the extending "use case" to the
"normal case". The relation "extends" is used to describe the variable of the normal behaviour
as well as to create specific regulations.
For the relation "extends" the following attributes are defined:
Name (Description):
Description (Description): Enter a description of the "extends".
For documentation purposes.
Comment (Description): Enter a comment.
Optional. For documentation purposes.
Bezeichnung (Deutsch): Geben Sie eine Bezeichnung ein.
Dient der Dokumentation.
Beschreibung (Deutsch): Geben Sie eine charakterisierende Beschreibung zur "erweitert"Beziehung ein.
Dient der Dokumentation.
Kommentar (Deutsch): Geben Sie einen Kommentar zur "erweitert"-Beziehung ein.
Dient der Dokumentation.

3.8

Relation "Generalisation"

The relation "Generalisation" hierarchically connects 2 objects of the class "use case". The
relation "Generalisation" means that one "use case" is a special case of another general "use
case". The relation "Generalisation" is used to describe and execute the discrepancy between
the "special case" and the "normal case" as the hole. The special case contains all features of
the general use case. The relation is used from the "special case" to the "general case".
For the relation "Generalisation" the following attributes are defined:

page 52

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS users

Name (Description):
Description (Description): Enter a description of the "Generalisation".
For documentation purposes.
Comment (Description): Enter a comment.
Optional. For documentation purposes.
Bezeichnung (Deutsch): Geben Sie eine Bezeichnung ein.
For documentation purposes.
Beschreibung (Deutsch): Geben
"Generalisierung"-Beziehung ein.

Sie

eine

charakterisierende

Beschreibung

zur

Dient der Dokumentation.

Kommentar (Deutsch): Geben Sie einen Kommentar zur "Generalisierung"-Beziehung ein.
Dient der Dokumentation.

3.9

Relation "uses"

The relation "uses" hierarchically connects 2 objects of the class "use case". One "use case" uses
another "use case" and its features while executing. The used "use case" can occur
independently (see. "contains"). The relation is used from the user (the using "use case") to the
used "use case".
For the relation "uses" the following attributes are defined:
Name (Description):
Description (Description): Enter a description of the "uses".
For documentation purposes.
Comment (Description): Enter a comment.
Optional. For documentation purposes.
Bezeichnung (Deutsch): Geben Sie eine Bezeichnung ein.
Dient der Dokumentation.
Beschreibung (Deutsch): Geben Sie eine charakterisierende Beschreibung zur "benutzt"Beziehung ein. Dient der Dokumentation.
Kommentar (Deutsch): Geben Sie einen Kommentar zur "benutzt"-Beziehung ein.
Dient der Dokumentation.

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 53

Part III

3.10

Relation "Has process"

The relation "Has process" hierarchically connects 2 objects of the class "Process". The relation
is used from the object which is super ordered to the lower ordered one.
Note: For the relation "Has process" no attributes are defined.

3.11

Relation "has Subdocument"

The relation "has Subdocument" hierarchically connects 2 objects of the class "Document". The
relation "has Subdocument" is used between an upper graded Document to a subordinated
Document.
Note: For the relation "has Subdocument" no attributes are defined.

3.12

Relation "Owns"

The relation "Owns" connects the flow objects in a Business Process Model or objects of the
class "Process" in a company map with an object of the class "Performance indicator".
Note: For the relation "Owns" no attributes are defined.

page 54

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS users

3.13

Relation "has Note"

The relation \"has Note\" connects 1 object of any class (also "Note") with 1 object of the class
"Note". The relation is used from any object to the note.
Note: For the relation "has Note" no attributes are defined.

3.14

Relation "Is subordinated"

The relation "Is subordinated" hierarchically connects 2 objects of the class "Organizational unit.
The relation is used from the super ordered organisational unit to the subordinated one.
Note: For the relation "Is subordinated" no attributes are defined.

3.15

Relation "has Resource"

The relation "has Resource" connects 1 object of the class "Organizational unit" with 1 object of
the class "Resource". It is used from the organisational unit to the resource.
Note: For the relation "has Resource" no attributes are defined.

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 55

Part III

3.16

Relation "Belongs to"

The relation "Belongs to" connects 1 object of the class "Performer" with 1 object of the class
"Organizational unit". The relation is used from the performer to the organisational unit.
Note: For the relation "Belongs to" no attributes are defined.

3.17

Relation "Is manager"

The relation "Is manager" connects 1 object of the class "Performer" with 1 object of the class
"Organizational unit". The relation is used from the performer to the organisational unit.
Note: For the relation "Is manager" no attributes are defined.

3.18

Relation "Has role"

The relation "Has role" connects 1 object of the class "Performer" with 1 object of the class "Role.
The relation is used from the performer to the role.
Note: For the relation "Has role" no attributes are defined.

page 56

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS users

3.19

Relation "Uses resource"

The relation "Uses resource" connects 1 object of the class "Performer" with 1 object of the class
"Resource". The relation is used from the performer to the resource.
Note: For the relation "Uses resource" no attributes are defined.

3.20

Relation "Is charged to"

The relation "Is charged to" connects 1 object of the class "Performer" with 1 object of the class
"Cost center". The relation is used from the performer to the cost center.
Note: For the relation "Is charged to" no attributes are defined.

3.21

Relation "Is cost center manager"

The relation "Is cost center manager" connects 1 object of the class "Performer" with 1 object of
the class "Cost center". The relation is used from the performer to the cost center.
Note: For the relation "Is cost center manager" no attributes are defined.

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 57

Part III

4.

Predefined queries and relation tables

The predefined queries are specific queries for defined model types which deliver results.
Predefined relation tables are used to show relations between objects.
In the ADONIS standard application library predefined queries and relation tables are offered in
the Analysis component (see chap. 4.1.1, p. 58) and the Evaluation component (see chap. 4.2,
p. 70).

4.1

Analysis component

In the analysis component of the ADONIS standard application library 3.81 the following is
available
Queries:
-

Evaluation of the open questions in company maps (see chap. 4.1.1, p. 58)

Consistency checks on Business Process Models (see chap. 4.1.2, p. 59)

Predefined queries on Business Process Models (see chap. 4.1.3, p. 61)

the Evaluation of the open questions in Business Process Models (see chap. 4.1.4, p. 62)

Predefined queries on Working Environment models (see chap. 4.1.5, p. 63)

Evaluation of the open questions in use case diagrams (see chap. 4.1.6, p. 65)

Relation tables:
-

Activity-Resource table (see chap. 4.1.7, p. 66)

Activity-Document table (see chap. 4.1.8, p. 67)

Variable-Activity table (see chap. 4.1.11, p. 68)

Role table (see chap. 4.1.12, p. 69)

Organisational hierarchy table (see chap. 4.1.13, p. 69)

4.1.1

Evaluation of the open questions in company maps

To evaluate the open questions in company maps select in the menu "Analysis" the item
"Queries on Company maps" and the sub-menu point "Evaluation of the open questions in
company maps".
In the window "Evaluation of the open questions in company maps - Model selection" select the
models to be analysed and click on the OK button.
In the window "Evaluation of the open questions in company maps - Queries" (see fig. 2, p. 59)
the predefined query will be shown.

page 58

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS users

Figure 2: Evaluation of the open questions in company maps - Queries

Select the query "Evaluation of the open questions in company maps.", to show all
processes which have input into the field "Open questions" and click on the button "Execute".
The result of your query will be shown in the ADONIS browser.

4.1.2

Consistency checks on Business Process Models

To perform consistency checks for Business Process Models select in the menu "Analysis" the
item "Queries on Business Process Models" and the sub-menu point "Consistency checks on
Business Process Models".
In the window "Consistency checks on Business Process Models - Model selection" select the
models to be analysed and click on the OK button.
In the window "Consistency checks on Business Process Models - Queries" (see fig. 3, p. 60) the
predefined queries will be shown.

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 59

Part III

Figure 3: Consistency checks on Business Process Models - Queries

To run a consistency check select one of the predefined queries from the list "Queries".
The following queries for consistency checks are available:
All activities without entry in the attribute 'Description'.

This query lists all activities which do not contain information in the attribute "Description".
All activities without entry in the attribute 'Performer'.

This query lists all activities which have no performer assigned in the attribute "Performer".
All activities without Execution time.

This query enables you to identify which activities have no execution time assigned.
All process start objects without quantity.

This query will find all process start objects without a quantity.
All process start objects without mainly responsible.

This query will identify all process start objects where no mainly responsible had been
defined.
Run the consistency check by clicking on the button "Execute", the result of your query will be
shown in the ADONIS browser.

page 60

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS users

4.1.3

Predefined queries on Business Process Models

To perform predefined queries for Business Process Models select in the menu "Analysis" the
item "Queries on Business Process Models" and the sub-menu point "Predefined queries on
Business Process Models".
In the window "Predefined queries on Business Process Models - Model selection" select the
models to be analysed and click on the OK button.
In the window "Predefined queries on Business Process Models - Queries" (see fig. 4, p. 61) the
predefined queries will be shown.

Figure 4: Predefined queries on Business Process Models - Queries

To run a predefined query select one from the list of predefined queries. In the next window of
the query an empty input field (text with a gap) will be shown. Enter the necessary information
(e.g. Execution time, Resting time, Costs, Type of Performer).
The following queries are available as predefined queries on Business Process Models:
All activities with an execution time greater than [input].

This query lists all activities with an execution time greater than the value provided.
Example: By providing the input "00:000:03:45:00" all activities will be shown with an
execution time greater than 03 hour 45 minutes.
All activities with a resting time greater than [input] .

This query lists all activities with a resting time greater than the value provided.
Example: By providing the input "00:000:05:20:00" all activities will be shown with a resting
time greater than 05 hours 20 minutes.
2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 61

Part III

All activities with costs greater than [input] .

This query will determine all activities where the costs exceed the value.
Example: Input the value "10000" to show all activities with costs higher than 10000,00.
All activities which are executed by a type of performer [input] .

This query will determine all activities where a specific type of performer has been assigned.
Example: The input "Clerk" determines all activities which are performed by clerks.
All activities which use the resource [input] .

This query will list all activities which use a specific type of resource for their execution.
Run the completed predefined query by clicking on the button "Execute"; the result of your
query will be shown in the ADONIS browser.
By enabling the option "Show attributes in columns" the objects are shown in rows and the
corresponding attributes in columns.

4.1.4

Evaluation of the open questions in Business Process

Models

To evaluate the open questions in Business Process Models select in the menu "Analysis" the
item "Queries on Business Process Models" and the sub-menu point "Evaluation of the open
questions in Business Process Models".
In the window "Evaluation of the open questions in Business Process Models - Model selection"
select the models to be analysed and click on the OK button.
In the window "Evaluation of the open questions in Business Process Models - Queries"
(see fig. 5, p. 63) the open questions will be shown.

page 62

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS users

Figure 5: Evaluation of the open questions in Business Process Models - Queries

To analyse the open questions select one of the queries from the list and confirm it by clicking
on the button "Execute".
The following queries are available for determining open questions in the ADONIS standard
application library 3.81:
All activities with open questions

This query lists all activities with text in the attribute "Open questions".
All process start objects with open questions

This query determines all process start objects with text in the attribute "Open questions".
All subprocess objects with open questions

This query enables you to identify all subprocess objects with text in the attribute "Open
questions".
All decisions with open questions

This query lists all decisions with text in the attribute "Open questions".

4.1.5

Predefined queries on Working Environment models

To run predefined queries for Working Environment models select in the menu "Analysis" the
item "Queries on Working Environment models" and the sub-menu point "Predefined queries
on Working Environment models".

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 63

Part III

In the window "Predefined queries on Working Environment models - Model selection" select the
models to be analysed and click on the OK button.
In the window "Predefined queries on Working Environment models - Queries" (see fig. 6, p. 64)
the predefined queries will be shown.

Figure 6: Predefined queries on Working Environment models - Queries

To run a query select one of the predefined queries from the list. In the next window of the
query an empty input field (text with a gap) will be shown. Enter the necessary information (e.g.
role, organisational unit).
The following predefined queries are available for Working Environment models:
All performers.

This query lists all performers in the selected model(s).

All performers with the role. [input].

This query lists all performers assigned to the selected role.

Example: By providing the input "Clerk" all performers assigned to the role clerk will be
shown.
All performers belonging to the organisational unit [input].

This query determines all performers who are members of selected organisational unit.
Example: By providing the input "Sales" all performers belonging to the sales department in
the selected (models) will be listed.
All performers with an availability greater than [input].

page 64

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS users

This query determines all performers with an availability greater than the percentage value
provided.
Example: By providing the input "50" all performers with an availability greater than 50
percent will be listed in the result spreadsheet.
All performers with a hourly wage rate greater than [input].

This query determines all performers with a hourly wage rate greater than the value
provided.
Example: By providing the input "15" all performers with a hourly wage rate greater than
15,00 will be shown.
All performers using the resource [input].

This query lists all performers using a specific resource.

Example: By providing the input "Telephone" all performers are listed who are using the
telephone.
All performers who still have not completed a further education seminar.

This query lists all performers who not yet had any further education.
Run the completed predefined query by clicking the button "Execute"; the result of your query
will be shown in the ADONIS browser.
By enabling the option "Show attributes in columns" the objects are shown in rows and the
corresponding attributes in columns.

4.1.6

Evaluation of the open questions in Use Case diagrams

To evaluate open questions in use case diagrams select in the menu "Analysis" the item
"Queries on Use case diagrams" and the sub-menu item "Evaluation of the open questions in
use case diagrams".
In the window "Evaluation of the open questions in use case diagrams - Model selection" select
the models to be analysed and click on the OK button.
In the window "Evaluation of the open questions in use case diagrams - Queries" (see fig. 7,
p. 66) the available queries will be displayed.

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 65

Part III

Figure 7: Evaluation of the open questions in use case diagrams - Queries

To analyse the open questions select a query from the list.

The following queries are available to determine open questions in use case diagrams:
All actors with open questions.

This query will list all actors with text in the attribute "Open questions".
All use cases with open questions.

This query will list all use cases with text in the attribute "Open questions".
All system boundaries with open questions.

This query will list all system boundaries with text in the attribute "Open questions".

4.1.7

Activity-Resource table

Create an activity-resource table by selecting in the menu "Relation tables" the item "Relation
tables on Business Process Models" and the sub-menu item "Activity-Resource table".
In the window "Activity-Resource table - Model selection" select the model for which you want to
create the table and click on the OK button.
If the relations exist in the selected model, the window "Activity-Resource table for model <Model
name>" (see fig. 8, p. 67) will show the existing relations between activities and resources in the
ADONIS browser.

page 66

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS users

Figure 8: Activity-Resource table (Example)

4.1.8

Activity-Document table

Create an activity-document table by selecting in the menu "Relation tables" the item
"Relation tables on Business Process Models" and the sub-menu item "Activity-Document
table".
In the window "Activity-Document table - Model selection" select the model for which you want
to create the table and click on the OK button.
If the relations exist in the selected model, the window "Activity-Document table for model
<Model name>" (see fig. 9, p. 67) will show the existing relations between activities and
documents in the ADONIS browser.

Figure 9: Activity-Document table (Example)

4.1.9

Activity-Input document table

Create an activity-input document table by selecting in the menu "Relation tables" the item
"Relation tables on Business Process Models" and the sub-menu item "Activity-Input
document table".
In the window "Activity-Input document table - Model selection" select the model for which you
want to create the table and click on the OK button.

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 67

Part III

If the relations exist in the selected model the window "Activity-Input document table for model
<Model name>" (see fig. 9, p. 67) will show the existing relations between activities and input
documents in the ADONIS browser.

Figure 10: Activity-Input document table (Example)

4.1.10

Activity-Output document table

Create an activity-output document table by selecting in the menu "Relation tables" the item
"Relation tables on Business Process Models" and the sub-menu item "Activity-Output
document table".
In the window "Activity-Output document table - Model selection" select the model for which you
want to create the table and click on the OK button.
If the relations exist in the selected model the window "Activity-Output document table for model
<Model name>" (see fig. 9, p. 67) will show the existing relations between activities and output
documents in the ADONIS browser.

Figure 11: Activity-Output document table (Example)

4.1.11

Variable-Activity table

Create a variable-activity table by selecting in the menu "Relation tables" the item "Relation
tables on Business Process Models" and the sub-menu item "Variable-Activity table".
In the window "Variable-Activity table - Model selection" select the model for which you want to
create the table and click on the OK button

page 68

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS users

If the relations exist in the selected model the window "Variable-Activity table for model <Model
name>" (see fig. 12, p. 69) will show the existing relations between variables and activities in the
ADONIS browser.

Figure 12: Variable-Activity table (Example)

4.1.12

Role table

Create a role table by selecting in the menu "Relation tables" the item "Relation tables on
Working Environment models" and the sub-menu item "Role table".
In the window "Role table - Model selection" select the model for which you want to create the
table and click on the OK button.
If the relations exist in the selected model the window "Role table for model <Model name>"
(see fig. 13, p. 69) will show the existing relations between performers and roles in the ADONIS
browser.

Figure 13: Role table (Example)

4.1.13

Organisational hierarchy table

Create an organisational hierarchy table by selecting in the menu "Relation tables" the item
"Relation tables on Working Environment models" and the sub-menu item "Organisational
hierarchy table".
In the window "Organisational hierarchy table - Model selection" select the model for which you
want to create the table and click on the OK button.

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 69

Part III

If the relations exist in the selected model the window "Organisational hierarchy table for model
<Model name>" (see fig. 14, p. 70) will show the existing relations between organisational units
in the ADONIS browser.

Figure 14: Organisational hierarchy table (Example)

4.2

Evaluation component

The evaluation component in the ADONIS standard application library 3.81 provides:
process-oriented queries on Business Process Models (see chap. 4.2.1, p. 70)
Activity-oriented queries on Business Process Models (see chap. 4.2.2, p. 72)
Queries on Working Environment models (see chap. 4.2.3, p. 73)

4.2.1

Process-oriented queries on Business Process Models

To run process-oriented queries on Business Process Models select in the menu "Evaluation"
the item "Evaluation queries on Business Process Models" and the sub-menu point "Processoriented queries on Business Process Models".
In the window "Process-oriented queries on Business Process Models - Model selection" select
the model for which you want to create the table and click on the OK button.
In the window "Process-oriented queries on Business Process Models - Queries" (see fig. 15,
p. 71) the process related queries will be shown.

page 70

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS users

Figure 15: Process-oriented queries on Business Process Models - Queries

To run a query select one of the predefined queries from the list.
The following queries are available for process-oriented queries on Business Process Models:
All business processes with an execution time greater than [input] .

This query lists all business processes with an execution time greater than the value
provided.
Example: By providing the input "00:023:04:55:00" all business processes will be
determined with an execution time greater than 23 days 04 hours and 55 minutes.
All business processes with a cycle time greater than [input].

The results of this query are all business processes with a cycle time greater than the value
provided.
Example: By providing the input "00:000:00:05:00" all business processes with a cycle time
greater than 5 minutes will be determined.
All business processes with costs greater than [input] .

This query lists all business processes that have costs that are greater than your specified
value.
Example: By providing the input "50000" all business processes will be shown with costs
greater than 50000.00.
Run the completed predefined query by clicking the button "Execute"; the result of your query
will be shown in the ADONIS browser.

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 71

Part III

By enabling the option "Show attributes in columns" the objects are shown in rows and the
corresponding attributes in columns.

4.2.2

Activity-oriented queries on Business Process Models

To run process-oriented queries on Business Process Models select in the menu "Evaluation"
the item "Evaluation queries on Business Process Models" and the sub-menu item "Activityoriented queries on Business Process Models".
In the window "Activity-oriented queries on Business Process Models - Model selection" select
the model for which you want to create the table and click on OK.
In the window "Activity-oriented queries on Business Process Models - Queries" (see fig. 16,
p. 72) the activity-oriented queries will be shown.

Figure 16: Activity-oriented queries on Business Process Models - Queries

To run a query select one of the predefined queries from the list. In the next window of the
query an empty input field (text with a gap) will be shown. Enter the necessary information (e.g.
Aggregated execution time, Aggregated resting time, Aggregated costs, etc.).
The following queries are available for activity-oriented queries on Business Process Models:
All activities called more often than [input].

This query determines all activities which are "used" (called) more often than the value
provided.
Example: Providing the value "25" all activities will be shown which are called more than 25
times.

page 72

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS users

All activities with an aggregated resting time greater than [input].

This query determines all activities with an aggregated resting time greater than the value
provided.
Example: By providing the input "00:000:02:20:00" all activities are shown with an
aggregated resting time greater than 2 hours and 20 minutes.
All activities with aggregated costs greater than [input].

This query determines all activities with costs higher than the value provided.
Example: Enter "50" to determine all activities with costs greater than 50.00.
Run the completed predefined query by clicking the button "Execute"; the result of your query
will be shown in the ADONIS browser.
By enabling the option "Show attributes in columns" the objects are shown in rows and the
corresponding attributes in columns.

4.2.3

Queries on Working Environment models

To run process-oriented queries on Working Environment models select in the menu

"Evaluation" the item "Evaluation queries on Working Environment models" and the sub-menu
item "Queries on Working Environment models".
In the window "Queries on Working Environment models - Model selection" select the model for
which you want to create the table and click on the OK button.
In the window "Queries on Working Environment models - Queries" (see fig. 17, p. 74) the
queries will be shown.

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 73

Part III

Figure 17: Queries on Working Environment models - Queries

To run a query select one of the predefined queries from the list. In the next window of the
query an empty input field (text with a gap) will be shown. Enter the necessary information (e.g.
Aggregated execution time, Aggregated resting time, Aggregated costs, etc.).
The following queries are available for Working Environment models:
All performers with a capacity greater than [input].

This query determines all performers with a capacity greater than the value provided.
Example: Enter "1" to find all performers who are used beyond their capacity.
All performers with a workload greater than [input].

This query determines all performers with a workload greater than the value provided.
Example: Enter "0.5" to find all performers who have a workload greater than 50%.
All performers with personnel costs greater than [input].

This query determines all performers with personnel costs greater than the value provided.
Example: Enter "65000"
65,000.00.

to determine all performers with personnel costs greater than

All performers with the role [input] and who have a capacity greater than
[input] .

This query determines all performers with a specific role and a capacity greater than the
value provided.
Example: Enter "secretary" and "1" to find all secretaries who are used beyond their
capacity.
page 74

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS users

All performers belonging to the organisational unit [input] and who have a
workload smaller than [input].

This query will list all performers belonging to the specified organisational unit and who
have a workload smaller than the values provided.
Example: Enter "PR" and "1" to find all PR employees who have a workload smaller than
100%.
Run the completed predefined query by clicking the button "Execute"; the result of your query
will be shown in the ADONIS browser.
By enabling the option "Show attributes in columns" the objects are shown in rows and the
corresponding attributes in columns.

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 75

Part III

5.

Library specific functions

The library specific functions are defined in the ADONIS-Standard-Application library 3.81 and
are available in following components of ADONIS business process management toolkit:
Acquisition (see chap. 5.1, p. 76)
Modelling (see chap. 5.2, p. 78)
Simulation (see chap. 5.3, p. 93)
Import/Export (see chap. 5.5, p. 97)

5.1

Acquisition component

In the acquisition component the library specific functions are defined in the form of HOMER
scenarios (see chap. 5.1.1, p. 76) supporting the data acquisition.

5.1.1

HOMER scenarios

For the data acquisition with HOMER you can either use one of the following scenarios or use
the HOMER scenario manager to adapt the scenario according to your needs:

Figure 18: HOMER scenarios for ADONIS Standard Application Library

Acquisition of activity information (general)

Acquisition of activity information (quantitative)

page 76

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS users

Acquisition of profiles of presence

Acquisition of performer information
Acquisition of employee education
Acquisition of documents
Acquisition of organisational units
Acquisition of roles

The scenario "Acquisition of activity information (general)" scenario collects information for
activities in Business Process Models (see chap. 1.2, p. 9) and the following attributes:
Description
Comment
In addition it is possible to collect the author of a particular model.

The "Acquisition of activity information (quantitative)" scenario collects information for

activities in Business Process Models (see chap. 1.2, p. 9) and the following attributes:
Execution time
Waiting time
Resting time
Transport time
Costs
EDP transaction costs
EDP batch costs
Print costs
Postal costs

The scenario "Acquisition of profiles of presence" scenario collects attribute profiles of the class
"Presence" with the following attributes:
Days per week
Hours per day

The "Acquisition of performer information" scenario collects information for performers in

Working Environment models (see chap. 1.3, p. 10) and the following attributes:
Description
Comment

The "Acquisition of employee education" collects information for performers in Working

Environment models (see chap. 1.3, p. 10)and their further education with the attributes:

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 77

Part III

Seminar title
Participation in

The scenario "Acquisition of documents" collects documents for the document models
(see chap. 1.4, p. 11)and the following attributes:
Description
Comment

The "Acquisition of organisational units" scenario collects the organisational units for the
Working Environment models (see chap. 1.3, p. 10) and the following attributes:
Description
Comment

The "Acquisition of roles" scenario collects roles for Working Environment models
(see chap. 1.3, p. 10) and the following attributes:
Description
Comment

5.2

Modelling component

Modelling component provides the following library specific functionalities:

Class cardinality (see chap. 5.2.1, p. 78)
Intermodel references (multiple models) (see chap. 5.2.2, p. 80)
Number objects (see chap. 5.2.3, p. 82)
Reset object numbering (see chap. 5.2.4, p. 83)
Object conversion (see chap. 5.2.5, p. 84)
Display visualised attributes in English/German (see chap. 5.2.6, p. 85)
Page layout (see chap. 5.2.7, p. 90)
Process Stepper (see chap. 5.2.8, p. 90)

5.2.1

Class cardinality

The table (see Table 1, p. 79) lists all classes with defined cardinality rules. Cardinality rules
help to determine how many objects should be contained in the model and how many incoming
and outgoing connectors of relation class should be assigned to the object.
Note: During cardinality check (Menu "Model" - item "Check cardinalities") models are
examined with respect to defined cardinality rules.

page 78

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS users

Note: Cardinality check does not occur during modelling, but it has to be performed
explicitly. i.e. while modelling you do not need to consider cardinality rules
(modelling can be also performed without considering cardinality rules).
Class

Description

Process start

It has to be exactly one object in a model.

(Business Process Model)

No incoming connector of relation "subsequent" is allowed to

lead to the object and it has to be exactly one connector of
relation "Subsequent" that is coming out from the object.

Subprocess

At least one incoming connector of relation "subsequent" has

to lead to the object and it has to be exactly one connector of
relation "Subsequent" that is coming out from the object..

(Business Process Model)

Activity
(Business Process Model)

At least one incoming connector of relation "subsequent" has

to lead to the object and it has to be exactly one connector of
relation "Subsequent" that is coming out of the object.
At most one connector of relation "uses" is allowed to come
out from the object.

Decision
(Business Process Model)
Parallelity
(Business Process Model)
Merging

At least one incoming connector of relation "subsequent" has

to lead to the object and at least two object of relation
"subsequent" have to come out from the object.
At least one incoming connector of relation "subsequent" has
to lead to the object and at least two object of relation
"subsequent" have to come out from the object.

(Business Process Model)

At least two incoming connectors of relation "subsequent"

have to lead to the object and exactly one connector of relation
"Subsequent" has to come out from the object.

End

At least two objects have to be in a model.

(Business Process Model)

At least one incoming connector of relation "subsequent" has

to lead to the object and no connector of relation "subsequent"
is allowed to come out from the object.

Variable

At least one incoming connector of relation "sets variable" has

to lead to the object.

(Business Process Model)

Random generator
(Business Process Model)

At least one incoming connector of relation "sets variable" has

to come out from the object.

Performance indicator
overview

Maximum of one object of relation "performance indicator

overview" is allowed to be in a model.

(Company Map and Business

Process Model model)

No connector of relation "owns" is allowed to come out from

the object.

At least one incoming connector of relation "sets" has to come

out from the object.

Cost center

Maximum one incoming connector of relation " is cost center

(Working Environment model) manager " is allowed to lead to the object model .
Table 1: Description of the cardinality rules

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 79

Part III

5.2.2

Intermodel references (multiple models)

This function checks if outgoing references (in any number of models and model types) are still
valid (not broken) or if there are invalid references (broken). In addition, it is possible to open
source or target model directly from the result window to fix the problem.

Checking inter model references

Select item "Inter model references (multiple models)" from "model" menu. A window with
model hierarchy appears (see fig. 19, p. 80).

Figure 19: Model selection for checking references

Select models that you want to check. The option "including inter model references outgoing
from the model" will check all models in the model hierarchy. Click "OK" to begin.
ADONIS now checks all references of selected models. It may take some time depending on the
data size and computer's computing capability. Afterwards a window with a list of all references
appears (valid and broken ones). To improve result view you can expand or collapse branches
(see fig. 20, p. 81).

page 80

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS users

Figure 20: Result window (without broken references)

It is possible to open (in the background) the source or target model of a displayed reference
(with write access). To do so, click on the reference and on the button "open target model" or
"open source model". The relevant object will be highlighted in the model (see fig. 21, p. 81).

Figure 21: Target model (Highlighted use case "Enter new address"

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 81

Part III

5.2.3

Number objects

The function "number objects" assigns to the object of model type "Business Process Model",
"Company Map" and "Working Environment model" a unique number with respect to its position
in the diagram.
The numbering function is defined for objects of the following classes:
Business Process Models (using the relation "Subsequent")
-

Process start

Subprocess

Activity

Decision

Parallelity

Merging

End

Company Maps (using the relation "Has process")

-

Process

Working Environment models (using the relation "Is subordinated")

-

Organisational unit

The number that is assigned to the object is stored in the attribute "Order" and at the same time
it is displayed in object's graphical representation.

Performing numbering
In menu "edit", select item "update attributes" and its sub menu item " Number objects".
Objects will be numbered and the object number will be displayed in the graphical form
(see fig. 22, p. 82).

Figure 22: Numbered objects in a Business Process Model

All newly numbered objects will be listed in the window "enumeration - info" (see fig. 23, p. 83).

page 82

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS users

Figure 23: List of numbered objects

Note: At anytime you can undo (see chap. 5.2.4, p. 83) the object numeration.
Note: The object numeration should always be done before generation of RTF
documentation (see chap. 5.5.4, p. 102). It is very important in the business process
models, where object description could be generated with respect to the numbering
order, therefore, it makes documentation easier to read .

5.2.4

Reset object numbering

The function "reset object numbering" removes numbers from objects (see chap. 5.2.3, p. 82)
that are located in the actual model. The value of particular objects will be set to null in the
attribute "order" and numbering will be removed from the model's graphical representation.
To reset object numbering, select in menu "edit", item "update attributes" and its sub menu
item "reset object numbering". Reset will be followed by appropriate safety question
(see fig. 24, p. 83).

Figure 24: Security question before resetting the object numbers

Click on the button "yes" to continue. The object numbering in the model will be set to null and
numbers displayed in the model's graphical representation will be deleted (see fig. 22, p. 82).

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 83

Part III

Figure 25: Unnumbered objects in a Business Process Model

5.2.5

Object conversion

In Business Process Model, it is possible to convert an object of the class "activity" into an object
of the class "subprocess" and the other way around..
By converting an activity into a subprocess, it is possible to model the activity in detail (by
presenting the activity as a subprocess). While converting a subprocess into an activity, it is
possible to reduce the complexity of the process. It is very useful in case of going through
simulation and analysing its results, as the results of subprocesses cannot be calculated
separately, but taken over aggregated.
During object conversion the following information (attributes) will be over taken:
"Activity" <-> "Process call"
-

Name (Description)

Order (Description)

Description (Description)

Commentary (Description)

Questions (Description)

Performer (working environment)

"Process call" --> "Activity"

-

Located Execution time (evaluation result) --> Execution time (time/Costs)

Located waiting time (evaluation result) --> waiting time (time/Costs)

Located resting time (evaluation result) --> resting time (time/Costs)

Located transport time (evaluation result) --> transport time (time/Costs)

Located Costs (evaluation result) --> Costs (time/Costs)

Note: The evaluation results in the subprocess contain the (taken over) simulation
result of referenced processes. Pay attention to the referenced values (e.g. per year,
per process) in the simulation result.

page 84

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS users

Note: While converting subprocess into activity, the referenced process will be
internally saved, so that during re-conversion into subprocess, the reference will be
displayed again.

Performing object conversion

To convert the object of class "activity" into the object of class "subprocess" select from the
object's context menu (right mouse click) item "convert" and then its sub menu item
"subprocess".
To convert the object of class "subprocess" into the object of class "activity" select from the
object's context menu (right mouse click) item "convert" and then its sub menu item "activity".

5.2.6

Display visualised attributes in English/German

By default, visualised attributes (object names, notes, random generators etc.) are displayed in
English (see fig. 26, p. 85).

Figure 26: Model representation in English

Additionally, it is possible - after successful translation of attributes (see chap. 5.2.6.1, p. 86) - to
display those attributes in German (see fig. 27, p. 86).

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 85

Part III

Figure 27: Model representation in German

Note: Before visualising attributes in German (see chap. 5.2.6.2,

requirements to change a language (see chap. 5.2.6.1, p. 86) .

5.2.6.1

p. 88),

see

Requirements

When visualising the attribute value, the given attribute value of a particular object ( at least the
value of the attribute 'name') is displayed on the drawing area. In order to display English
attribute value, it is necessary to translate the other attributes.
To change the attribute language following requirements must be satisfied:
All models that will be translated have to have write access.
All attribute values that will be visualised on the drawing area, have to have translated
corresponding (German) attribute (see p. 86).
Optionally attributes "description" and "comment" can be translated in the model
documentation (see p. 88) (for example HTML documentation).

Requirements for model representation

To show attributes in German the following objects' attributes need to be translated:
Class

Attribute (English)

Attribute (German)

Process start

Name

Bezeichnung

Subprocess

Name

Bezeichnung

Activity

Name

Bezeichnung

Decision

Name

Bezeichnung

Parallelism

Name

Bezeichnung

Merging

Name

Bezeichnung

End

Name

Bezeichnung

Variable

Name

Bezeichnung

Random generator

Value

Info for Value of Random Generator

Resource (BP-Model)

Name

Bezeichnung

page 86

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS users

Process

Name

Bezeichnung

Document

Name

Bezeichnung

Organizational unit

Name

Bezeichnung

Performer

Name

Bezeichnung

Role

Name

Bezeichnung

Resource (WE-Model)

Name

Bezeichnung

Cost centre

Name

Bezeichnung

Use case

Name

Bezeichnung

Actor

Name

Bezeichnung

System boundary

Name

Bezeichnung

Note

Text

Notiz

Aggregation

Name

Bezeichnung

Table 2: Visualized objects' attributes in English/German

Note: In the object of the class "random generator" the value is translated as text only
i.e. during simulation, the entered expression in the attribute "Value" (in German) is
taken into account during analysis.
To fully show attributes in German the following connectors' attributes need to be translated.
Relation

Attribute (English)

Attribute (German)

Subsequent

Transition condition

Info zur bergangsbedingung

Communicates

Name

Bezeichnung

Contains

Name

Bezeichnung

Extends

Name

Bezeichnung

Generalisation

Name

Bezeichnung

Uses

Name

Bezeichnung

Table 3: Visualized connectors' attributes in English/German

Note: In the connector of the relation "Subsequent", the transition condition is

translated as text only i.e. during simulation, the entered expression in the attribute
"transition condition" (in German) is taken into account during analysis .
IMPORTANT:

While using model references (for example a referenced process in a

company map), model names (see p. 87) should be translated in the
model attribute "keywords"

Translation of model names

Translation of model names is necessary if model references (for example subprocess in the
business process models, process in company map) have to be used.
In the model references, the name of the model is used instead of object name that is contained
in the reference.

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 87

Part III

The model name translation has to be done in the model attribute "denomination" (see fig. 28,
p. 88). To translate, select the menu item "model attributes" (or <Alt>+"Enter") from the
"model" menu.

Figure 28: Model names translation

Note:
While arranging the language settings (see chap. 5.2.6.2, p. 88) the model attribute
"Bezeichnung" automatically pops-up. This name should be taken into account during
document generation to create the model documentation in the currently selected language.

Requirements for documentation

Besides translation of visualised attribute's values, it is also possible to translate attributes
"description" and "comments" into the corresponding attributes "beschreibung" and
"kommentar".
It is very important, if you generate model documentation, with the language set to "English" .

5.2.6.2

Implementation

Note: You must have write access to models you whish to translate.
To change the language of visualised attributes, select the item "views" from the menu "view"
and its sub menu item "Select the language for the visualising attributes".
All opened models will be listed in the window "select language - model selection" (see fig. 29,
p. 89).

page 88

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS users

Figure 29: Selecting models for language settings

Select models, you want to use and click OK button.

Select the language for the visualised attribute values in the window "select language"
(see fig. 30, p. 89).

Figure 30: Language selection window

Click OK button to continue.

The appropriate message will be displayed after successful language selection.

Note:
2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 89

Part III

While selecting the language, the attribute "key words" with appropriate identifier
(LANGUAGE='DE'; for German or LANGUAGE='EN'; for English) automatically pops-up. This
identifier is further used to generate model documentation with the current set language.

5.2.7

Page layout

The option "full page (without header and footer)" prints the model without a header of footer
(see fig. 31, p. 90). The option "ADONIS standard page layout", adds a header and footer to the
printing document.

Figure 31: Page layout "full page (without header and footer) "

5.2.8

Process Stepper

Process stepper is a small tool that animates the process flow and also allows to correctly
reconstruct the execution time of each process path, each decision can be made by the user.
The following functions are available:
Process animation (see chap. 5.2.8.1, p. 91)
Starts the process flow, the result can be saved.
Play back process animation (see chap. 5.2.8.2, p. 92)
Open and play process animation.
Remove marking of objects (see chap. 5.2.8.3, p. 92)
Delete marks in the animated model.

page 90

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS users

Settings (see chap. 5.2.8.3, p. 92)

Change the animation speed and turn the execution time on or off.

5.2.8.1

Process animation

This function manually creates process animation. It can be saved in XML files.
IMPORTANT:

The animation always occurs in the currently active model. The

animation may not begin if the model of the other type is opened in
the background.

Starting the process animation:

To start the animation, select item "process animation" from the "process stepper" menu. It will
be executed in a step-by-step manner beginning from the process start object.
Note: While the stepper flows, the objects on the drawing area will be highlighted (one
by the other).
Once the stepper encounters the decision a selection window appears, where you can choose
further stepper path:

Figure 32: Process stepper - decision

Select further path and click "OK". If the stepper encounters a subprocess, there is a possibility
to link an animation to this subprocess or to continue without it:

Figure 33: Process stepper - subprocess

If you want a subprocess to be part of animation click "yes", otherwise "no".

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 91

Part III

Saving process animation:

At the end of animation, the results dialogue will be displayed. It will show the execution time of
the process and there is also the possibility to save the result of the animation::

Figure 34: Process stepper - result

Click on "yes", to save the animation. Otherwise click on "no" or "cancel". The result will be
deleted and stepper will stop.

5.2.8.2

Play back process animation

It is possible to load and play the saved animation at anytime. The exact process flow will be
reconstructed as it was recorded. However, there is a difference - by playback, the execution
time considered for calculation will be taken from the saved models (i.e. changes after saving the
animation will not apply).

Launching the process animation :

Select the option "playback process animation" from the "process stepper" menu. A dialogue
will be displayed, where you can choose the desirable animation file (*.step.xml format). After
selection, stepper will be executed with the model that is necessary for animation.
While the animation flows, the individual steps are displayed as it was saved in the animation
file. At the same time, the actual execution time is calculated. At the end, an information
dialogue with the actual execution time is shown:

Figure 35: The result

5.2.8.3

Additional functions

Besides recording and playback functions, the other functions are available:

page 92

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS users

Remove marking of objects:

Select the option "Remove marking of objects" from the "Process Stepper" menu to hide
marked process path and re-set to a standard view. Marks will be hidden.
Note: Closing models or starting a new animation will automatically remove markings.

Settings:
With the use of settings you can adjust the process steppers to fit your needs. To do so, select
"setting" option from "process stepper" menu and the following dialogue appears:

Figure 36: Process stepper - settings

By clicking on the appropriate radio button, you can set a desirable animation speed.
Note: At the first time, the speed of process stepper is set to "medium". Later on it will
run with lastly selected speed.
Generally, the process animation will be recorded to show the execution time for specific path. If
necessary, deactivate the option "display execution times" to hide the display of execution
times.
Note: With the same function, you can activate the display of execution time.

5.3

Simulation component

The simulation component contains the following library specific functions:

Activation of manual random generator (see chap. 5.3.1, p. 93)
Activation of automatic random generator (see chap. 5.3.2, p. 94)

5.3.1

Activation of manual random generator

A manual random generator can be activated in the simulation component. To activate it, select
the "Edit" menu, its submenu Random generator and then click on the menu point Manual
random generator.
The "Activate manual random generator - model selection" window (see fig. 37, p. 94) will be
displayed, in which you can select models that should be used for the generation.

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 93

Part III

Figure 37: Selection of models for manual variable assignment

Note: Only open models with write access are available for selection!
The activation of a manual random generator will be confirmed by the appropriate hint window.
All "Manual random generator" attributes in the "random generator" objects of the selected
model will be occupied with value "yes" (the representation occurs through checkmark in the
notebook). On the drawing area a hand symbol will appear next to objects.
The user can decide, whether to activate manual random generator, by selecting the value of the
random generator during the simulation.

5.3.2

Activation of automatic random generator

An automatic random generator can be activated in the simulation component. For activation
click on the "Edit" menu and then select "Random generator" submenu and choose the menu
point Automatic random generator
The "Activate automatic random generator - model selection" window will be displayed
(see fig. 38, p. 95), in which you can select the models that should be used for the generation.

page 94

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS users

Figure 38: Selection of models for automatic random generator

Deactivation of the manual random generator will be confirmed by the appropriate hint window.
All "Manual random generator" attributes in "random generator" objects of the selected model
will be occupied with value "no".
If the automatic random generator is activated, the value of the random generator will be
assigned automatically during the simulation.

5.4

Evaluation component

Evaluation component contains the library specific function "monitoring" (see chap. 5.4.1, p. 95).

5.4.1

Monitoring

5.4.1.1

Current value initialisation

During the initialisation the current value will be created in rows and columns of performance
indicator's table target value in the selected models depending on performance indicator's
periodicity. References in the "Performance indicator overview" table will determine, what ratio
should be initialised.
Note: Take under consideration the requirements for current value initiation (see p. 96
).
The current value initialisation is carried out as follows:

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 95

Part III

1.

Select the "current value initialisation" from the "monitoring" menu that is located in the
evaluation component.

2.

Select the model or models and click on the "initialisation" button.

Note: If there is not exactly one object of the class "performance indicator overview" per
model, then the appropriate window is displayed and initialisation cannot be performed.
Note: If no planning period is defined, initialisation can be interrupted.

After initialisation, the rows of the referenced performance indicator (defined periodicity) will be
initialised.
The current value calculation (see chap. 5.4.1.2, p. 96) is possible now.

Requirements for current value initialisation

1.

Define performance indicators in the Business Process Model.

2.

Arrange the periodicity for the performance indicators.

Following periodicities are available:
-

Day

Week

Month

Quarter

Half year

Year

3.

Define exactly one object of the class "performance indicators overview" per model.

4.

Define references on the performance indicator, that are in the "performance indicators
overview" table in the "performance indicator" chapter.
By the model initialisation, only those performance indicators that have defined references
in the table 'performance indicator overview' will be initiated. In this manner, selective
initialisations and the actualisations can be carried out.

5.

Establish the period configuration in the object "performance indicator overview".

The settings in the chapter "period configuration" influence current value initialisation.

5.4.1.2

Current value calculation

After successful initialisation of current value (see chap. 5.4.1.1, p. 95), it is possible to calculate
the current value.
There are three calculation options:
manual coupling
excel coupling
database coupling
Independently from the data source that will be used for calculation of performance indicators
the actualisation will be carried out as follows:
1.

Select the "current value calculation" from the monitoring menu that is located in the
evaluation component.

page 96

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS users

2.

Select the model with actualised performance indicators.

Option "show warnings": Warnings encountered during actualisation can be shown or can
remain hidden.
Option "use system date": If this attribute is selected, the actualisation is made with use of
system date. If you want to use a different date for actualisation, activate the actualisation
button and select the date through the date dialogue:

3.

Data selection through the data dialogue.

Note: If there is more than one object of the class "performance indicator overview" per
model, following hint will be displayed.
Note: If the selected data is out of defined planning period (for the actualisation), the
performance indicators of respective models will not be actualised and the
corresponding message will be displayed.

The appropriate hint will be displayed after current value actualisation.

5.5

Import-/Export-Component

The import/export component contains the following library specific functions:

HTML-Generation (see chap. 5.5.1, p. 97)
RTF-Generation (see chap. 5.5.4, p. 102)
Settings (see chap. 5.5.5, p. 104) for documentation generation
Attribute and class filter (see chap. 5.5.6, p. 109) for documentation generation

5.5.1

HTML-Generation

Note: Before generating HTML documentation, the language of all models that are
contained in the documentation (see chap. 5.2.6, p. 85) should be unified (German
or English). It can be achieved by arranging the language for the attribute display.

To start the HTML-generation, select the "HTML-generation" from the "documentation" menu
or click on the smart-icon in the quick access bar .
In the "HTML-Generation" window (see fig. 39, p. 98) select the models to be used in the
documentation.

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 97

Part III

Figure 39: Model selection for the HTML Generation

Activate the option "including referenced models" if all selected models and their referenced
models should be carried over. To change settings for references click on the "references"
button.
In the "export file" field, type a name and destination path for the exported data and click OK to
start documentation process with current settings (see chap. 5.5.5, p. 104).
After successful generation, the appropriate hint window appears and the HTML documentation
will be available at the earlier specified location. Open the documentation and the export data (in
specified HTML-files) will be displayed in the HTML browser (see fig. 40, p. 99).

page 98

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS users

Figure 40: Generated HTML document (in the Internet Explorer)

5.5.2

HTML Generation (copy referenced documents)

Note: Before HTML generation, the language of all models that will be used in the
documentation should be unified by arranging the language for the attribute display
(see chap. 5.2.6, p. 85) .

To start the HTML generation, select the "HTML-generation (copy referenced documents)" from
the "documentation" menu.
In the (see fig. 41, p. 100) "HTML-generation" window select the models that should be
contained in the documentation.

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 99

Part III

Figure 41: Model selection for the HTML Generation

Activate the option "including referenced models" to carry over all selected models and their
referenced models. To change settings for references click on the "references" button.
In the "export file" field, type a name and destination path for the exported data and click OK to
start documentation process with current settings (see chap. 5.5.5, p. 104).
If it does not exist, ADONIS suggests to create the folder for the referenced documents. Accept
this suggestion.
After successful generation, the appropriate hint window appears and the HTML documentation
will be available at the earlier specified location. Open the documentation and the export data (in
specified HTML-files) will be displayed in the HTML browser (see fig. 40, p. 99).

page 100

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS users

5.5.3

Delta generation (HTML)

Note: Before every HTML generation (also delta generation), the language of all
models that are contained in the documentation should be unified (German or
English) by arranging the language for the attribute display (see chap. 5.2.6, p. 85).

The delta generation is a special form of the HTML generation that is designed for complex
model structures. The difference between delta generation and plain HTML generation lies in the
generation mechanism: at the first time of appliance, a whole generated HTML structure is
registered and saved in the database. With every next delta generation, only the changes in
structures or models will be generated and saved. The advantage of this solution is shorter
generation time.
Note: Changed references (i.e. on the other documents or models, on the new version
number of existing model etc.) are not counted as changes in terms of ADONIS and
therefore they will not be recognised by the delta generation (rule of thumb: "all
changes, that require model re-saving will be considered in the delta generation)
Note: It is not possible to complement HTML documentation generated in the classical
way by the delta generation. Only HTML files that were originally generated via delta
generation can be extended.
To start the generation of HTML documents (see fig. 42, p. 101), select the "delta generation
(HTML)" from the "documentation" menu.
In the window "ADONIS Delta generation", select the models that should be enclosed in the
documentation and click OK. The referenced models will be processed automatically.

Figure 42: Model selection for the delta generation

In the "export file" field, type a name and destination path for the exported data and click OK to
start documentation process with current settings (see chap. 5.5.5, p. 104).
2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 101

Part III

If it does not exist, ADONIS suggests creating the folder for the referenced documents, accept
this suggestion to continue.
After successful generation, the appropriate hint window appears and the HTML documentation
will be available at the earlier specified location. Open the documentation and the export data (in
specified HTML-files) will be displayed in the HTML browser (see fig. 40, p. 99).

5.5.4

RTF Generation

Note: Before RTF generation, the language of all models that will be used in the
documentation should be unified by arranging the language for the attribute display
(see chap. 5.2.6, p. 85) .
Note: It is recommended, to number objects of models to be generated (relevant only
for business process model, working environment model and company map) before
generation begins. In the RTF documentation, especially in the business process
model, objects description will be generated with respect to the number order and
therefore documentation is easer to read.

To start generation of RTF documents, select the item "RTF generation" from the
"documentation" menu or click on the smart icon
in the quick access bar.
In the "RTF generation" window (see fig. 43, p. 103) select models to be used for the generation.

page 102

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS users

Figure 43: Model selection for the RTF generation

Activate the option "including referenced models" if all selected models and their referenced
models should be carried over. To change settings for references click on the "references"
button.
In the "export file" field, type a name and destination path for the exported files and click OK to
start the documentation process using the current settings (see chap. 5.5.5, p. 104).
After successful generation, the appropriate hint window appears and RTF documentation will be
available in the earlier specified location. Open the documentation and export files will be
displayed in Microsoft word (see fig. 44, p. 104).

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 103

Part III

Figure 44: Generated RTF document (displayed in Microsoft Word)

5.5.5

Options (Documentation)

To open the ADONIS notebook for documentation settings, select "options" menu point from
"documentation" menu (see fig. 45, p. 105).

page 104

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS users

Figure 45: Documentation settings of the ADONIS standard application library

Next to the "general settings" chapter, there are additional chapters for each model type.
Note: Options "mode", "attribute mode", mode for "graphic file mode", "orientation",
"page layout" and "graphic generation" are available in every notebook chapter..
While using ADONIS standard application library, you can carry out the following options:

General options:
Option "apply model specific settings"
By default, the standard settings apply to all models, however it is possible to adjust the
settings for the given model by clicking on the "apply model specific options" option. If this
option is activated, the options from the corresponding chapter will be used during
generation of documents to the given model type.
Option "Language"
Selected language does not have any influence on the graphical representation of exported
models. To adjust the language to the graphical representation, select the "views" from the
"view" menu and click on the "select the language for visualising attributes" menu point.
Follow the further instructions.

General options / Model specific settings:

Mode
The documentation component supports the model view i.e. the result of generation can be
represented in the similar way to the models and modelling components through the view
mode. By choosing a mode, only objects of the given modelling class, will be taken in the
document generation.
Example:
2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 105

Part III

In the working environment model, the "standard" mode will display objects of classes
"organizational unit", "performer" and "role" whereas the "role diagram" mode limits objects
representation to "performer" and "role" (see fig. 46, p. 106). In "role diagram" options,
only objects of classes "performer" and "role" and their attributes will be taken in the
documents generation.

Figure 46: Modes in the Working Environment

Note: The mode options only influence text representation of the model content. The
model's graphical representation is handled by the option "Modes for graphics
generation".
Attribute mode
An active attribute mode determines which object's attributes will be used in the document
generation.
Example:
Object of the "performer" class (see fig. 47, p. 107) contains the following represented
attributes. Attribute mode "Documentation" limits the output to attributes "name",
"description" and "comment".

page 106

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS users

Figure 47: Attributes of the "performer class"

Attribute and class filter

Attribute and class filter (see chap. 5.5.6, p. 109) determines, what information (classes,
relations, and attributes) should be exported to the document generation.
Option "Create graphics"
If the document should not contain any graphics, deactivate this option. The document will
be then generated without graphics and will not contain any references to the graphics.
Graphic format for RTF
Here you can determine what file format should be used for RTF generation. There are two
file formats available: .emf (default) and .bmp.
Graphic format for HTML
Here you can determine what file format should be used for HTML generation. There are
two file formats available: .png (default) and .jpg.
Graphic file mode
Documentation components support the model view in a similar way to modelling
components through view modes. By choosing a mode, only objects of the given modelling
class, will be taken to the model graphics generation.
Note: In contrast to view modes in the modelling of a single model, chosen settings will
apply to all models of the given type.
The selected graphic file mode does not affect view mode in the modelling.
Example:
In working environment model, mode "standard" will display objects of classes
"organizational unit", "performer" and "role" whereas mode "role diagram" limits objects
representation to "performer" and "role" (see fig. 46, p. 106). In "role diagram" options,
only objects of classes "performer" and "role" and their attributes will be taken in the
documents generation.
Note: "Graphic file mode" option influences only the graphical representation of the
model content. The text representation of the model is controlled by the option
"Modes".

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 107

Part III

Orientation
Graphic file can be generated without rotation, rotation by 90 (left or right), or rotation by
180 (upside down). Select and adapt the orientation of the graphic files (layout) to the
page layout setting.
Note: The option "orientation" has an effect exclusively on the RTF generation. The
model graphics in the HTML documentation will always remain unchanged.
Example:
Following figure (see fig. 48, p. 108) illustrates an example of the graphics orientation in
the document. RTF document on the left side contains unchanged graphics. On right side,
RTF document has graphics rotated by 90 (counter clockwise direction). Rotated graphics
is displayed in a bigger format and therefore is easier to read.

Figure 48: Example of RTF generation (unchanged - left side, rotated by 90 - right side)

Page layout
Select this option to adjust page layout for graphics to be generated.
IMPORTANT:

On this position, selected page layout refers exclusively on graphics of

generated model, not on the documentation's page layout itself.

Note: The option "page layout" has an effect exclusively on the RTF generation. The
model graphics in the HTML documentation will always remain unchanged.
Example:
Following figure (see fig. 49, p. 109) illustrates an example of the graphic's page layout in
the documentation. RTF document is generated with standard ADONIS page layout
settings, whereby the graphics size is set to fit on two pages.
Note: Connector marks that were represented on the figure have to be explicitly
created.

page 108

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS users

Figure 49: Example of RTF generation with page layout settings

To save current settings, click on the "close" button. If you click on "cancel" button, changes will
not be saved.

5.5.6

Attribute and class filter

To edit settings for the document generation select the "attribute and class filter" menu point
from "documentation".
In the window "Documentation - Attribute and class filter" (see fig. 50, p. 110), you can select
that information (classes, relations and attributes) that should be exported to the document
generation.

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 109

Part III

Figure 50: Attribute and class filter for the documentation (settings in the ADONIS standard application
library)

Activate the box "Model specific type" if you want to defined an individual criteria for each
model type. Deactivate this option if the same rules should be applied for the whole library.
If the box is activated ( ), select every model type, for which you wish to set information for
export.
Now, you see both lists - classes and relations with all selected objects and connectors.
infront of a class, relation or an attribute indicates that class, relation or attribute
The symbol
will be taken in the documentation. Classes, relations or other attributes that will not be exported
to the documentation are marked with .
To deselect a particular class, relation or attribute click on the symbol
disappear) i.e. this particular element will not be taken in the documentation.

(check mark will

(the check mark will appear), to select particular class, relation or

Click on the symbol
attribute i.e. this particular element will be taken in the documentation.

page 110

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS users

If you want to change several elements at once, select them and then click on the button
"change". The status of all selected elements (either blank or marked) will change at the same
time.
To activate or deactivate an individual object, click on the box, or select its name and then click
on the "change" button.
To obtain a mode, that is also available in the modelling component, click on the "load mode"
button. A small dialogue window appears (see fig. 51, p. 111), where you can set model type,
mode and attribute mode. Modes that are displayed there, correspond to the view modes. As
soon as you approve settings, the corresponding mode will be imported and applied. In terms of
documentation it means, that only those classes and relations, that are visible in the selected
mode (in modelling component) and attributes that are visible in attribute mode will be also
included in the generation.
The box "use settings from attribute and class filter" has to be activated if selected settings
have to be applied. Otherwise selected options from the "Option - documentation" menu remain
valid (see fig. 45, p. 105).
Similarly, the box "use attribute and class filter for graphics" has to be activated in order to
initiate settings for graphics.

Figure 51: Attribute and class filter - loading mode

Click on the "assign" button, to save your settings and press "Close" to close the dialogue

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 111

Part III

6.

Expressions

In the ADONIS-Standard-Application library 3.81 the following attributes of "expression" type are
defined:
Activity (see chap. 2.6, p. 19)
-

Performer
The value of the attribute "performer" is calculated on the basis of attribute "responsible
role" in the object of "activity" class. From the content of this attribute, a valid AQL
expression will be created in the attribute "performer". Alternatively, the value can be
defined by the ADONIS-user.
Process (see chap. 2.14, p. 31)

Aggregated execution time

Aggregated cycle time

Aggregated costs

Aggregated resting time

Aggregated personal costs

Aggregated transport time

Aggregated waiting time

The value of this attribute is calculated on the basis of simulation results that were
entered into the process start object of referenced Business Process Model. If the other
model type is referenced, those attributes are empty. The ADONIS user cannot change
the entered value.
Subprocess (see chap. 2.5, p. 17)

Performer
While switching between classes "Activity" and "Sub process" the value of the "activity"
class attribute is taken over. Alternatively, the value can also be defined by the ADONISuser.

Aggregated execution time

Aggregated cycle time

Aggregated costs

Aggregated resting time

Aggregated personal costs

Aggregated transport time

Aggregated waiting time

The value of this attribute is calculated on the basis of simulation results that were
entered into the process start object of a referenced Business Process Model. The
ADONIS user cannot change the entered value.
Process start (see chap. 2.4, p. 15)

Quantity
There is no expression defined. ADONIS user can decide by itself what value to enter.

page 112

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS users

Resource (see chap. 2.13, p. 30)

-

Selection
There is no expression defined. ADONIS user can decide by itself what value to enter.
Performer (see chap. 2.23, p. 43)

Availability
The value of this attribute is calculated from values of attributes: "Days per week" and
"Hours per day". The number of week hours is set to 40 (=100 percent).

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 113

Part III

7.

Attribute profiles

Attribute profiles are used for the central management of common attributes that can be
referenced in the notebook.
In objects of "Performer" (working environment model) (see chap. 2.23, p. 43) can create
references in the attribute "presence" on the attribute profile of the "presence" class. The
attribute profile class "presence" contains attributes "days per week" and "hours per day"
(see fig. 52, p. 114). The work time of the particular performer can be set by reference to the
corresponding attribute profile.

Figure 52: A window "editing attribute profile"

page 114

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS users

To assign the attribute profile to performer, open performer's notebook and click on the "add"
in the "presence" section. The window "Adonis-standard-application library 3.81
icon
attribute profile selection" will be displayed (see fig. 53, p. 115).

Figure 53: A window "attribute profile selection"

Select one of the existing profiles from the list or create a new one by clicking on the "add
profile" button.
Note: Only user with special rights can create a new attribute profile. If you do not have
those rights, there will be no "new attribute profile" button in the window "ADONIS
standard application library 3.81 - attribute profile selection". If necessary, contact
your ADONIS administrator.
After selection of desirable attribute profile press "assign" button, to assign selected profile to the
performer. Attributes "days per week" (by default 5, if no attribute profile will be referenced) and
"hours per day" (by default 8, if no attribute profile will be referenced) of assigned attribute
profile will be displayed in the notebook
To delete the reference of attribute profile, click on the "delete' icon in the presence section

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 115

Part III

8.

Tables

Tables are located in the Business Process Model "process start" class (see chap. 2.4, p. 15) and
in the Working Environment "performer" class (see chap. 2.23, p. 43). They will be centrally
managed and assigned to the notebook.

Figure 54: An example of a table in the "performer" class

To add a row, open the notebook and click on the "add" button above the particular attribute
( ).
To delete a row, open the notebook, click on the particular row number and then on "delete"
button ( ).
To see the entire content of the table, open the particular notebook and click on the icon
"window" that is above particular attribute ( ).
In a "dialogue" window there is an option, to save a table for printing purposes or search for
browser contents.

Figure 55: Table - "dialogue" (example)

page 116

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS users

9.

Example models

During installation of ADONIS Business Process Management toolkit, the following ADL files will
be copied in the ADONIS folder:
Example-General.adl (see chap. 9.1, p. 117)
Example-General_incl_resources.adl (see chap. 9.2, p. 123)
Example-Assurance.adl (see chap. 9.3, p. 127)
Example-Bank.adl (see chap. 9.4, p. 139)
Example-Health.adl (see chap. 9.5, p. 140)
Example-PublicServices.adl (see chap. 9.6, p. 141)
Example-Telecommunication.adl (see chap. 9.7, p. 141)
Above files contain exemplary models of the ADONIS standard application library that can be
imported to ADONIS.
When models are described in this document, some details are omitted to improve clarity. More
detailed information about the business process management toolkit you will find in the ADONIS
user manual.

9.1

Models of the file Example-General.adl

The file Example - General.adl is consisted of

Company map
"Application for vacation" (see chap. 9.1.2, p. 118).
Business Process Models
"Application for vacation" (see chap. 9.1.2.3, p. 120) and
"Decline application" (see chap. 9.1.2.4, p. 122)
Working Environment model
"Application department" (see chap. 9.1.2.2, p. 119).
Problem description (see chap. 9.1.1, p. 118) documents the organisation structure and a flow
of business processes.

Defining application model:

If you want to simulate models of the file "example-general", you have to define a use case
diagram before execution of "capacity analysis" or "workload analysis".
Application models consists of a Business Process Model
"Application for vacation"
and the Working Environment model
2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 117

Part III

"Department 5".
.

9.1.1

Problem description

An enterprise has the application department (named "Application department") with 5 workers.
It employs a department manager, two specialists and two secretaries (remark: all of them
belong to the same cost centre).
Each employee's vacation application goes to the personal department and is handled by one of
the department workers. The department clerk passes an application to the department
manager. The department manager checks the application and makes the decision upon
approval (80% of applications will be approved).
If the application is approved, the department manager gives the application to the office. The
office archives the application, updates the vacation file and informs the applicant about the
decision.
If the vacation application is declined, it will be sent to the office and filed there. The applicant is
informed about rejection.

9.1.2

Modelling in ADONIS

A solution to the problem description (see chap. 9.1.1, p. 118) also takes place in the working
environment model "application department" (see chap. 9.1.2.2, p. 119), where the personal
department "department 5" will be modelled as in the business process models "application for
vacation" (see chap. 9.1.2.3, p. 120) (modelling the application flow) and "Declining"
(see chap. 9.1.2.4, p. 122)(modelling the rejection).

9.1.2.1

Company map "Applying for vacation"

The company map contains the process models in the hierarchical structure (see fig. 56, p. 119
).

page 118

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS users

Figure 56: Company Map "Applying for vacation"

9.1.2.2

WE Model "Department 5"

A modelling of organisation structure takes place in the working environment model (see fig. 57,
p. 119).

Figure 57: Working Environment model "Department 5"

The model contains an organisational with five performers. The organisational unit appears
where name "application department" and performers are anonymous: "manager", "performer1", "performer-2", "performer-3" and "performer-4".
2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 119

Part III

Performer duties are modelled as "roles". The performer "manager" is assigned to the role "head
of department",
"performer-1" and "performer-2" to the role "clerk", "performer-3" and
"performer-4" to the role "secretary".
The relation "is manager" connects the performer "manager" to the organisational unit
"application department". The relation "belongs to" assigns all performers to the application
department.
Note: The relation "is manager" complements relation "belongs to". It does not replace
it.
Object's notebook, contains varied information. Next to described attributes, objects of the class
"performer" contain simulation data. Following table (see fig. 58, p. 120) presents employee's
hourly wages.

Figure 58: Employee's hourly wages in the department 5

The performer's calendar shows the structure of regular working week or absent time (weekend,
holydays or vacation). This calendar information will be analysed by the workload simulation.
Note: Performer's calendar is set with default value (working time: Monday - Friday,
9.00 - 12.00 and 12:30 - 16:30, free days and vacations etc. are not considered).

9.1.2.3

BP Model "Application for vacation"

Subprocess modelling takes place in the Business Process Model (see fig. 59, p. 120).

Figure 59: Business Process Model "application for vacation"

The process begins with class object "process start" named "application for vacation".
Next there are two objects of the class "activity": "process application form" and "check
application form". The activity "process application form" is assigned to the performer with the
role "Clerk" (i.e. performer-1 or performer-2), while the activity "check application form" has to
be carried out by the "head of department 5".
page 120

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS users

After activities "process application form" and "check application form" the process branches
out into two paths through the class object "decision" ("application accepted?").
Path 1:
In case of application approval, activities "update vacation files", "inform applicant", "file
application" are carried out simultaneously (not sequentially). Parallelism will be symbolised
by the class "parallelism", that has three outgoing branches to activities. The performer with
the role "secretary" (i.e. performer-3 or performer - 4) carries out three parallel activities.
Parallel activities, that are carried out by the same performer can only be completed in the
sequential manner.
After parallel processes, the object of the class "merge" will merge the individual branches
after the business process ends in the class object "end".
Path 2:
The second path describes an application rejection. As written in the problem description,
many business processes carry out declination of application in the identical form,
independently from the business process "application for vacation".
Hence, "decline application" is modelled as the separated business process, to be used by
different business processes.
For that purpose, an object of the class "subprocess" (with the name "decline the
application) will be modelled in the business process model "Application for vacation". The
reference on the model "decline application" is arranged in the object's "decline application"
notebook. The name of the referenced model is entered in the section "referenced process"
(in this case it is "decline application" (see chap. 9.1.2.4, p. 122)).
After execution of the subprocess "decline the application" (see chap. 9.1.2.4, p. 122), the
main process will continue. The branch ends, because there are no further activities.
The logic flow - time and logic flow of the business processes, is represented by the relation
"subsequent".
After the decision "application accepted?", both paths are required to define "variable" to enable
the simulation of the business process model "application for vacation" with the referenced
subprocess "decline the application". They will be described with the name "acceptance".
The relation "sets variable" assigns the class object "random generator" to this variable.
The discrete distribution "Discrete (YES 0.8, NO 0.2)" (the attribute "value" in the class object
"random generator") that is referenced on the object "application accepted?", is arranged in the
transition condition of both relations "sets variable". Through this distribution, the object
"acceptance" of the class "variable" is occupied with probabilities 0,8 for the value "yes" and 0,2
for the value "no".
The object of the class "random generator" is connected to the flow via relation "sets". It has to
be arranged before the object of the class "decision" (for example in the activity "check
application form").
The flow conditions of the individual path are defined in the transition condition of the relation
"subsequent", after the decision "application accepted?". In the transition condition of the
acceptance proposal path the acceptance is set to yes (acceptance=yes). In decline application
path the acceptance is set to no (acceptance=no). The transition condition consists of variable
name "acceptance", the logical operator '=' and the constants from the object of the class
"random generator") (YES or NO).
The objects notebook stores the information (attributes) such as technical descriptions of
activities.

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 121

Part III

The below table (see fig. 60, p. 122) presents values of the attributes "execution time", "waiting
time", "resting time", "transport time" and costs of all objects in the activity class. The
represented attributes are required for simulation.

Figure 60: Simulation data of the activity in the business process model "application for vacation""

The attribute "performer" in the class object "activity" carries out the assignment to the
performer of organisational structure. Assignment of the performer is done by AQL-query (AQL =
ADONIS Query Language). ADONIS offers input supporting dialogs for entering data. The table
below (see fig. 61, p. 122) shows performer assignment in objects of the class "activity" in the
model "application for vacation".

Figure 61: Performer assignment in the business process model "application for vacation"

9.1.2.4

BP model Decline application"

The subprocess "decline application" is modelled as a separate business process (see fig. 62,
p. 122).

Figure 62: Business Process Model "decline application"

page 122

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS users

The flow within models starts from the object "decline application" of the class "process start". It
follows the parallel activities "file application", "inform applicant" which will be carried out by the
performer with the role "secretary (i.e. performer-3 or performer-4).
Parallelism starts with the object of the class "paralelity" and ends with the object of the class
"merge".
The business process ends after performing all parallel activities.
The logic is created by the connection of illustrated objects via the relation "subsequent".
The notebook of objects "file application" and "inform applicant", contains the value of attributes
"execution time", "waiting time", "resting time", "transport time" and costs that are presented on
the table below (see fig. 63, p. 123).

Figure 63: Simulation data of the activity in the business process model "decline application"

The attribute "performer" of the class object "activity" carries out the assignment to the
performer of organisational structure. Assignment of the performer is done by AQL-query (AQL =
ADONIS Query Language). ADONIS offers input supporting dialogs for entering data. The table
below (see fig. 64, p. 123) shows performer assignment in objects of the class "activity" in the
model "decline application".

Figure 64: Performer assignment in the business process model "decline application"

9.2

Models from the file ExampleGeneral_with_resources.adl

The file "Example-General_with_resources.adl" consists of

Company map
""Application for vacation (resource)" (see chap. 9.2.2, p. 124).
Business process management model
"Application for vacation (resource)" (see chap. 9.2.2.3, p. 126) and
"Decline application (resource)" (see chap. 9.2.2.4, p. 127)
and Working Environment model
"Application department" (see chap. 9.2.2.2, p. 125).
This file contains the same models as the file "Example-General.adl" (see chap. 9.1, p. 117) and
additionally resources that are required to execute activities.

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 123

Part III

Defining application model:

If you want to simulate models of the file "example - general", you have to define the application
model before running "capacity analysis" or "workload analysis".
The application model consists of a Business Process Model
"Application for vacation (resource)"
as well as a Working Environment model
"Department 5 (resource)".
.

9.2.1

Problem description

In addition to the problem statement, there are also the following requirements:
Each performer in the "Application department" has their own PC. There is an additional PC
for the department as well.
Activities in the business process "Application for vacation" and in subprocess "Decline
application" are performed with support of resources (PC).
Simulation run should assure that the performer uses its own PC to carry out the activity.

9.2.2

Modelling in ADONIS

The described problem (see chap. 9.2.1, p. 124) is implemented through the working
environmental model "Application department" (see chap. 9.2.2.2, p. 125), (where the
"department 5" is modelled), Business Process Model "Application for vacation (resource)"
(see chap. 9.2.2.3, p. 126) and "Decline application (resource)" (see chap. 9.2.2.4, p. 127).

9.2.2.1

Company map "Application for vacation

(resource)"

Company map "Application for vacation (resources)" contains the process models in their
hierarchical structure (see fig. 65, p. 125).

page 124

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS users

Figure 65: Company map "Application for vacation (resources)"

9.2.2.2

WE Model "Application department (resource)"

The Working Environment model "Application department (Resource) 3.81" (see fig. 66, p. 125)
is the same as "Application department" (see chap. 9.1.2.2, p. 119) but also includes resources.

Figure 66: Working Environment model "Application department (resource)"

Objects of the class "resource" upgrade the working environment model.

The relation "uses resource" assigns performer to their "own" PC.
The relation "has resource" is used to assign "PC-depart." to the "department 5".
2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 125

Part III

The below table (see fig. 67, p. 126) shows values of individual resource that are located in the
attribute "hourly wages".

Figure 67: Hourly wages of resource in application department

9.2.2.3

BP Model "Application for vacation (resource)""

BP Model "Application for vacation (resource)" (see fig. 68, p. 126) represents the business
process model "application for vacation" (see chap. 9.1.2.3, p. 120) expanded with resources.

Figure 68: Business process model "Application for vacation (resource)"

To show that activities are supported by resources, objects of class "activity" are connected with
resources via relation "uses". Those resources are considered as placeholders.
Then in the attribute "selection" of class object "resource" a particular resource is assigned from
the appropriate working environment model (see fig. 69, p. 126).

Figure 69: Resource assignment in the business process model "Application for vacation (resource)"

page 126

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS users

To ensure that a performer carries out an activity with their own PC, the value (current
performer -> "uses resource") is entered in the attribute "selection".

9.2.2.4

BP Model "Decline application (resource)"

BP Model "Decline application (resource)" (see fig. 70, p. 127) contains the business process
model "Decline application" (see chap. 9.1.2.4, p. 122) updated by resources.

Figure 70: Business process model "Decline application (resource)"

Relation "uses" assigns a resource to objects "decline application (resources)" and "inform
applicant" of the class "activity". Those resources (PC-6 and PC-7) are placeholders for assigned
resources in the working environment model.
In the attribute "selection" of the object "PC-6" and "PC-7" the activity will assign a concrete
resource from the corresponding working environmental model (see fig. 71, p. 127).

Figure 71: Resources assignment in the business process model "Decline application (resource)"

To ensure that performer uses its own PC to perform the activity, the attribute "selection" of the
class "resource" contains the value "(current performer -> uses resource)".

9.3

Models from the file "example-insurance.adl"

The file "example-insurance.adl" consists of:

Company map
2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 127

Part III

"Processes in customer service dep. Life assurance" (see chap. 9.3.2, p. 129),
Business process models
"BP Contract value enquires (written)" (see chap. 9.3.2.2, p. 131),
"BP Change of address" (see chap. 9.3.2.3, p. 133),
"BP Change name of policy holder" (see chap. 9.3.2.4, p. 134),
"BP Change of beneficiary" (see chap. 9.3.2.5, p. 135),
"SP Policy update" (see chap. 9.3.2.6, p. 136),
"SP Dispatch written evaluation" (see chap. 9.3.2.7, p. 137)
Working Environments model
"Customer Service Dept" (see chap. 9.3.2.1, p. 130).
Document model
"Customer service dept Life assurance" (see chap. 9.3.2.8, p. 138).
and User case diagram
"Customer database" (see chap. 9.3.2.9, p. 138).
With use of those models, it is not possible to represent business processes of the life insurance
company. You will find detailed model descriptions in the chapter modelling in ADONIS
(see chap. 9.3.2, p. 129).

Defining application model:

If you want to simulate models of the file "example - assurance", you have to define the
application model before running "capacity analysis" or "workload analysis".
The application model consists of: Business process models
"BP Change of address",
BP Change name of policy holder",
BP "Change of beneficiary"
BP "Contract value enquires (written)"
as well as Working environmental model
"Customer service dept".

9.3.1

Problem description

A branch of an insurance company has a "customer service department" with 2 departments:

"services" and "enquires". One performer works in the "enquires" department and 3 performers
in the "services" department.
A performer in "enquires" manages customers' questions regarding current contracts. The clerk
gets performance data and responds to clients in the form of letters. Department "services"
updates clients' data (addresses, names or beneficiary). Applied changes are sent to clients by
mail. All clerks in the "service" department have the possibility to perform corrections on client's
data.
page 128

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS users

During the contract value enquiries the existing contract is checked. The established values are
checked and obtained performance data is reported to customers (in written form). The process
of "writing letters" occurs in the identical form however in a different department of the
enterprise. If the performance data does not exist, the customer and agent will be informed (in
written form).
The business process change of beneficiary describes, that changed application will be issued to
the existing beneficiary right. Then the check has to be performed to examine if changes have
been applied or not. There are two possible results: either it is possible to change and apply
beneficiary or it cannot be changed and the business process ends, because the request cannot
be fulfilled.
In the case of an address change, the address will be searched for in the address database to
check if it exists and a decision made about the address origin (home or foreign). If it is a home
address, a new address can be entered into the system. If the address is foreign, authorization of
delivery has to be checked before entering the data into the system. The business process ends
with the letter preparation that informs customer about the change.
If a policy holder requests to change his name, the existing name will be searched in the address
database and the name will be changed. A letter regarding the change will be sent to the
customer.
The flow of the process "writing a letter" is the same in every department.

9.3.2

Modelling in ADONIS

The modelling of problem description (see chap. 9.3.1, p. 128) occurs

In the working environmental model "Customer service dept", where both departments
"services" and "enquiries" are established,
In the business processes "BP Contract value enquiries (written)", "BP Change of address",
"BP Change name of policy holder" and "BP Change of beneficiary", as well as in sub
processes "SP dispatch written evaluation" and "SP policy update".
in the document model "customer service dept. Life Assurance" and
in use case diagram "customer database"
A connection between processes and subprocesses and appropriate departments are
represented in the company map (see fig. 72, p. 130):

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 129

Part III

Figure 72: Company map "processes in the customer service dept."

9.3.2.1

WE Model "customer service dept.""

Modelling of organisational structure occurs in a working environment model (see fig. 73, p. 130
).

Figure 73: WE Model "customer service dept."

The model contains three organisation units and four performers. Organisation units have
following names "Services", "Enquires" and "Customer service dept. Life assurance". This time,
performers have names: "Edward Spring" from "Enquiries" department and "Jack Summer",
"Henry Autumn" and "Tom Winter" from "services" department.

page 130

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS users

Area of a performer's responsibility is modelled as a "role". Performer of "enquires" has the role
"Clerk Enquires". Three performers from the department "Services" have the role "Clerk Service".
The role assignment is arranged by the relations "has role" and the assignment to the
department is arranged by the relation "belongs to".
The below table (see fig. 74, p. 131) shows the assignment of performers to the activity in all
business process models.

Figure 74: Performers assignment in the business process models

In the main business process model ("BP Application for Vacation"), the performer with the role
"clerk" (services or enquires) is assigned to the activity. At the same time, the attribute "done
by" of this activity will be occupied with the value "Service clerk" or "Enquires clerk". It
guarantees, that the performer that is assigned to the first activity also performs all following
activities thus there is no performer exchange.
Note: It is possible to create a performers calendar for each performer. Check hints in
the example model "Application for vacation" (see chap. 9.1.2.3, p. 120).

9.3.2.2

BP Model "Contract value enquires (written)"

The modelling of a process flow occurs in the business process model, where "BP contract value
enquires" is represented (see fig. 75, p. 132).

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 131

Part III

Figure 75: Business process model "BP contract value enquires"

Process flow starts with the object "process start" named "Contract value enquires".
Next, follows objects of the class "activity": "check contract" and "valuating the contract". Both
activities will be carried out by the performer with the role "information clerk". In this example,
there is only one performer with such status.
If the performance value is calculated, the flow splits into parallel streams. It is arranged by the
"parallelism" object.
Path 1: The "SP Dispatch written evaluation" is called in most cases. As described in the
problem description, the process of "Writing letters" is consistently activated. Therefore this
activity is represented as the separate business process model (subprocess) to be used by
different business process models.
In the business process model "contract value enquires", an object of the class "sub process" (SP
dispatch written evaluation) is modelled for the process "writing letters". The reference on the
model "SP dispatch written evaluation" is arranged in the ADONIS-Notebook of objects "SP
dispatch written evaluation" (business process model), in the attribute "referenced subprocess"
(in this case it is "SP dispatch written evaluation").
Path 2: If no performance values are present, what happens in 20% of cases where business
process model is activated, it will be then presented by the random generator. The path, you
have to choose will be shown by the transition condition "Value=None". This value is displayed
on the connector (or relation "subsequent"). If there is no performance value, it is necessary to
get the written agreement from the agent regarding the missing performance value.
The "conditional parallelism" will be brought together by the object "organization". The process
flows directly to the object "end", because there are no further activities.
The logic flow, the timing and logic flow of the business processes is represented by the relation
"subsequent".
A "variable" is defined to enable simulation capabilities of the business process model of the "BP
Contact value enquires" including referenced subprocess "SP Dispatch written evaluation". The
variable is named "value". The object of the class "random generator" (statistical distribution) will
be assigned to this variable by the relation "assign variable".
The discrete distribution (exist: 0,8; not exist 0,2) (the attribute "Value" in the "random
generator" class object) is referenced on the object "X" of the "parallelism" class in the "transition
condition" of both relations of the "subsequent" type. With this distribution, the object "Value" of
the class "variable" with probability 0,8 is set to "exists" and with probability 0,2 is set for "none".
The transition condition is consisted of variables "Value", logical operator "=" and a constant
from the class object "Random generator" ('exists' or 'none'). In this example only transition
condition "none" is modelled.

page 132

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS users

The relation "sets" connects an object of the class "random generator" with the flow. It has to be
done before the object of the class "decision". In this example the "random generator" is
arranged in the "parallelism" object.
Object's notebooks contain information about the objects. For example: Technical description in
activities.
Note: The performer's assignment to the activity is presented in the description of the
working environmental model (see fig. 74, p. 131).

9.3.2.3

"BP Model "Change of address"

Modelling of process flows is arranged in the BP model "BP change of address" (see fig. 76,
p. 133).

Figure 76: Business process model "BP change of address"

The flow begins with the object " change of address" of the class "process start".
After process start object, there are two activities: "Search for customer in customer database"
and "Check address (domestic/foreign)". Those activities are performed by the performer with
the role "clerk".
After the activity "Check address (domestic/foreign)", the flow branches out into two paths
(through the object "Domestic or foreign?" of the class "decision").
Path 1: If the address is domestic, the activity "Enter new address in system" will be immediately
carried out.
Path 2: If the address is foreign, the flow is extended by some class objects. The activity "Check
country in risk table" follows the class "decision" (Name: "Authorization required?") that again
provides two possibilities of the process flow.
Path 3: The "decision" permits that no authorization is required. Then the flow path goes directly
to the activity "Enter new address in system", that can be carried out without additional activities
in the path 1.
Path 4: If the "decision" indicates that the authorisation is required, the process path goes
through the activity "Contact the customer" and then to the "Enter new address in system".
After the end of activity "Enter new address in system", the process of "Writing letters" is shown
in the form of "subprocess" ("SP Policy update"). In a different business process, the process of

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 133

Part III

"Writing letters" is performed in the same form. Therefore the "Sending letters" activity is
modelled on the basis of business process models in the form of subprocesses.
If the subprocess "SP Policy update" ends, the main process "BP Change of address" continues.
Because there is no further activities, it ends in the object "end".
To enable the simulation capability of the business process model "BP Change of address",
including its subprocess "SP Policy update", the variables (in this case "Address" and
"AuthNeeded") have to be defined for three optional paths. It has to be arranged before
decisions "Domestic or foreign?" and "Authorization required?".
The relation "sets variable" assigns the variable to the "random generator" (statistical
distribution).
The statistical distribution "Discrete (domestic 0,9; foreign 0,1) (attribute "value" in the class
object "random generator") is referenced after the decision class object "Domestic or foreign?" in
the "transition condition" of both relations "subsequent". Through this distribution, the object
"Address" of the class "Variable" is occupied with probabilities 0,8 for the value "Domestic" and
0,2 for the value "Foreign".
The relation "sets" connects the class object "random generator" with the flow. It should be
arranged in the "decision" class object. Optionally you can arrange it in the activity right before
the decision.
Conditions for each path (after the decision "Domestic or foreign?") are defined in the "transition
condition" of the relation type "subsequent". In case of path 1, where address is domestic, the
value "Address='Domestic'" is entered. If address is "foreign", in the case the field is occupied
with the value "Address='Foreign'" (path 2). The transition condition is consisted of variables
"Address", logical operator "=" and a constant from the class object "random generator"
('domestic' or 'foreign').
Note: The performers assignment to the activity is presented by a description of a
working environmental model (see fig. 74, p. 131).
Note: Also notice other's models description entered in ADONIS Notebook.

9.3.2.4

BP Model "Change name of policy holder"

The modelling of process flow is arranged in the BP Model "BP Change name of policy holder"
(see fig. 77, p. 134).

Figure 77: Business process model "BP Change name of policy holder"

The flow begins with the object " change of address" of the class "Process start".
The process flow is a sequence that begins with activities "Search for customer in customer
database" and "Enter new name into database". The flow path navigates through the sub process
"SP Policy Update". The object "sub process" ("SP Update policy (business process model)") is
modelled.

page 134

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS users

The reference on the model "SP Policy Update" is arranged in the notebook of the object "SP
Policy Update", where the attribute "referenced subprocess" contains the name of referenced
business process model (in this case it is SP Policy Update).
After completing the subprocess "SP Policy Update", the flow returns to the main process "BP
Change name of policy holder" and ends in the class object "end".
Note: Performance assignment is presented in the description of the working
environment model (see fig. 74, p. 131).
Note: The object's notebook contains information (attributes) such as a technical
description of a given activity or number and appearance frequency of a given
"process start" object (see fig. 60, p. 122). They show attributes value's of "execution
times", "waiting time", "resting time", "transport time" and "costs" in all objects of the
"activity" class. The above attributes are required for simulation.

9.3.2.5

BP Model "BP change of beneficiary""

Modelling of the process flow is arranged in the business process model and presents the BP
model "BP change of beneficiary" (see fig. 78, p. 135).

Figure 78: Business process model "BP change of beneficiary"

The flow begins with the object "Check change request" of the class "process start".
The activity "Check change request" follows process start. The activity is carried out by a "Service
clerk" performers.
After the activity "Check change request", the flow branches out into two paths (through the
object "Can changes be made?").
Path 1: The flow branches out in the object "Parallelism". It specifies what activities should be
executed at the time. Execution order within parallelism is arbitrary. Activities can be also
accomplished by different performers (in this example there are two activities: "Check contract"
and "Search for customer in customer database"). If both activities are performed, the flow
reaches the object "Merging".
After merging, all objects have to be executed in the sequence. The process flows to the
decision object "Right to life assurance unchangeable?", with two optional flow paths.
Path 3: Beneficiary is revocable and the activity "Enter new names in system" is immediately
executed.
Path 4: The beneficiary is revocable and the activity "Determine creditor" is executed. After that,
the activity "Enter new names in system" is performed.
2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 135

Part III

Because two branches in the activity "Enter new names in system" run together, the main
process continues and flows into the subprocess "SP Correspondence (Policy update)".
The reference on the "SP Correspondence (Policy update)" is arranged in the object's "SP
Correspondence (Policy update)" notebook (the name of the process is entered in the attribute
"referenced subprocess" - in this case it is SP Correspondence (Policy update). After completing
the subprocess "SP Correspondence (Policy update)" the flow returns to the main process "BP
change of beneficiary" and ends in the class object "end".
Path 2: If changes cannot be made, the activity "Information to agent" is performed and the flow
returns to the main process "BP change of beneficiary" and ends in the class object "end".
The flow logic - the chronological and logic flow of the business processes is represented by the
relation "subsequent".
"Variables" for three optional paths (after decisions "Can changes be made?" and "Right to life
assurance unchangeable?") need to be defined to enable simulations capability of the business
process model "BP change of beneficiary", including the sub process "SP Policy update"..
The relation "sets variable" assigns variable to the class object "random generator" (statistical
distribution).
The discrete distributions "Discrete (yes 0.99; no 0.01)" and "Discrete (yes 0.3; no 0.7)"
(attribute "value" in the Object of the class "random generator") are referenced in the "transition
condition" section of relation "subsequent". The reference is arranged before objects "Domestic
or foreign?" and "Authorization required?". Through this distribution the object "execution" of the
class "variable" sets the value "yes" with the probability 0.99 and the value "no" with probability
0.01. The object "unchangeable" of the class "variable" sets the value "yes" with the probability
0.3 and the value "no" with the probability 0.7.
The relation "sets" connects objects of the class "random generator" with the flow. Ideally it is
arranged at the particular decision.
The flow conditions of particular paths are defined in the "transition condition" section of the
relation "subsequent" (after the decisions "Can changes be made?" and "Right to life assurance
unchangeable?"). In the transition condition of the path that is coming out of the "Can changes
be made?", the execution value is set to "yes". In path 2, (changes are unavailable), the
execution value is set to "no". In case of unchangeable right to the life assurance, the
unchangeable "no", if changes are possible the value is set to "yes" path 4).
The transition condition is consisted of variable name "execution" or "unchangeable", logical
operator "=" and the constant from the class object "random generator" "yes or no".
Note: The performer's assignment to the activities is represented by the description of
the working environment model (see fig. 74, p. 131).
Note: See details regarding ADONIS notebook entry in the description of the other
models.

9.3.2.6

BP Model "SP Dispatch written evaluation"

The subprocess "SP Dispatch written evaluation" is displayed as the independent business
process model (see fig. 79, p. 137).

page 136

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS users

Figure 79: Business process model "SP Dispatch written evaluation"

The flow within the model begins with the process start object "Dispatch written evaluation".
Following the start object there are two activity objects "Write letter" and "Dispatch letter". Both
activities are carried out by the class object "performer" with the role "clerk" from the enquiry
department.
After completing both activities, the subprocess ends.
The logic flow is created by connecting displayed objects with the relation type "subsequent".
Note: The performer's assignment to the activities is represented by the description of
the working environment model (see fig. 74, p. 131).
Note: See details regarding ADONIS notebook entry in the description of other models.

9.3.2.7

BP Model "SP Policy update"

The subprocess "SP Policy update" is displayed as the independent business process
management (see fig. 80, p. 137).

Figure 80: Business process management "SP Policy update"

The flow within the model begins with the process start object "Policy update". Following the
start object there are two activity objects: "Write policy endorsement" and "Send endorsement".
Both activities are carried out by the class object "performer" with the role "clerk" from the
services department.
After completing both activities, the subprocess ends.
The logic flow is created by connecting displayed objects with the relation type "subsequent".
Note: The performer's assignment to the activities is represented by the description of
the working environment model (see fig. 74, p. 131).
Note: See details regarding ADONIS notebook entry in the description of others
models.

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 137

Part III

9.3.2.8

Document model "Customer service department"

The document model "Customer service department" contains all documents that are required
for these modelled processes (see fig. 81, p. 138).

Figure 81: Document model "Customer service department

The six documents: "Contract", "Policy endorsement", "Endorsement", "Change request", "Risk
table" and "Letter" are modelled without connectors, because they are independent from each
other.
In the process models, documents are referenced in the corresponding activities. On the
graphics surface area, the reference is displayed as the symbol on top of the activity.

9.3.2.9

Use case diagrams "Customer database"

A use case diagram "Customer database" shows the EDP solution "Customer database" with its
possibilities available for the user (role "Service clerk") (see fig. 82, p. 139).

page 138

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS users

Figure 82: Use case diagram "Customer database"

Every use case diagram: "Search for customer", "Enter new address", "Enter new name" can be
requested at the same time by the system and the option in the program.
The role "clerk" in service department references this actor in the working environment model.

9.4

Models of the example-bank.adl

The ADL file "Example-Bank.adl" consists of

Company map
"Voucher-bound transfer",
Business Process Models
"BP Voucher-bound transfer",
"Control signature/blocks",
"Digitalize transfer",
"SP Accept transfer",
Working Environment model
"Organisational structure bank",
Document model
2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 139

Part III

"Documents (transfer)"
and User Case Diagram
"Use cases (bank)".
These models show the voucher-bound transfer in the bank and its interrelations.

Definition of an application model:

If you want to simulate models of the file "example-bank.adl", you have to define an application
model before execution of "Capacity analysis" or "Workload analysis".
The application model consists of the Business Process Model
"Voucher-bound transfer",
as well as a Working Environment model
"Organizational structure bank".

9.5

Models of the file "Example - Public Sector.adl"

The ADL file "example-bank.adl" consists of

Company map
"Construction approval",
Business Process Models
"BP Construction Approval Application",
"SP Establishment of a new customer",
"SP Sending of documents",
"SP Treatment of application",
Working Environment model
"Organisational structure (Construction office)"
and the Document model
"Document (Construction approval)".
Those models illustrate the flow of creation of construction approval. This is displayed for the
public sector and its interrelations.

Definition of application model:

If you want to simulate models of the file "example-bank.adl", you have to define a use case
diagram before execution of "capacity analysis" or "workload analysis".
Business Process Model
"BP Construction Approval Application",
page 140

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS users

and Working Environment model

"Organisational structure (Construction office)".

9.6

Models of the "example-health.adl"

The ADL file "example-bank.adl" consists of

Company map
"Patient administration",
Business Process Models
"BP Patient admission",
"SP Diagnosis planning",
"SP Issue first aid certificate",
"SP Patent entry",
"SP Ward reception"
and Working Environment model
"Patient administration".
Those models show the flow and its interrelations of patient administration in a hospital.

Definition of application model:

If you want to simulate models of the file "example-health.adl", you have to define an application
model before execution of "capacity analysis" or "workload analysis".
The application model consists of Business Process Model
"Patient administration",
and Working Environment model
"Patient administration".

9.7

Models of the file "example-telecomunication.adl"

The file "example-telecomunication.adl" consists of

Company map
"Application and settlement for the post-paid phones",
Business Process Models
"BP Post-paid phones",
"SP Post-paid activation",
"SP Post-paid finalisation",

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 141

Part III

Document model
"Documents (post-paid settlement)".
and the Working Environment model
"New applications".
These models show the creation and interrelations of application and settlement for the postpaid phones.

Definition of application model:

If you want to simulate models of the file "example-telecomunications.adl", you have to an define
application model before execution of "capacity analysis" or "workload analysis".
The application model consists of Business Process Model
"Post-paid settlement",
and Working Environment model
"New applications".
.

page 142

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Part IV
Information for ADONIS administrators
If you change attributes, the program call can be helpful to recover default settings. In this
situation you can use this chapter as the reference manual to compare the default settings with
your current status.
In this chapter following topics are described:
Class attributes (see chap. 1., p. 143)
Library attributes (see chap. 2., p. 214)

1.

The class attributes

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81 contains the following class attributes:

GraphRep (see chap. 1.1, p. 143)
AttrRep (see chap. 1.2, p. 193)
Model pointer (see chap. 1.3, p. 209)
Class cardinality (see chap. 1.4, p. 210)
Conversion (see chap. 1.5, p. 212)

1.1

GraphRep

The class attribute "GraphRep" is set for the following classes of the ADONIS Standard BP
Library 3.81:
Actor (see chap. 1.1.1, p. 145)
Use case (see chap. 1.1.2, p. 145)
System boundary (see chap. 1.1.3, p. 146)
Process start (see chap. 1.1.4, p. 146)
Subprocess (see chap. 1.1.5, p. 147)
Activity (see chap. 1.1.6, p. 148)
Decision (see chap. 1.1.7, p. 150)
Parallelism (see chap. 1.1.8, p. 151)
Merging (see chap. 1.1.9, p. 152)
End (see chap. 1.1.10, p. 152)
Variable (see chap. 1.1.11, p. 153)
Random generator (see chap. 1.1.12, p. 153)
Resource (see chap. 1.1.13, p. 154)
2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 143

Part IV

Process (see chap. 1.1.14, p. 155)

Performance indicator overview (see chap. 1.1.15, p. 157)
Performance indicator (see chap. 1.1.16, p. 158)
Document (see chap. 1.1.17, p. 159)
Note (see chap. 1.1.18, p. 162)
Aggregation (see chap. 1.1.19, p. 164)
Swimlane (horizontal) (see chap. 1.1.20, p. 165)
Swimlane (vertical) (see chap. 1.1.21, p. 172)
The class attribute "GraphRep" is set for the following relations of the ADONIS Standard BP
Library 3.81:
Subsequent (see chap. 1.1.29, p. 186)
Sets variable (see chap. 1.1.30, p. 187)
Sets (see chap. 1.1.31, p. 188)
Uses (see chap. 1.1.32, p. 188)
Communicates (see chap. 1.1.33, p. 188)
Contains (see chap. 1.1.34, p. 188)
Extends (see chap. 1.1.35, p. 189)
Generalisation (see chap. 1.1.36, p. 189)
Uses (use case) (see chap. 1.1.37, p. 189)
Has process (see chap. 1.1.38, p. 190)
Has subdocument (see chap. 1.1.39, p. 190)
Owns (see chap. 1.1.40, p. 190)
Has note (see chap. 1.1.41, p. 191)
The class attribute "GraphRep" is set for the following classes of the ADONIS Standard WE
Library 3.81:
Organisational unit (see chap. 1.1.22, p. 180)
Performer (see chap. 1.1.23, p. 180)
Role (see chap. 1.1.24, p. 181)
Resource (see chap. 1.1.25, p. 181)
Cost center (see chap. 1.1.26, p. 182)
Aggregation (see chap. 1.1.27, p. 183)
Note (see chap. 1.1.28, p. 184)
The class attribute "GraphRep" is set for the following relations of the ADONIS Standard WE
Library 3.81:
Is subordinated (see chap. 1.1.42, p. 191)
Has resource (see chap. 1.1.43, p. 191)
Belongs to (see chap. 1.1.44, p. 191)
page 144

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS administrators

Is manager (see chap. 1.1.45, p. 191)

Has role (see chap. 1.1.46, p. 192)
Uses resource (see chap. 1.1.47, p. 192)
Is charged to (see chap. 1.1.48, p. 192)
Is cost center manager (see chap. 1.1.49, p. 193)
Has note (see chap. 1.1.50, p. 193)

1.1.1

Class "Actor"

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

GRAPHREP
AVAL sp:\"Language\"
FILL color:white
SHADOW off
PEN w:0.02cm
ELLIPSE x:0.00cm y:-.72cm rx:0.23cm ry:0.23cm
POLYGON 15 x1:-.46cm y1:-.46cm x2:.46cm y2:-.46cm x3:.6cm y3:.2cm
x4:.47cm y4:.23cm x5:.35cm y5:-.25cm x6:.2cm y6:0cm x7:.53cm y7:.805cm
x8:.3cm y8:.805cm x9:0cm y9:.23cm x10:-.3cm y10:.805cm x11:-.53cm
y11:.805cm x12:-.2cm y12:0cm x13:-.35cm y13:-.25cm x14:-.47cm y14:.23cm
x15:-.6cm y15:.2cm
IF (sp = \"English\")
ATTR \"Name\" x:c:0.0cm y:.9cm w:c h:t
ELSE
ATTR \"Bezeichnung\" x:c:0.0cm y:.9cm w:c h:t
ENDIF
AVAL oF:\"Open questions\"
IF (
LEN(replall(replall((oF),\" \",\"\"),\"
\",\"\"))>0
)
FONT \"Helvetica\" h:10.0pt bold color:red
TEXT \"?\" x:.45cm y:-1.2cm
ENDIF

1.1.2

Class "Use case"

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

GRAPHREP
AVAL sp:\"Language\"
PEN w:0.02cm
SHADOW off
FILL color:white
ELLIPSE x:0.00cm y:0.00cm rx:2.00cm ry:1.00cm
IF (sp = \"English\")
ATTR \"Name\" x:0.0cm y:0.0cm w:c:3.5cm h:c
ELSE
ATTR \"Bezeichnung\" x:0.0cm y:0.0cm w:c:3.5cm h:c
ENDIF
AVAL v:\"Details\"
IF (LEN v)
FONT color:lightgray h:8pt

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 145

Part IV

IF (sp = \"English\")
ATTR \"Details\" x:c y:1cm format:\">> %m\" h:t w:c:3.5cm
ELSE
AVAL sub:\"Submodelname\"
TEXT (\">> \"+sub) x:c y:1cm h:t w:c:3.5cm
TEXTBOX (sub) x:c y:1cm h:t w:c:3.5cm
PEN style:null
FILL style:null
HOTSPOT \"Details\" text:(\"Klicken um zu ffnen:\\n\"
y:(texty1) w:(textw) h:("
"texth)
PEN
FILL
FILL style:null
ENDIF
ENDIF
AVAL oF:\"Open questions\"
IF (LEN (replall (replall ((oF),\" \",\"\"),\"\",\"\")) > 0)
FONT \"Arial\" h:10.0pt bold color:red
TEXT \"?\" x:1.7cm y:-0.95cm
ENDIF

1.1.3

sub)

x:(textx1)

Class "System boundary"

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

GRAPHREP layer:-2 sizing:asymmetrical
SHADOW off
FILL color:white
RECTANGLE x:-4cm y:-3cm w:8.0cm h:6.0cm
AVAL set-default:\"inside\" d:\"Representation\"
AVAL sp:\"Language\"
IF (d = \"inside\")
IF (sp = \"English\")
ATTR \"Name\" x:0cm y:-3cm w:c:8cm h:t
ELSE
ATTR \"Bezeichnung\" x:0cm y:-3cm w:c:8cm h:t
ENDIF
ELSE
IF (sp = \"English\")
ATTR \"Name\" x:0cm y:-3cm w:c:8cm h:b
ELSE
ATTR \"Bezeichnung\" x:0cm y:-3cm w:c:8cm h:b
ENDIF
ENDIF
AVAL oF:\"Open questions\"
IF (
LEN(replall(replall((oF),\" \",\"\"),\"
\",\"\"))>0
)
FONT \"Arial\" h:10.0pt bold color:red
TEXT \"?\" x:3.95cm y:-3cm w:r h:b
ENDIF

1.1.4

Class "Process start"

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

page 146

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS administrators

GRAPHREP
AVAL sp:"Language"
AVAL set-default:"@" ext:"External Documentation"
AVAL rdok:"Referenced documents"
PEN w:0.05cm
FILL color:yellow
POLYGON 3 x1:-.7cm y1:.7cm x2:.7cm y2:.7cm x3:0cm y3:-.7cm
IF (sp = "English")
ATTR "Name" y:.8cm w:c:2.8cm h:t
ELSE
ATTR "Bezeichnung" y:.8cm w:c:2.8cm h:t
ENDIF
AVAL i:"Order"
IF (i > "0")
FONT "Helvetica" h:10.0pt bold
ATTR "Order" x:0.00cm y:0.00cm w:c:1.00cm h:c
ENDIF
AVAL oF:"Open questions"
IF ( LEN(replall(replall((oF)," ",""),"
",""))>0
)
FONT "Helvetica" h:10.0pt bold color:red
TEXT "?" x:-0.55cm y:-0.50cm
ENDIF
IF ((NOT ((ext = "@") OR (search(ext,"param:\"\"",0) >=0) OR (ext = "Winword@") OR
(ext = "Excel@") OR (ext = "Powerpnt@") OR (ext = "Editor@") OR (ext = "Wordpad@")
OR (ext = "Notepad@"))) OR (rdok != ""))
FONT "Wingdings" h:18.0pt color:black
TEXT "4" x:.8cm y:-.3cm w:r h:b
ENDIF

1.1.5

Class "Subprocess"

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

GRAPHREP
AVAL sp:"Language"
AVAL col:"fontcolor"
AVAL set-default:"x" p:"Referenced subprocess"
AVAL sub:"Referenced subprocess"
AVAL anzeige:"Display name and reference"
AVAL i:"Order"
AVAL sn:"Subprocessname"
FILL color:dodgerblue
PEN w:0.05cm
POLYGON 3 x1:-.7cm y1:.7cm x2:.7cm y2:.7cm x3:0cm y3:-.7cm
SHADOW mode:off
IF (NOT LEN p)
PEN style:dot
ENDIF
LINE x1:-.4cm y1:.5cm x2:.4cm y2:.5cm
LINE x1:.1cm y1:.4cm x2:.4cm y2:.5cm
LINE x1:.1cm y1:.6cm x2:.4cm y2:.5cm
FONT color:(col)
IF (sub = "")
IF (sp = "English")
ATTR "Name" y:.8cm w:c:2.8cm h:t
ELSE
ATTR "Bezeichnung" y:.8cm w:c:2.8cm h:t

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 147

Part IV

ENDIF
ELSE
IF (sp = "English")
IF (display = "yes")
ATTR "Name" y:.8cm w:c:2.8cm h:t
ATTRBOX "Name" y:.8cm w:c:2.8cm h:t
FONT "Arial" h:8pt bold
ATTR "Referenced subprocess" y:(texty2 + .1cm) w:c:2.8cm h:t format:"%m"
FONT
ELSE
ATTR "Referenced subprocess" y:.8cm w:c:2.8cm h:t format:"%m"
ENDIF
ELSE
IF (display = "yes")
ATTR "Bezeichnung" y:.8cm w:c:2.8cm h:t
ATTRBOX "Bezeichnung" y:.8cm w:c:2.8cm h:t
FONT "Arial" h:8pt bold
ATTR "Referenced subprocess" text:(sn) y:(texty2 + .1cm) w:c:2.8cm h:t
FONT
ELSE
ATTR "Referenced subprocess" text:(sn) y:.8cm w:c:2.8cm h:t
ENDIF
ENDIF
ENDIF
IF (i > "0")
FONT "Arial" h:10.0pt bold color:white
ATTR "Order" x:0.00cm y:0.00cm w:c:1.00cm h:c
ENDIF
AVAL oF:"Open questions"
IF (
LEN(replall(replall((oF)," ",""),"
",""))>0
)
FONT "Arial" h:10.0pt bold color:red
TEXT "?" x:0.55cm y:-0.50cm
ENDIF

1.1.6

Class "Activity"

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

GRAPHREP
AVAL sp:"Language"
AVAL rr:"Verantwortliche Role"
AVAL set-default:"@" ext:"External documentation"
AVAL rdok:"Referenced documents"
AVAL indok:"Input"
AVAL outdok:"Output"
AVAL col:"fontcolor"
PEN w:0.05cm
FILL color:dodgerblue
RECTANGLE x:-1.4cm y:-.7cm w:2.8cm h:1.4cm
FONT color:(col)
IF (sp = "English")
ATTR "Name" y:.8cm w:c:2.8cm h:t
ELSE
ATTR "Bezeichnung" y:.8cm w:c:2.8cm h:t
ENDIF
AVAL k:"Classification"

page 148

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS administrators

IF (search(k,"manual",0) >=0 AND LEN(k)=8)

FONT "Wingdings" h:20pt color:whitesmoke
TEXT "?" x:-1.35cm y:-.80cm
ELSIF (search(k,"automatic",0) >=0 AND LEN(k)=11)
FONT "Wingdings" h:18pt color:whitesmoke
TEXT ":" x:-1.35cm y:-.65cm
ELSIF (search(k,"planning",0) >=0 AND LEN(k)=10)
FONT "Webdings" h:18pt color:whitesmoke
TEXT "?" x:-1.35cm y:-.65cm
ELSIF (search(k,"checking",0) >=0 AND LEN(k)=10)
FONT "Webdings" h:20pt color:whitesmoke
TEXT "N" x:-1.35cm y:-.70cm
ELSIF (search(k,"administrating",0) >=0 AND LEN(k)=16)
FONT "Wingdings" h:16pt color:whitesmoke
TEXT "1" x:-1.35cm y:-.65cm
ELSIF (search(k,"executing",0) >=0 AND LEN(k)=11)
FONT "Webdings" h:18pt color:whitesmoke
TEXT "@" x:-1.35cm y:-.65cm
ELSIF (search(k,"value adding",0) >=0 AND LEN(k)=14)
FONT "Arial" h:14pt color:whitesmoke
TEXT "$$" x:-1.30cm y:-.65cm
ELSIF (search(k,"communicating",0) >=0 AND LEN(k)=15)
FONT "Wingdings" h:18pt color:whitesmoke
TEXT "(" x:-1.35cm y:-.65cm
ELSIF (search(k,"external",0) >=0 AND LEN(k)=10)
FONT "Webdings" h:16pt color:whitesmoke
TEXT "" x:-1.30cm y:-.65cm
ELSIF (search(k,"manual",0) >=0 AND search(k,"automatic",0) >=0)
FONT "Webdings" h:18pt color:whitesmoke
TEXT "+" x:-1.35cm y:-.72cm
FONT "Arial" h:7pt color:whitesmoke
TEXT "Error" x:-1.35cm y:-.26cm
ENDIF
AVAL oF:"Open questions"
IF ( LEN(replall(replall((oF)," ",""),"
",""))>0 )
FONT "Arial" h:10.0pt bold color:red
TEXT "?" x:1.20cm y:-1.10cm
IF ((NOT ((ext = "@") OR (search(ext,"param:\"\"",0) >=0) OR (ext = "Winword@")
OR (ext = "Excel@") OR (ext = "Powerpnt@") OR (ext = "Editor@") OR (ext =
"Wordpad@") OR (ext = "Notepad@"))) OR ((rdok != "") OR (indok != "") OR (outdok !=
"")))
FONT "Wingdings" h:18.0pt color:(col)
TEXT "4" x:1.1cm y:-.62cm w:r h:b
ENDIF
ELSE
IF ((NOT ((ext = "@") OR (search(ext,"param:\"\"",0) >=0) OR (ext = "Winword@") OR
(ext = "Excel@") OR (ext = "Powerpnt@") OR (ext = "Editor@") OR (ext = "Wordpad@")
OR (ext = "Notepad@"))) OR ((rdok != "") OR (indok != "") OR (outdok != "")))
FONT "Wingdings" h:18.0pt color:(col)
TEXT "4" x:1.5cm y:-.62cm w:r h:b
ENDIF
ENDIF
SET order_ypos:0cm
AVAL set-default:"" vRv:"Display responsible role"
AVAL set-default:"" vR:"Responsible role"
AVAL set-default:"" eD:"Done by"
IF (vRv = "Yes")
IF (eD = "")
IF (vR != "")
FILL color:lightskyblue

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 149

Part IV

RECTANGLE x:-1.4cm y:0.0cm w:2.8cm h:.7cm

FONT "Arial" h:8pt
IF (sp = "English")
ATTR "Responsible role" line-break:rigorous y:0.35cm w:c:2.8cm h:c:.7cm
format:"%o"
ELSE
ATTR "Responsible role" text:(rr) line-break:rigorous y:0.35cm w:c:2.8cm
h:c:.7cm format:"%o"
ENDIF
PEN w:.3cm color:black
POINT x:-1.65cm y:.35cm
PEN w:.25cm color:lightskyblue
POINT x:-1.65cm y:.35cm
PEN w:0.05cm
SHADOW off
FONT "Arial" h:6pt
TEXT "R" x:-1.70cm y:.25cm
SHADOW on
PEN
SET order_ypos:-0.25cm
PEN style:null
FILL style:null
HOTSPOT "Responsible role" x:-1.8cm y:.2cm w:.3cm h:.3cm
PEN
FILL
ENDIF
ELSE
FILL color:lightskyblue
RECTANGLE x:-1.4cm y:0.0cm w:2.8cm h:.7cm
FONT "Arial" h:8pt
ATTR "Done by" line-break:rigorous y:0.35cm w:c:2.8cm h:c:.7cm
SET order_ypos:-0.25cm
ENDIF
ELSE
ENDIF
AVAL i:"Order"
IF (i > "0")
FONT "Arial" h:10.0pt bold color:white
ATTR "Order" w:c:1cm h:c y:(order_ypos)
ENDIF

1.1.7

Class "Decision"

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

GGRAPHREP
AVAL sp:\"Language\"
AVAL set-default:\"1\" su:\"Sum\"
AVAL col:\"fontcolor\"
PEN w:0.05cm
FILL color:yellow
POLYGON 4 x1:-1cm y2:.7cm x3:1cm y4:-.7cm
FONT color:(col)
IF (sp = \"English\")
ATTR \"Name\" y:.8cm w:c:2.8cm h:t
ELSE
ATTR \"Bezeichnung\" y:.8cm w:c:2.8cm h:t
ENDIF

page 150

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS administrators

AVAL i:\"Order\"
IF (i > \"0\")
FONT \"Arial\" h:10.0pt bold color:black
ATTR \"Order\" w:c:1.00cm h:c
ENDIF
AVAL oF:\"Open questions\"
IF (LEN(replall(replall((oF),\" \",\"\"),\"\",\"\"))>0)
FONT \"Arial\" h:10.0pt bold color:red
TEXT \"?\" x:0.60cm y:-.60cm h:c
ENDIF
IF (VAL (replall (su, \",\", \".\")) 1)
FONT \"Arial\" h:10.0pt bold color:red
TEXT \"!\" x:1.0cm y:-.60cm h:c
ENDIF"

1.1.8

Class "Parallelity"

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.8:

GRAPHREP
AVAL sp:"Language"
AVAL mr:"Modeling direction"
AVAL d:"Representation"
AVAL i:"Order"
AVAL col:"fontcolor"
PEN w:0.05cm
FILL color:yellow
IF (mr = "from left to right")
POLYGON 3 x1:-.4cm x2:.3cm y2:.7cm x3:.3cm y3:-.7cm
ELSE
POLYGON 3 x1:0cm y1:-.35cm x2:-.7cm y2:.35cm x3:.7cm y3:.35cm
ENDIF
IF (d = "with name")
FONT color:(col)
IF (mr = "from left to right")
IF (sp = "English")
ATTR "Name" y:.8cm w:c:1.00cm h:t
ELSE
ATTR "Bezeichnung" y:.8cm w:c:1.00cm h:t
ENDIF
ELSE
IF (sp = "English")
ATTR "Name" y:.45cm w:c:1.00cm h:t
ELSE
ATTR "Bezeichnung" y:.45cm w:c:1.00cm h:t
ENDIF
ENDIF
ENDIF
IF (i > "0")
FONT "Arial" h:10.0pt bold color:(col)
IF (mr = "from left to right")
ATTR "Order" w:c:1.00cm h:c
ELSE
ATTR "Order" y:.05cm w:c:1.00cm h:c
ENDIF
ENDIF

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 151

Part IV

1.1.9

Class "Merging"

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

GRAPHREP
AVAL sp:"Language"
AVAL mr:"Modeling direction"
AVAL d:"Representation"
AVAL i:"Order"
AVAL col:"fontcolor"
PEN w:0.05cm
FILL color:yellow
IF (mr = "from left to right")
POLYGON 3 x1:.4cm y1:0cm x2:-.3cm y2:.7cm x3:-.3cm y3:-.7cm
ELSE
POLYGON 3 x1:-.7cm y1:-.35cm x2:0cm y2:.35cm x3:.7cm y3:-.35cm
ENDIF
IF (d = "with name")
FONT color:(col)
IF (mr = "from left to right")
IF (sp = "English")
ATTR "Name" y:.8cm w:c:1.00cm h:t
ELSE
ATTR "Bezeichnung" y:.8cm w:c:1.00cm h:t
ENDIF
ELSE
IF (sp = "English")
ATTR "Name" y:.45cm w:c:1.00cm h:t
ELSE
ATTR "Bezeichnung" y:.45cm w:c:1.00cm h:t
ENDIF
ENDIF
ENDIF
IF (i > "0")
FONT "Arial" h:10.0pt bold color:(col)
IF (mr = "from left to right")
ATTR "Order" x:0.00cm y:0.00cm w:c:1.00cm h:c
ELSE
ATTR "Order" y:-.045m w:c:1.00cm h:c
ENDIF
ENDIF
\

1.1.10

Class "End"

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

GRAPHREP
AVAL sp:"Language"
AVAL t:"Type"
AVAL i:"Order"
AVAL d:"Representation"
AVAL col:"fontcolor"
PEN w:0.05cm
FILL color:yellow
ELLIPSE rx:.7cm ry:.7cm
IF (t="global")
FILL style:null
ELLIPSE rx:.6cm ry:.6cm

page 152

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS administrators

ENDIF
IF (d = "with name")
FONT color:(col)
IF (sp = "English")
ATTR "Name" y:.8cm w:c:1.00cm h:t
ELSE
ATTR "Bezeichnung" y:.8cm w:c:1.00cm h:t
ENDIF
ENDIF
IF (i > "0")
FONT "Arial" h:10.0pt bold color:black
ATTR "Order" x:0.00cm y:0.00cm w:c:1.00cm h:c
ENDIF

1.1.11

Class "Variable"

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

GRAPHREP
FILL color:mediumspringgreen
ELLIPSE rx:0.70cm ry:0.70cm
AVAL sp:"Language"
AVAL t:"Variable scope"
AVAL col:"fontcolor"
FONT color:(col)
IF (sp = "English")
ATTR "Name" y:0.8cm w:c:1.4cm h:t
ELSE
ATTR "Bezeichnung" y:0.8cm w:c:1.4cm h:t
ENDIF
IF (t = "global")
ELLIPSE rx:0.6cm ry:0.6cm
ENDIF
FONT "Arial" h:32pt color:black
TEXT "V" y:0.13cm w:c h:c

1.1.12

Class "Random generator"

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

GRAPHREP
AVAL set-default:"Normal" w:"Value"
AVAL set-default:"No" m:"Manual random generator"
AVAL col:"fontcolor"
FILL color:mediumspringgreen
ELLIPSE rx:.7cm ry:.7cm
PEN w:0.025cm
SHADOW mode:off
FILL color:mediumseagreen
AVAL sp:"Language"
FONT color:(col)
IF (sp = "English")
ATTR "Value" y:.8cm w:c:2.8cm h:t
ELSE
ATTR "Info zum Wert der Variablenbelegung" y:.8cm w:c:2.8cm h:t
ENDIF
IF (search (w, "Discrete", 0) >= 0)

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 153

Part IV

POLYLINE 7 x1:-.3cm y1:.3cm x2:-.3cm y2:.1cm x3:-.1cm y3:.1cm x4:-.1cm y4:-.2cm

x5:.2cm y5:-.2cm x6:.2cm y6:-.3cm x7:.5cm y7:-.3cm
LINE x1:-.5cm y1:.3cm x2:.5cm y2:.3cm
LINE x1:0cm y1:-.4cm x2:0cm y2:.4cm
ELSIF (search (w, "Exponential", 0) >= 0)
COMPOUND 2
CURVE "t" fx:(t) fy:(-.6*exp(-(3.8*(t+.4)))+.3) from:-.4 to:.5
LINE x1:.5cm y1:.3cm x2:-.4cm y2:.3cm
LINE x1:-.5cm y1:.3cm x2:-.4cm y2:.3cm
LINE x1:-.4cm y1:.4cm x2:-.4cm y2:-.4cm
ELSIF (search (w, "Uniform",0) >= 0 )
RECTANGLE x:-.3cm y:-.1cm w:.7cm h:.4cm
LINE x1:-.5cm y1:.3cm x2:.5cm y2:.3cm
LINE x1:0cm y1:-.4cm x2:0cm y2:.4cm
ELSIF (search (w, "Normal", 0) >= 0)
COMPOUND 1
CURVE "t" fx:(t) fy:(-.7*exp(-14*t*t)+.2) from:-.6 to:.6
LINE x1:0cm y1:-.6cm x2:0cm y2:.3cm
ELSE
FONT "Arial" h:16pt
TEXT "=" x:-0.50cm y:0.03cm w:l h:c
FONT "Arial" h:16pt italic
TEXT "f" x:-0.15cm y:0.03cm w:l h:c
FONT "Arial" h:16pt
TEXT "( )" x:0.09cm y:0.03cm w:l h:c
ENDIF
IF (m = "Yes")
FONT "Wingdings" h:16pt color:crimson
TEXT "I" y:-.9cm x:-.9cm
ENDIF

1.1.13

Class "Resource"

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

GRAPHREP
AVAL sp:"Language"
AVAL set-default:"EDP system" rt:"Type of resource"
AVAL col:"fontcolor"
IF (rt = "EDP system")
FILL color:lightgray
RECTANGLE x:-.6cm y:-.7cm w:1.2cm h:1.05cm
RECTANGLE x:-.7cm y:.35cm w:1.4cm h:.35cm
SHADOW mode:off
FILL color:lightskyblue
RECTANGLE x:-.45cm y:-.55cm w:.9cm h:.75cm
FILL color:navy
RECTANGLE x:-.3cm y:-.45cm w:.4cm h:.05cm
FILL color:white
RECTANGLE x:-.3cm y:-.4cm w:.4cm h:.2cm
FILL color:navy
RECTANGLE x:-.1cm y:-.15cm w: .4cm h:.05cm
FILL color:white
RECTANGLE x:-.1cm y:-.1cm w: .4cm h:.2cm
FILL color:lightgreen
RECTANGLE x:-.57cm y:.48cm w:.09cm h:.09cm
FILL color:black
RECTANGLE x:.15cm y:.48cm w:.45cm h:.03cm
ELSIF (rt = "Communication system")

page 154

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS administrators

FILL color:slategray
RECTANGLE x:-.275cm y:-.7cm w:.55cm h:1.4cm
FILL color:black
RECTANGLE x:.14cm y:-1cm w:.05cm h:.3cm
SHADOW off
FILL color:palegreen
RECTANGLE x:-.225cm y:-.55cm w:.45cm h:.3cm
FILL color:black
RECTANGLE x:-.20cm y:-.15cm w:.075cm h:.05cm
RECTANGLE x:-.05cm y:-.15cm w:.075cm h:.05cm
RECTANGLE x:0.10cm y:-.15cm w:.075cm h:.05cm
RECTANGLE x:-.20cm y:-.03cm w:.075cm h:.05cm
RECTANGLE x:-.05cm y:-.03cm w:.075cm h:.05cm
RECTANGLE x:0.10cm y:-.03cm w:.075cm h:.05cm
RECTANGLE x:-.20cm y:0.09cm w:.075cm h:.05cm
RECTANGLE x:-.05cm y:0.09cm w:.075cm h:.05cm
RECTANGLE x:0.10cm y:0.09cm w:.075cm h:.05cm
RECTANGLE x:-.20cm y:0.21cm w:.075cm h:.05cm
RECTANGLE x:-.05cm y:0.21cm w:.075cm h:.05cm
RECTANGLE x:0.10cm y:0.21cm w:.075cm h:.05cm
RECTANGLE x:-.05cm y:.55cm w:.1cm h:.03cm
RECTANGLE x:-.05cm y:-.65cm w:.1cm h:.03cm
ELSE
FILL color:whitesmoke
POLYGON 3 x1:-.7cm y1:.6cm x2:-1cm y2:-.2cm x3:.5cm y3:-.4cm
POLYGON 4 x1:-.9cm y1:-.4cm x2:.7cm y2: -.6cm x3:.9cm y3:.4cm x4:-.7cm y4:.6cm
FILL color:lightsteelblue
POLYGON 3 x1:-.72cm y1:.15cm x2:.72cm y2:.15cm y3:-.6cm
FILL color:whitesmoke
POLYGON 3 x1:-.35cm x2:.35cm y3:-.35cm
FILL color:forestgreen
PEN 0.025cm
POLYGON 4 x1:-.5cm y1:.4cm x2:.4cm y2:-.5cm x3:.5cm y3:-.4cm x4:-.4cm y4:.5cm
FILL color:mistyrose
POLYGON 3 x1:-.5cm y1:.4cm x2:-.4cm y2:.5cm x3:-.65cm y3:.65cm
FILL color:lightgray
POLYGON 4 x1:.4cm y1:-.5cm x2:.5cm y2:-.4cm x3:.55cm y3:-.45cm x4:.45cm y4:-.55cm
FILL color:orangered
POLYGON 4 x1:.55cm y1:-.45cm x2:.45cm y2:-.55cm x3:.525cm y3:-.625cm x4:.625cm
y4:-.525cm
ENDIF
FONT color:(col)
IF (sp = "English")
ATTR "Name" y:.8cm w:c:2.8cm h:t
ELSE
ATTR "Bezeichnung" y:.8cm w:c:2.8cm h:t
ENDIF

1.1.14

Class "Process"

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

GRAPHREP
PEN w:0.03cm
FILL color:royalblue
POLYGON 6 x1:-1.50cm y1:-.7cm x2:1.50cm y2:-.7cm x3:1.75cm x4:1.50cm y4:.7cm x5:1.50cm y5:.7cm x6:-1.30cm
AVAL sp:"Language"
AVAL rp:"Referenced process"

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 155

Part IV

AVAL anzeige:"Display name and reference"

AVAL i:"Order"
AVAL col:"fontcolor"
AVAL sn:"Subprocessname"
FONT color:(col)
IF (search(rp,"(Business process model)",0) >= 0)
FILL color:dodgerblue
RECTANGLE x:-0.27cm y:-.25cm w:1cm h:.5cm
FILL color:yellow
POLYGON 3 x1:-1.1cm y1:.25cm x2:-.85cm y2:-.25cm
x3:-.6cm y3:.25cm
ELLIPSE x:1.3cm rx:.25cm ry:.25cm
LINE x1:.73cm x2:1.05cm
LINE x1:.95cm y1:.06cm x2:1.05cm
LINE x1:.95cm y1:-.06cm x2:1.05cm
LINE x1:-.72cm x2:-.27cm
LINE x1:-.37cm y1:.06cm x2:-.27cm
LINE x1:-.37cm y1:-.06cm x2:-.27cm
ELSIF (search(rp,"(Company map)",0) >= 0)
FILL color:dodgerblue
POLYGON 6 x1:-1cm y1:-.25cm x2:-.2cm y2:-.25cm x3:-.1cm x4:-.2cm y4:.25cm x5:-1cm
y5:.25cm x6:-.9cm
POLYGON 6 x1:1.35cm y1:-.25cm x2:.65cm y2:-.25cm
x3:.75cm x4:.65cm y4:.25cm
x5:1.35cm y5:.25cm x6:1.45cm
LINE x2:.65cm
LINE x1:.55cm y1:.06cm x2:.65cm
LINE x1:.55cm y1:-.06cm x2:.65cm
LINE y1:-.06cm y2:.06cm
ENDIF
FONT color:(col)
IF (rp = "")
IF (sp = "English")
ATTR "Name" y:.8cm w:c:3.00cm h:t
ELSE
ATTR "Bezeichnung" y:.8cm w:c:3.00cm h:t
ENDIF
ELSE
IF (sp = "English")
IF (anzeige = "yes")
ATTR "Name" y:.8cm w:c:3.00cm h:t
ATTRBOX "Name" y:.8cm w:c:3.00cm h:t
FONT "Arial" h:8pt bold
ATTR "Referenced process" y:(texty2 + .1cm) w:c:3.00cm h:t format:"%m"
FONT
ELSE
ATTR "Referenced process" y:.8cm w:c:3.00cm h:t format:"%m"
ENDIF
ELSE
IF (anzeige = "yes")
ATTR "Bezeichnung" y:.8cm w:c:3.00cm h:t
ATTRBOX "Bezeichnung" y:.8cm w:c:3.00cm h:t
FONT "Arial" h:8pt bold
TEXT (sn) y:(texty2 + .1cm) w:c:3.00cm h:t line-break:words
TEXTBOX (sn) y:(texty2 + .1cm) w:c:3.00cm h:t line-break:words
PEN style:null
FILL style:null
HOTSPOT "Referenced process" text:("Klicken um zu ffnen:\n" + sn) x:(textx1)
y:(texty1) w:(textw) h:(texth)
PEN
FILL
FONT
ELSE

page 156

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS administrators

TEXT (sn) y:.8cm w:c:3.00cm h:t line-break:words

TEXTBOX (sn) y:.8cm w:c:3.00cm h:t line-break:words
PEN style:null
FILL style:null
HOTSPOT "Referenced process" text:("Klicken um
x:(textx1) y:(texty1) w:(textw) h:(texth)
PEN
FILL
ENDIF
ENDIF
ENDIF
IF (i > "0")
FONT "Arial" h:10.0pt color:white bold
ATTR "Order" x:1.4cm y:.7cm w:r:1cm h:b
ENDIF
AVAL oF:"Open questions"
IF ( LEN(replall(replall((oF)," ",""),"
",""))>0 )
FONT "Arial" h:10.0pt bold color:red
TEXT "?" x:1.35cm y:-1.10cm
ENDIF

1.1.15

zu

ffnen:\n"

sn)

Class "Performance indicator overview"

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

GRAPHREP
AVAL funkt:"calc_probe_overview_visualization"
AVAL sp:"Language"
AVAL score:"probe_overview_score"
AVAL state:"probe_overview_status"
PEN w:0.05cm
FILL color:royalblue
POLYGON 3 x1:.2cm y1:0cm x2:-.3cm y2:.3cm x3:-.3cm y3:-.3cm
IF (funkt = "true")
FONT color:black h:10pt
ATTRBOX "probe_overview_ref"
x:0.7cm
y:0cm
w:l
h:t
IF (sp = "English")
ATTR "probe_overview_ref"
x:(textx1) y:0cm w:(textw) h:c:(texth)
ELSE
ATTR "probe_overview_ref_deu" x:(textx1) y:0cm w:(textw) h:c:(texth)
ENDIF
SET y:(texty1)
ATTRBOX "probe_overview_status" x:(textx2 + 0.3cm) y:(texty2) w:l h:t
IF (copy (state,0,12) "[acoexpar-04")
ATTR "probe_overview_status" x:(textx1) y:0cm w:(textw) h:c:(texth)
ELSE
TEXT "[acoexpar-04] There are broken references in the performance indicator
overview." x:(textx1) y:0cm w:(textw) h:c:(texth)
ENDIF
ATTRBOX "probe_overview_score" x:(textx2 + 0.3cm) y:(texty2) w:l h:t
IF (copy (score,0,12) "[acoexpar-04")
ATTR "probe_overview_score"
x:(textx1) y:0cm w:(textw) h:c:(texth)
ENDIF
ENDIF

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 157

Part IV

1.1.16

Class "Performance indicator"

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

GRAPHREP
AVAL grad:"Font size"
AVAL typ:"Font style"
AVAL istwert:"Entry_IST-Wert"
AVAL me:"Unit"
AVAL strState:"Entry_Status"
AVAL score:"Scorevalue"
AVAL sp:"Language"
AVAL k:"Periodicity"
AVAL set-default:("0") vist:"Display current value"
AVAL set-default:("0") vs:"Display periodicity"
AVAL set-default:("0") vscore:"Display score"
AVAL set-default:("0") visstat:"Display status"
IF (typ = "Standard")
FONT h:(PT grad)
ELSIF (typ = "Italic")
FONT h:(PT grad) italic
ELSIF (typ = "Bold")
FONT h:(PT grad) bold
ELSIF (typ = "Underlined")
FONT h:(PT grad) underline
ELSIF (typ = "Bold italic")
FONT h:(PT grad) bold italic
ELSIF (typ = "Bold underlined")
FONT h:(PT grad) bold underline
ENDIF
IF ( VAL visstat 1 )
SET strState:""
ENDIF
IF (sp = "English")
ATTR "Name" x:0cm y:t:.9cm w:c:2cm h:t
ATTRBOX "Name" x:0cm y:t:.9cm w:c:2cm h:t
ELSE
ATTR "Bezeichnung" x:0cm y:t:.9cm w:c:2cm h:t
ATTRBOX "Bezeichnung" x:0cm y:t:.9cm w:c:2cm h:t
ENDIF
FILL color:dodgerblue
ELLIPSE rx:.7cm ry:.7cm
SHADOW off
FILL color:white
ELLIPSE rx:.5cm ry:.5cm
FILL color:yellow
ELLIPSE rx:.3cm ry:.3cm
SHADOW off
IF (VAL vist = 1)
FONT h:10pt
AVAL istwert:"Entry_IST-Wert"
ATTRBOX "Entry_IST-Wert" text:(istwert) x:(-0.05cm) y:(texty2+0.1cm) w:c h:t
ATTR "Entry_IST-Wert" text:(istwert) x:(textx1) y:(texty1) w:l h:t
ENDIF
IF (me "")
ATTRBOX "Unit" x:(-.15cm) y:(texty2+0.1cm) w:c h:t
ATTR "Unit" text:("["+me+"]") x:(textx1) y:(texty1) w:l h:t
ENDIF
IF (VAL vs = 1)
FONT h:10pt
IF (k = "Year")
page 158

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS administrators

TEXT "Y"
x:-0.75cm y:-1.1cm
ELSIF (k = "Half-year")
TEXT "HY"
x:-0.75cm y:-1.1cm
ELSIF (k = "Quarter")
TEXT "Q"
x:-0.75cm y:-1.1cm
ELSIF (k = "Month")
TEXT "M"
x:-0.75cm y:-1.1cm
ELSIF (k = "Week")
TEXT "W"
x:-0.75cm y:-1.1cm
ELSIF (k = "Day")
TEXT "D"
x:-0.75cm y:-1.1cm
ENDIF
ENDIF
IF (VAL vscore =1)
FONT h:10pt
TEXT (score) x:0.55cm y:-1.1cm
ENDIF
IF ( strState "" )
IF ( strState = "Red" )
FILL color:red
ELSIF ( strState = "Green" )
FILL color:lime
ELSIF ( strState = "Yellow" )
FILL color:yellow
ELSE
FILL color:lightgray
ENDIF
ELLIPSE x:0.85cm y:.55cm rx:0.15cm ry:0.15cm
ENDIF

1.1.17

Class "Document"

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

GRAPHREP
FILL color:white
COMPOUND 2
LINE x1:1cm y1:-.5cm x2:-1cm y2:-.5cm
CURVE "t" f:(t) g:(-.2*sin(3.14*(t+2))+1.2) from:-1 to:1
AVAL set-default:"English" sp:"Language"
AVAL set-default:"" a:"Referenced document"
AVAL col:"fontcolor"
SET s:(search(a,"@",0) + 1)
SET e:(LEN a)
IF (search(a,"Winword",0) >= 0)
PEN w:0.06cm
FILL r:0 g:255 b:255
POLYGON 21
x1:-.17cm y1:.23cm
x2:-.17cm y2:.26cm
x3:-.14cm y3:.29cm
x4:-.14cm y4:.59cm
x5:-.05cm y5:.59cm

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 159

Part IV

x6:.04cm y6:.41cm
x7:.04cm y7:.59cm
x8:.14cm y8:.59cm
x9:.3cm y9:.29cm
x10:.34cm y10:.26cm
x11:.34cm y11:.23cm
x12:.18cm y12:.23cm
x13:.1cm y13:.26cm
x14:.22cm y14:.29cm
x15:.13cm y15:.47cm
x16:.13cm y16:.23cm
x17:.07cm y17:.23cm
x18:-.05cm y18:.47cm
x19:-.05cm y19:.29cm
x20:-.02cm y20:.26cm
x21:-.02cm y21:.23cm
IF (search(a,".doc",0) >=0 OR search(a,".DOC",0) >=0 OR search(a,".rtf",0) >=0 OR
search(a,".RTF",0) >=0 OR search(a,".txt",0) >=0 OR search(a,".TXT",0) >=0)
PEN style:solid
FILL color:white
POLYGON 5
x1:.4cm y1:.23cm
x2:.4cm y2:.53cm
x3:.62cm y3:.53cm
x4:.62cm y4:.32cm
x5:.5cm y5:.23cm
POLYGON 3
x1:.62cm y1:.32cm
x2:.5cm y2:.23cm
x3:.5cm y3:.32cm
LINE x1:.45cm y1:.36cm x2:.55cm y2:.36cm
LINE x1:.45cm y1:.42cm x2:.55cm y2:.42cm
LINE x1:.45cm y1:.48cm x2:.55cm y2:.48cm
ENDIF
ELSIF (search(a,"Powerpnt",0) >= 0)
PEN w:.06cm r:132 g:132 b:132
FILL r:132 g:132 b:132
RECTANGLE x:-.06cm y:.27cm w:.41cm h:.33cm
PEN w:.06cm color:black
FILL color:white
RECTANGLE x:-.17cm y:.21cm w:.45cm h:.36cm
PEN w:.06cm r:132 g:132 b:132
POLYLINE 3
x1:-.17cm y1:.57cm
x2:-.17cm y2:.21cm
x3:.28cm y3:.21cm
PEN w:.05cm r:132 g:132 b:132
FILL r:0 g:255 b:255
RECTANGLE x:-.11cm y:.27cm w:.33cm h:.24cm
PEN style:null
FILL color:red
PIE x:.05cm y:.39cm rx:0.1cm ry:0.07cm x1:.05cm y1:.32cm x2:.15cm y2:.39cm
IF (search(a,".ppt",0) >=0 OR search(a,".PPT",0) >=0)
PEN style:solid
FILL color:white
POLYGON 5
x1:.4cm y1:.23cm
x2:.4cm y2:.53cm
x3:.62cm y3:.53cm
x4:.62cm y4:.32cm
x5:.5cm y5:.23cm

page 160

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS administrators

POLYGON 3
x1:.62cm y1:.32cm
x2:.5cm y2:.23cm
x3:.5cm y3:.32cm
LINE x1:.45cm y1:.36cm x2:.55cm y2:.36cm
LINE x1:.45cm y1:.42cm x2:.55cm y2:.42cm
LINE x1:.45cm y1:.48cm x2:.55cm y2:.48cm
ENDIF
ELSIF (search(a,"Excel",0) >= 0)
PEN w:0.06cm
FILL r:0 g:132 b:132
POLYGON 9
x1:.16cm y1:.23cm
x2:-.17cm y2:.56cm
x3:-.17cm y3:.59cm
x4:.19cm y4:.59cm
x5:.31cm y5:.44cm
x6:.13cm y6:.44cm
x7:.13cm y7:.44cm
x8:.31cm y8:.26cm
x9:.31cm y9:.23cm
FILL r:0 g:255 b:255
POLYGON 6
x1:-.17cm y1:.23cm
x2:-.17cm y2:.26cm
x3:.16cm y3:.62cm
x4:.34cm y4:.62cm
x5:.34cm y5:.59cm
x6:-.01cm y6:.23cm
IF (search(a,".xl",0) >= 0 OR search(a,".XL",0) >=0)
PEN style:solid
FILL color:white
POLYGON 5
x1:.4cm y1:.23cm
x2:.4cm y2:.53cm
x3:.62cm y3:.53cm
x4:.62cm y4:.32cm
x5:.5cm y5:.23cm
POLYGON 3
x1:.62cm y1:.32cm
x2:.5cm y2:.23cm
x3:.5cm y3:.32cm
LINE x1:.45cm y1:.36cm x2:.55cm y2:.36cm
LINE x1:.45cm y1:.42cm x2:.55cm y2:.42cm
LINE x1:.45cm y1:.48cm x2:.55cm y2:.48cm
ENDIF
ENDIF
IF (a = "@")
FONT color:(col)
IF (sp = "English")
ATTR "Name" y:1.6cm w:c:2.8cm h:t
ELSE
ATTR "Bezeichnung" y:1.6cm w:c:2.8cm h:t
ENDIF
ELSE
IF (sp = "English")
ATTR "Name" y:1.6cm w:c:2.8cm h:t
ATTRBOX "Name" y:1.6cm w:c:2.8cm h:t
FONT "Arial" h:8pt bold color:(col)
ATTR "Referenced document" text:(copy (a, s, e)) y:(texty2 + .1cm) w:c:2.8cm
h:t

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 161

Part IV

ELSE
ATTR "Bezeichnung" y:1.6cm w:c:2.8cm h:t
ATTRBOX "Bezeichnung" y:1.6cm w:c:2.8cm h:t
FONT "Arial" h:8pt bold color:(col)
ATTR "Referenced document" text:(copy (a, s, e)) y:(texty2 + .1cm) w:c:2.8cm
h:t
ENDIF
ENDIF

1.1.18

Class "Note"

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

GRAPHREP layer:0 sizing:asymmetrical
AVAL set-default:"" a:"External graphic"
AVAL sp:"Language"
AVAL set-default:"No" autoB:"Calculate size of graphic automatically"
AVAL set-default:"lemonchiffon" f:"Color"
SET found:(search(a,"\"",0))
IF (found >= 0)
IF (found = (LEN a - 1))
SET s:(search(a,"@",0) + 1)
SET e:((LEN a) - 1)
ELSE
SET s:((found) + 1)
SET foundend:(search(a,"\"",s))
IF (foundend >= 0)
SET e:((LEN a) - 1)
ELSE
SET e:(LEN a)
ENDIF
ENDIF
ELSE
SET e:(LEN a)
SET s:(search(a,"@",0) + 1)
ENDIF
SET grfk:(copy (a, s, e - s))
SET s:((LEN grfk) - 4)
SET e:((LEN grfk))
SET ext:(copy (grfk, s, e))
# -- build obj -# --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --IF (autoB = "No")
IF ((ext = ".bmp") OR (ext = ".BMP") OR (ext = ".bmP") OR (ext = ".bMp") OR (ext
= ".Bmp") OR (ext = ".bMP") OR (ext = ".BMp") OR (ext = ".BmP"))
BITMAP (grfk) w:1cm h:1cm
ELSE
PEN color:darkgray outline
FILL color:(rgbval (f))
RECTANGLE w:4.5cm h:4.5cm
TABLE w:4.5cm h:4.5cm cols:3 rows:3
w1:.15cm w2:100% w3:.15cm
h1:.15cm h2:100% h3:.15cm
STRETCH off
AVAL grad:"Font size"
AVAL typ:"Font style"
IF (typ = "Standard")
FONT h:(PT grad)
ELSIF (typ = "Italic")

page 162

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS administrators

FONT h:(PT grad) italic

ELSIF (typ = "Bold")
FONT h:(PT grad) bold
ELSIF (typ = "Underline")
FONT h:(PT grad) underline
ELSIF (typ = "Bold Italic")
FONT h:(PT grad) bold italic
ELSIF (typ = "Bold Underline")
FONT h:(PT grad) bold underline
ENDIF
IF (sp="English")
ATTR "Text" x:(tabx1) y:(taby1) w:(tabw2) h:(tabh2)
ELSE
ATTR "Notiz" x:(tabx1) y:(taby1) w:(tabw2) h:(tabh2)
ENDIF
ENDIF
# --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --ELSIF (autoB = "Yes")
SET d:4.5cm # default width and height
PEN color:white
FILL style:null
SHADOW off
RECTANGLE w:(d) h:(d) # a border marking the object's size
SHADOW on
IF ((ext = ".bmp") OR (ext = ".BMP") OR (ext = ".bmP") OR (ext = ".bMp") OR (ext
= ".Bmp") OR (ext = ".bMP") OR (ext = ".BMp") OR (ext = ".BmP"))
TABLE w:(d) h:(d) rows:1 cols:1 w1:100% h1:100% # get the current size of the
object
BITMAPINFO (grfk) # get the bitmap size
STRETCH off
IF (bmpwidth / CMS tabw1 < bmpheight / CMS tabh1)
# use maximum height, space left and right
SET w:(tabh1 * (bmpwidth / bmpheight))
BITMAP (grfk) x:((tabw1 - w) / 2) y:0cm w:(w) h:(tabh1)
ELSE
# use maximum width, space at top and bottom
SET h:(tabw1 * (bmpheight / bmpwidth))
BITMAP (grfk) x:0cm y:((tabh1 - h) / 2) w:(tabw1) h:(h)
ENDIF
ELSE
PEN color:darkgray outline
FILL color:(rgbval (f))
RECTANGLE w:(d) h:(d)
TABLE w:(d) h:(d) cols:3 rows:3
w1:.15cm w2:100% w3:.15cm
h1:.15cm h2:100% h3:.15cm
STRETCH off
AVAL grad:"Font size"
AVAL typ:"Font style"
IF (typ = "Standard")
FONT h:(PT grad)
ELSIF (typ = "Italic")
FONT h:(PT grad) italic
ELSIF (typ = "Bold")
FONT h:(PT grad) bold
ELSIF (typ = "Underline")
FONT h:(PT grad) underline
ELSIF (typ = "Bold Italic")
FONT h:(PT grad) bold italic
ELSIF (typ = "Bold Underline")
FONT h:(PT grad) bold underline

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 163

Part IV

ENDIF
IF (sp="English")
ATTR "Text" x:(tabx1) y:(taby1) w:(tabw2) h:(tabh2)
ELSE
ATTR "Notiz" x:(tabx1) y:(taby1) w:(tabw2) h:(tabh2)
ENDIF
ENDIF
ENDIF

1.1.19

Class "Aggregation"

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

GRAPHREP layer:-1 sizing:asymmetrical
AVAL sp:"Language"
AVAL set-default:"lightgray" f:"Color"
AVAL s:"Lines"
SHADOW off
IF (s = "Dots")
PEN style:dot
ELSIF (s = "Lines")
PEN style:dash
ELSIF (s = "Dots/Lines")
PEN style:dashdot
ELSIF (s = "Bold")
PEN w:0.05cm
ELSIF (s = "None")
PEN style:null
ENDIF
FILL color:(rgbval (f))
RECTANGLE x:0.0cm y:0.0cm w:6.0cm h:9.0cm
TABLE x:0.0cm y:0.0cm w:6.0cm h:9.0cm
rows:3 cols:3
w1:0.15cm w2:100% w3:.15cm
h1:.1cm h2:100% h3:.1cm
STRETCH off
FONT h:10pt
AVAL d:"Representation"
AVAL n:"Display name"
IF (d = "inside")
AVAL col:"Fontcolor"
ELSE
AVAL col:"fontcolor"
ENDIF
IF (n = "Yes")
AVAL grad:"Font size"
AVAL typ:"Font style"
IF (typ = "Standard")
FONT h:(PT grad)
ELSIF (typ = "Italic")
FONT h:(PT grad) italic
ELSIF (typ = "Bold")
FONT h:(PT grad) bold
ELSIF (typ = "Underline")
FONT h:(PT grad) underline
ELSIF (typ = "Bold Italic")
FONT h:(PT grad) bold italic
ELSIF (typ = "Bold Underline")
FONT h:(PT grad) bold underline

page 164

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS administrators

ENDIF
IF (d = "inside")
IF (sp = "English")
ATTR "Name" x:(tabx1) y:(taby1) w:(tabw2) h:(tabh2)
ELSE
ATTR "Bezeichnung" x:(tabx1) y:(taby1) w:(tabw2) h:(tabh2)
ENDIF
ELSE
IF (sp = "English")
ATTR "Name" x:(tabx1) y:-.05cm w:(tabw2) h:b
ELSE
ATTR "Bezeichnung" x:(tabx1) y:-.05cm w:(tabw2) h:b
ENDIF
ENDIF
ENDIF
F

1.1.20

Class "Swimlane (horizontal)"

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

GRAPHREP swimlane:horizontal
SHADOW off
AVAL o:"Working environment"
PEN style:null
AVAL set-default:"$ffffff" c:"Color"
AVAL cl:"Fontcolor"
AVAL or:"Alignment"
AVAL w:"Display water marks"
AVAL sp:"Language"
FILL color:(rgbval (c))
PEN color:black
RECTANGLE w:6cm h:4cm
TABLE rows:3 cols:2 w:6cm h:4cm w1:4cm w2:100% h1:0.1cm h2:100% h3:0.1cm
STRETCH off
FONT color:(cl) h:14pt bold
IF (o="")
IF (sp = "English")
IF (or = "center")
ATTR "Name" x:(tabx0 + (tabw1 / 2)) y:(taby1 + (tabh2 / 2)) w:c:(tabw1) h:c:(tabh2)
line-break:rigorous
ELSIF (or = "top")
ATTR "Name" x:(tabx0 + (tabw1 / 2)) y:(taby1) w:c:(tabw1) h:t:(tabh2) linebreak:rigorous
ELSE
ATTR "Name" x:(tabx0 + (tabw1 / 2)) y:(taby2) w:c:(tabw1) h:b:(tabh2) linebreak:rigorous
ENDIF
IF (w="yes")
IF ((tabw1 + tabw2) > 30cm)
SET cl:$b5b5b5
FONT color:(cl) h:14pt bold
IF (or = "center")
ATTR "Name" x:19.0cm y:(taby1 + (tabh2 / 2)) w:c:(tabw1) h:c:(tabh2)
line-break:rigorous
ELSIF (or = "top")
ATTR
"Name"
x:19.0cm
y:(taby1)
w:c:(tabw1)
h:t:(tabh2)
linebreak:rigorous
ELSE

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 165

Part IV

ATTR
"Name"
x:19.0cm
y:(taby2)
w:c:(tabw1)
h:b:(tabh2)
linebreak:rigorous
ENDIF
ENDIF
IF ((tabw1 + tabw2) > 50cm)
IF (or = "center")
ATTR "Name" x:38.0cm y:(taby1 + (tabh2 / 2)) w:c:(tabw1) h:c:(tabh2)
line-break:rigorous
ELSIF (or = "top")
ATTR
"Name"
x:38.0cm
y:(taby1)
w:c:(tabw1)
h:t:(tabh2)
linebreak:rigorous
ELSE
ATTR
"Name"
x:38.0cm
y:(taby2)
w:c:(tabw1)
h:b:(tabh2)
linebreak:rigorous
ENDIF
ENDIF
IF ((tabw1 + tabw2) > 70cm)
IF (or = "center")
ATTR "Name" x:57.0cm y:(taby1 + (tabh2 / 2)) w:c:(tabw1) h:c:(tabh2)
line-break:rigorous
ELSIF (or = "top")
ATTR "Name" x:57.0cm y:(taby1) w:c:(tabw1) h:t:(tabh2) line-break:rigorous
ELSE
ATTR
"Name"
x:57.0cm
y:(taby2)
w:c:(tabw1)
h:b:(tabh2)
linebreak:rigorous
ENDIF
ENDIF
IF ((tabw1 + tabw2) > 90cm)
IF (or = "center")
ATTR "Name" x:76.0cm y:(taby1 + (tabh2 / 2)) w:c:(tabw1) h:c:(tabh2)
line-break:rigorous
ELSIF (or = "top")
ATTR
"Name"
x:76.0cm
y:(taby1)
w:c:(tabw1)
h:t:(tabh2)
linebreak:rigorous
ELSE
ATTR
"Name"
x:76.0cm
y:(taby2)
w:c:(tabw1)
h:b:(tabh2)
linebreak:rigorous
ENDIF
ENDIF
IF ((tabw1 + tabw2) > 110cm)
IF (or = "center")
ATTR "Name" x:95.0cm y:(taby1 + (tabh2 / 2)) w:c:(tabw1) h:c:(tabh2)
line-break:rigorous
ELSIF (or = "top")
ATTR "Name" x:95.0cm y:(taby1) w:c:(tabw1) h:t:(tabh2) line-break:rigorous
ELSE
ATTR
"Name"
x:95.0cm
y:(taby2)
w:c:(tabw1)
h:b:(tabh2)
linebreak:rigorous
ENDIF
ENDIF
IF ((tabw1 + tabw2) > 130cm)
IF (or = "center")
ATTR "Name" x:114.0cm y:(taby1 + (tabh2 / 2)) w:c:(tabw1) h:c:(tabh2)
line-break:rigorous
ELSIF (or = "top")
ATTR
"Name"
x:114.0cm
y:(taby1)
w:c:(tabw1)
h:t:(tabh2)
linebreak:rigorous
ELSE
ATTR
"Name"
x:114.0cm
y:(taby2)
w:c:(tabw1)
h:b:(tabh2)
linebreak:rigorous
ENDIF

page 166

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS administrators

ENDIF
IF ((tabw1 + tabw2) > 150cm)
IF (or = "center")
ATTR "Name" x:133.0cm y:(taby1 + (tabh2 / 2)) w:c:(tabw1) h:c:(tabh2)
line-break:rigorous
ELSIF (or = "top")
ATTR "Name" x:133.0cm y:(taby1) w:c:(tabw1) h:t:(tabh2) line-break:rigorous
ELSE
ATTR
"Name"
x:133.0cm
y:(taby2)
w:c:(tabw1)
h:b:(tabh2)
linebreak:rigorous
ENDIF
ENDIF
IF ((tabw1 + tabw2) > 170cm)
IF (or = "center")
ATTR "Name" x:152.0cm y:(taby1 + (tabh2 / 2)) w:c:(tabw1) h:c:(tabh2)
line-break:rigorous
ELSIF (or = "top")
ATTR
"Name"
x:152.0cm
y:(taby1)
w:c:(tabw1)
h:t:(tabh2)
linebreak:rigorous
ELSE
ATTR
"Name"
x:152.0cm
y:(taby2)
w:c:(tabw1)
h:b:(tabh2)
linebreak:rigorous
ENDIF
ENDIF
IF ((tabw1 + tabw2) > 190cm)
IF (or = "center")
ATTR "Name" x:171.0cm y:(taby1 + (tabh2 / 2)) w:c:(tabw1) h:c:(tabh2)
line-break:rigorous
ELSIF (or = "top")
ATTR "Name" x:171.0cm y:(taby1) w:c:(tabw1) h:t:(tabh2) line-break:rigorous
ELSE
ATTR
"Name"
x:171.0cm
y:(taby2)
w:c:(tabw1)
h:b:(tabh2)
linebreak:rigorous
ENDIF
ENDIF
IF ((tabw1 + tabw2) > 210cm)
IF (or = "center")
ATTR "Name" x:190.0cm y:(taby1 + (tabh2 / 2)) w:c:(tabw1) h:c:(tabh2)
line-break:rigorous
ELSIF (or = "top")
ATTR
"Name"
x:190.0cm
y:(taby1)
w:c:(tabw1)
h:t:(tabh2)
linebreak:rigorous
ELSE
ATTR
"Name"
x:190.0cm
y:(taby2)
w:c:(tabw1)
h:b:(tabh2)
linebreak:rigorous
ENDIF
ENDIF
IF ((tabw1 + tabw2) > 230cm)
IF (or = "center")
ATTR "Name" x:209.0cm y:(taby1 + (tabh2 / 2)) w:c:(tabw1) h:c:(tabh2)
line-break:rigorous
ELSIF (or = "top")
ATTR "Name" x:209.0cm y:(taby1) w:c:(tabw1) h:t:(tabh2) line-break:rigorous
ELSE
ATTR
"Name"
x:209.0cm
y:(taby2)
w:c:(tabw1)
h:b:(tabh2)
linebreak:rigorous
ENDIF
ENDIF
ENDIF
ELSE
IF (or = "center")

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 167

Part IV

ATTR "Bezeichnung" x:(tabx0 + (tabw1 / 2)) y:(taby1 + (tabh2 / 2))

w:c:(tabw1) h:c:(tabh2) line-break:rigorous
ELSIF (or = "top")
ATTR "Bezeichnung" x:(tabx0 + (tabw1 / 2)) y:(taby1) w:c:(tabw1) h:t:(tabh2)
line-break:rigorous
ELSE
ATTR "Bezeichnung" x:(tabx0 + (tabw1 / 2)) y:(taby2) w:c:(tabw1) h:b:(tabh2)
line-break:rigorous
ENDIF
IF (w="yes")
IF ((tabw1 + tabw2) > 30cm)
SET cl:$b5b5b5
FONT color:(cl) h:14pt bold
IF (or = "center")
ATTR "Bezeichnung" x:19.0cm y:(taby1 + (tabh2 / 2)) w:c:(tabw1)
h:c:(tabh2) line-break:rigorous
ELSIF (or = "top")
ATTR "Bezeichnung" x:19.0cm y:(taby1) w:c:(tabw1) h:t:(tabh2) line-break:rigorous
ELSE
ATTR "Bezeichnung" x:19.0cm y:(taby2) w:c:(tabw1) h:b:(tabh2) linebreak:rigorous
ENDIF
ENDIF
IF ((tabw1 + tabw2) > 50cm)
IF (or = "center")
ATTR "Bezeichnung" x:38.0cm y:(taby1 + (tabh2 / 2)) w:c:(tabw1) h:c:(tabh2) linebreak:rigorous
ELSIF (or = "top")
ATTR "Bezeichnung" x:38.0cm y:(taby1) w:c:(tabw1) h:t:(tabh2) linebreak:rigorous
ELSE
ATTR "Bezeichnung" x:38.0cm y:(taby2) w:c:(tabw1) h:b:(tabh2) linebreak:rigorous
ENDIF
ENDIF
IF ((tabw1 + tabw2) > 70cm)
IF (or = "center")
ATTR "Bezeichnung" x:57.0cm y:(taby1 + (tabh2 / 2)) w:c:(tabw1)
h:c:(tabh2) line-break:rigorous
ELSIF (or = "top")
ATTR "Bezeichnung" x:57.0cm y:(taby1) w:c:(tabw1) h:t:(tabh2) linebreak:rigorous
ELSE
ATTR "Bezeichnung" x:57.0cm y:(taby2) w:c:(tabw1) h:b:(tabh2) linebreak:rigorous
ENDIF
ENDIF
IF ((tabw1 + tabw2) > 90cm)
IF (or = "center")
ATTR "Bezeichnung" x:76.0cm y:(taby1 + (tabh2 / 2)) w:c:(tabw1)
h:c:(tabh2) line-break:rigorous
ELSIF (or = "top")
ATTR "Bezeichnung" x:76.0cm y:(taby1) w:c:(tabw1) h:t:(tabh2) line-break:rigorous
ELSE
ATTR "Bezeichnung" x:76.0cm y:(taby2) w:c:(tabw1) h:b:(tabh2) linebreak:rigorous
ENDIF
ENDIF
IF ((tabw1 + tabw2) > 110cm)
IF (or = "center")

page 168

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS administrators

ATTR "Bezeichnung" x:95.0cm y:(taby1 + (tabh2 / 2)) w:c:(tabw1)

h:c:(tabh2) line-break:rigorous
ELSIF (or = "top")
ATTR "Bezeichnung" x:95.0cm y:(taby1) w:c:(tabw1) h:t:(tabh2) line-break:rigorous
ELSE
ATTR "Bezeichnung" x:95.0cm y:(taby2) w:c:(tabw1) h:b:(tabh2) linebreak:rigorous
ENDIF
ENDIF
IF ((tabw1 + tabw2) > 130cm)
IF (or = "center")
ATTR "Bezeichnung" x:114.0cm y:(taby1 + (tabh2 / 2)) w:c:(tabw1)
h:c:(tabh2) line-break:rigorous
ELSIF (or = "top")
ATTR "Bezeichnung" x:114.0cm y:(taby1) w:c:(tabw1) h:t:(tabh2) line-break:rigorous
ELSE
ATTR "Bezeichnung" x:114.0cm y:(taby2) w:c:(tabw1) h:b:(tabh2) linebreak:rigorous
ENDIF
ENDIF
IF ((tabw1 + tabw2) > 150cm)
IF (or = "center")
ATTR "Bezeichnung" x:133.0cm y:(taby1 + (tabh2 / 2)) w:c:(tabw1)
h:c:(tabh2) line-break:rigorous
ELSIF (or = "top")
ATTR "Bezeichnung" x:133.0cm y:(taby1) w:c:(tabw1) h:t:(tabh2) line-break:rigorous
ELSE
ATTR "Bezeichnung" x:133.0cm y:(taby2) w:c:(tabw1) h:b:(tabh2) linebreak:rigorous
ENDIF
ENDIF
IF ((tabw1 + tabw2) > 170cm)
IF (or = "center")
ATTR "Bezeichnung" x:152.0cm y:(taby1 + (tabh2 / 2)) w:c:(tabw1)
h:c:(tabh2) line-break:rigorous
ELSIF (or = "top")
ATTR "Bezeichnung" x:152.0cm y:(taby1) w:c:(tabw1) h:t:(tabh2) line-break:rigorous
ELSE
ATTR "Bezeichnung" x:152.0cm y:(taby2) w:c:(tabw1) h:b:(tabh2) linebreak:rigorous
ENDIF
ENDIF
IF ((tabw1 + tabw2) > 190cm)
IF (or = "center")
ATTR "Bezeichnung" x:171.0cm y:(taby1 + (tabh2 / 2)) w:c:(tabw1)
h:c:(tabh2) line-break:rigorous
ELSIF (or = "top")
ATTR "Bezeichnung" x:171.0cm y:(taby1) w:c:(tabw1) h:t:(tabh2) line-break:rigorous
ELSE
ATTR "Bezeichnung" x:171.0cm y:(taby2) w:c:(tabw1) h:b:(tabh2) linebreak:rigorous
ENDIF
ENDIF
IF ((tabw1 + tabw2) > 210cm)
IF (or = "center")
ATTR "Bezeichnung" x:190.0cm y:(taby1 + (tabh2 / 2)) w:c:(tabw1)
h:c:(tabh2) line-break:rigorous
ELSIF (or = "top")
ATTR "Bezeichnung" x:190.0cm y:(taby1) w:c:(tabw1) h:t:(tabh2) line-break:rigorous
ELSE

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 169

Part IV

ATTR "Bezeichnung" x:190.0cm y:(taby2) w:c:(tabw1) h:b:(tabh2) linebreak:rigorous

ENDIF
ENDIF
IF ((tabw1 + tabw2) > 230cm)
IF (or = "center")
ATTR "Bezeichnung" x:209.0cm y:(taby1 + (tabh2 / 2)) w:c:(tabw1)
h:c:(tabh2) line-break:rigorous
ELSIF (or = "top")
ATTR "Bezeichnung" x:209.0cm y:(taby1) w:c:(tabw1) h:t:(tabh2) line-break:rigorous
ELSE
ATTR "Bezeichnung" x:209.0cm y:(taby2) w:c:(tabw1) h:b:(tabh2) linebreak:rigorous
ENDIF
ENDIF
ENDIF
ENDIF
ELSE
IF (or = "center")
ATTR "Working environment" format:"%o" x:(tabx0 + (tabw1 / 2)) y:(taby1 +
(tabh2 / 2)) w:c:(tabw1) h:c:(tabh2) line-break:rigorous
ELSIF (or = "top")
ATTR "Working environment" format:"%o" x:(tabx0 + (tabw1 / 2)) y:(taby1)
w:c:(tabw1) h:t:(tabh2) line-break:rigorous
ELSE
ATTR "Working environment" format:"%o" x:(tabx0 + (tabw1 / 2)) y:(taby2)
w:c:(tabw1) h:b:(tabh2) line-break:rigorous
ENDIF
IF (w="yes")
IF ((tabw1 + tabw2) > 30cm)
SET cl:$b5b5b5
FONT color:(cl) h:14pt bold
IF (or = "center")
ATTR "Working environment" format:"%o" x:19.0cm y:(taby1 + (tabh2 / 2))
w:c:(tabw1) h:c:(tabh2) line-break:rigorous
ELSIF (or = "top")
ATTR "Working environment" format:"%o" x:19.0cm y:(taby1) w:c:(tabw1)
h:t:(tabh2) line-break:rigorous
ELSE
ATTR "Working environment" format:"%o" x:19.0cm y:(taby2) w:c:(tabw1)
h:b:(tabh2) line-break:rigorous
ENDIF
ENDIF
IF ((tabw1 + tabw2) > 50cm)
IF (or = "center")
ATTR "Working environment" format:"%o" x:38.0cm y:(taby1 + (tabh2 / 2))
w:c:(tabw1) h:c:(tabh2) line-break:rigorous
ELSIF (or = "top")
ATTR "Working environment" format:"%o" x:38.0cm y:(taby1) w:c:(tabw1)
h:t:(tabh2) line-break:rigorous
ELSE
ATTR "Working environment" format:"%o" x:38.0cm y:(taby2) w:c:(tabw1)
h:b:(tabh2) line-break:rigorous
ENDIF
ENDIF
IF ((tabw1 + tabw2) > 70cm)
IF (or = "center")
ATTR "Working environment" format:"%o" x:57.0cm y:(taby1 + (tabh2 / 2))
w:c:(tabw1) h:c:(tabh2) line-break:rigorous
ELSIF (or = "top")

page 170

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS administrators

ATTR "Working environment" format:"%o" x:57.0cm y:(taby1) w:c:(tabw1)

h:t:(tabh2) line-break:rigorous
ELSE
ATTR "Working environment" format:"%o" x:57.0cm y:(taby2) w:c:(tabw1)
h:b:(tabh2) line-break:rigorous
ENDIF
ENDIF
IF ((tabw1 + tabw2) > 90cm)
IF (or = "center")
ATTR "Working environment" format:"%o" x:76.0cm y:(taby1 + (tabh2 / 2))
w:c:(tabw1) h:c:(tabh2) line-break:rigorous
ELSIF (or = "top")
ATTR "Working environment" format:"%o" x:76.0cm y:(taby1) w:c:(tabw1)
h:t:(tabh2) line-break:rigorous
ELSE
ATTR "Working environment" format:"%o" x:76.0cm y:(taby2) w:c:(tabw1)
h:b:(tabh2) line-break:rigorous
ENDIF
ENDIF
IF ((tabw1 + tabw2) > 110cm)
IF (or = "center")
ATTR "Working environment" format:"%o" x:95.0cm y:(taby1 + (tabh2 / 2))
w:c:(tabw1) h:c:(tabh2) line-break:rigorous
ELSIF (or = "top")
ATTR "Working environment" format:"%o" x:95.0cm y:(taby1) w:c:(tabw1)
h:t:(tabh2) line-break:rigorous
ELSE
ATTR "Working environment" format:"%o" x:95.0cm y:(taby2) w:c:(tabw1)
h:b:(tabh2) line-break:rigorous
ENDIF
ENDIF
IF ((tabw1 + tabw2) > 130cm)
IF (or = "center")
ATTR "Working environment" format:"%o" x:114.0cm y:(taby1 + (tabh2 / 2))
w:c:(tabw1) h:c:(tabh2) line-break:rigorous
ELSIF (or = "top")
ATTR "Working environment" format:"%o" x:114.0cm y:(taby1) w:c:(tabw1)
h:t:(tabh2) line-break:rigorous
ELSE
ATTR "Working environment" format:"%o" x:114.0cm y:(taby2) w:c:(tabw1)
h:b:(tabh2) line-break:rigorous
ENDIF
ENDIF
IF ((tabw1 + tabw2) > 150cm)
IF (or = "center")
ATTR "Working environment" format:"%o" x:133.0cm y:(taby1 + (tabh2 / 2))
w:c:(tabw1) h:c:(tabh2) line-break:rigorous
ELSIF (or = "top")
ATTR "Working environment" format:"%o" x:133.0cm y:(taby1) w:c:(tabw1)
h:t:(tabh2) line-break:rigorous
ELSE
ATTR "Working environment" format:"%o" x:133.0cm y:(taby2) w:c:(tabw1)
h:b:(tabh2) line-break:rigorous
ENDIF
ENDIF
IF ((tabw1 + tabw2) > 170cm)
IF (or = "center")
ATTR "Working environment" format:"%o" x:152.0cm y:(taby1 + (tabh2 / 2))
w:c:(tabw1) h:c:(tabh2) line-break:rigorous
ELSIF (or = "top")

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 171

Part IV

ATTR "Working environment" format:"%o" x:152.0cm y:(taby1) w:c:(tabw1)

h:t:(tabh2) line-break:rigorous
ELSE
ATTR "Working environment" format:"%o" x:152.0cm y:(taby2) w:c:(tabw1)
h:b:(tabh2) line-break:rigorous
ENDIF
ENDIF
IF ((tabw1 + tabw2) > 190cm)
IF (or = "center")
ATTR "Working environment" format:"%o" x:171.0cm y:(taby1 + (tabh2 / 2))
w:c:(tabw1) h:c:(tabh2) line-break:rigorous
ELSIF (or = "top")
ATTR "Working environment" format:"%o" x:171.0cm y:(taby1) w:c:(tabw1)
h:t:(tabh2) line-break:rigorous
ELSE
ATTR "Working environment" format:"%o" x:171.0cm y:(taby2) w:c:(tabw1)
h:b:(tabh2) line-break:rigorous
ENDIF
ENDIF
IF ((tabw1 + tabw2) > 210cm)
IF (or = "center")
ATTR "Working environment" format:"%o" x:190.0cm y:(taby1 + (tabh2 / 2))
w:c:(tabw1) h:c:(tabh2) line-break:rigorous
ELSIF (or = "top")
ATTR "Working environment" format:"%o" x:190.0cm y:(taby1) w:c:(tabw1)
h:t:(tabh2) line-break:rigorous
ELSE
ATTR "Working environment" format:"%o" x:190.0cm y:(taby2) w:c:(tabw1)
h:b:(tabh2) line-break:rigorous
ENDIF
ENDIF
IF ((tabw1 + tabw2) > 230cm)
IF (or = "center")
ATTR "Working environment" format:"%o" x:209.0cm y:(taby1 + (tabh2 / 2))
w:c:(tabw1) h:c:(tabh2) line-break:rigorous
ELSIF (or = "top")
ATTR "Working environment" format:"%o" x:209.0cm y:(taby1) w:c:(tabw1)
h:t:(tabh2) line-break:rigorous
ELSE
ATTR "Working environment" format:"%o" x:209.0cm y:(taby2) w:c:(tabw1)
h:b:(tabh2) line-break:rigorous
ENDIF
ENDIF
ENDIF
ENDIF
LINE x1:(tabx1) y1:(taby0) x2:(tabx1) y2:(taby3)

1.1.21

Class "Swimlane (vertical)"

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

GRAPHREP swimlane:vertical
SHADOW off
AVAL o:"Organizational unit"
PEN style:null
AVAL set-default:"$ffffff" c:"Color"
AVAL cl:"Fontcolor"
AVAL or:"Alignment"
AVAL w:"Display water marks"

page 172

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS administrators

AVAL sp:"Language"
FILL color:(rgbval (c))
PEN color:black
RECTANGLE w:4cm h:6cm
TABLE rows:2 cols:3 w:4cm h:6cm h1:4cm h2:100% w1:.1cm w2:100% w3:.1cm
STRETCH off
FONT color:(col) h:14pt bold
IF (o="")
IF (sp = "English")
IF (or = "center")
ATTR "Name" x:(tabx1 + (tabw2 / 2)) y:(taby0 + tabh1 / 2) w:c:(tabw2)
h:c:(tabh1) line-break:rigorous
ELSIF (or = "left")
ATTR "Name" x:(tabx1) y:(taby0 + tabh1 / 2) w:l:(tabw2) h:c:(tabh1) linebreak:rigorous
ELSE
ATTR "Name" x:(tabx2) y:(taby0 + tabh1 / 2) w:r:(tabw2) h:c:(tabh1) linebreak:rigorous
ENDIF
IF (w="yes")
IF ((tabh1 + tabh2) > 20cm)
SET cl:$b5b5b5
FONT color:(cl) h:14pt bold
IF (or = "center")
ATTR "Name" x:(tabx1 + (tabw2 / 2)) y:14cm w:c:(tabw2) h:c:(tabh1) linebreak:rigorous
ELSIF (or = "left")
ATTR "Name" x:(tabx1) y:14cm w:l:(tabw2) h:c:(tabh1) line-break:rigorous
ELSE
ATTR "Name" x:(tabx2) y:14cm w:r:(tabw2) h:c:(tabh1) line-break:rigorous
ENDIF
ENDIF
IF ((tabh1 + tabh2) > 35cm)
IF (or = "center")
ATTR "Name" x:(tabx1 + (tabw2 / 2)) y:28cm w:c:(tabw2) h:c:(tabh1) linebreak:rigorous
ELSIF (or = "left")
ATTR "Name" x:(tabx1) y:28cm w:l:(tabw2) h:c:(tabh1) line-break:rigorous
ELSE
ATTR "Name" x:(tabx2) y:28cm w:r:(tabw2) h:c:(tabh1) line-break:rigorous
ENDIF
ENDIF
IF ((tabh1 + tabh2) > 50cm)
IF (or = "center")
ATTR "Name" x:(tabx1 + (tabw2 / 2)) y:42cm w:c:(tabw2) h:c:(tabh1) linebreak:rigorous
ELSIF (or = "left")
ATTR "Name" x:(tabx1) y:42cm w:l:(tabw2) h:c:(tabh1) line-break:rigorous
ELSE
ATTR "Name" x:(tabx2) y:42cm w:r:(tabw2) h:c:(tabh1) line-break:rigorous
ENDIF
ENDIF
IF ((tabh1 + tabh2) > 65cm)
IF (or = "center")
ATTR "Name" x:(tabx1 + (tabw2 / 2)) y:56cm w:c:(tabw2) h:c:(tabh1) linebreak:rigorous
ELSIF (or = "left")
ATTR "Name" x:(tabx1) y:56cm w:l:(tabw2) h:c:(tabh1) line-break:rigorous
ELSE
ATTR "Name" x:(tabx2) y:56cm w:r:(tabw2) h:c:(tabh1) line-break:rigorous
ENDIF

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 173

Part IV

ENDIF
IF ((tabh1 + tabh2) > 80cm)
IF (or = "center")
ATTR "Name" x:(tabx1 + (tabw2 / 2)) y:70cm w:c:(tabw2) h:c:(tabh1) linebreak:rigorous
ELSIF (or = "left")
ATTR "Name" x:(tabx1) y:70cm w:l:(tabw2) h:c:(tabh1) line-break:rigorous
ELSE
ATTR "Name" x:(tabx2) y:70cm w:r:(tabw2) h:c:(tabh1) line-break:rigorous
ENDIF
ENDIF
IF ((tabh1 + tabh2) > 95cm)
IF (or = "center")
ATTR "Name" x:(tabx1 + (tabw2 / 2)) y:84cm w:c:(tabw2) h:c:(tabh1) linebreak:rigorous
ELSIF (or = "left")
ATTR "Name" x:(tabx1) y:84cm w:l:(tabw2) h:c:(tabh1) line-break:rigorous
ELSE
ATTR "Name" x:(tabx2) y:84cm w:r:(tabw2) h:c:(tabh1) line-break:rigorous
ENDIF
ENDIF
IF ((tabh1 + tabh2) > 110cm)
IF (or = "center")
ATTR "Name" x:(tabx1 + (tabw2 / 2)) y:98cm w:c:(tabw2) h:c:(tabh1) linebreak:rigorous
ELSIF (or = "left")
ATTR "Name" x:(tabx1) y:98cm w:l:(tabw2) h:c:(tabh1) line-break:rigorous
ELSE
ATTR "Name" x:(tabx2) y:98cm w:r:(tabw2) h:c:(tabh1) line-break:rigorous
ENDIF
ENDIF
IF ((tabh1 + tabh2) > 125cm)
IF (or = "center")
ATTR "Name" x:(tabx1 + (tabw2 / 2)) y:112cm w:c:(tabw2) h:c:(tabh1) linebreak:rigorous
ELSIF (or = "left")
ATTR "Name" x:(tabx1) y:112cm w:l:(tabw2) h:c:(tabh1) line-break:rigorous
ELSE
ATTR "Name" x:(tabx2) y:112cm w:r:(tabw2) h:c:(tabh1) line-break:rigorous
ENDIF
ENDIF
IF ((tabh1 + tabh2) > 140cm)
IF (or = "center")
ATTR "Name" x:(tabx1 + (tabw2 / 2)) y:126cm w:c:(tabw2) h:c:(tabh1) linebreak:rigorous
ELSIF (or = "left")
ATTR "Name" x:(tabx1) y:126cm w:l:(tabw2) h:c:(tabh1) line-break:rigorous
ELSE
ATTR "Name" x:(tabx2) y:126cm w:r:(tabw2) h:c:(tabh1) line-break:rigorous
ENDIF
ENDIF
IF ((tabh1 + tabh2) > 155cm)
IF (or = "center")
ATTR "Name" x:(tabx1 + (tabw2 / 2)) y:140cm w:c:(tabw2) h:c:(tabh1) linebreak:rigorous
ELSIF (or = "left")
ATTR "Name" x:(tabx1) y:140cm w:l:(tabw2) h:c:(tabh1) line-break:rigorous
ELSE
ATTR "Name" x:(tabx2) y:140cm w:r:(tabw2) h:c:(tabh1) line-break:rigorous
ENDIF
ENDIF

page 174

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS administrators

IF ((tabh1 + tabh2) > 170cm)

IF (or = "center")
ATTR "Name" x:(tabx1 + (tabw2 / 2)) y:154cm w:c:(tabw2) h:c:(tabh1) linebreak:rigorous
ELSIF (or = "left")
ATTR "Name" x:(tabx1) y:154cm w:l:(tabw2) h:c:(tabh1) line-break:rigorous
ELSE
ATTR "Name" x:(tabx2) y:154cm w:r:(tabw2) h:c:(tabh1) line-break:rigorous
ENDIF
ENDIF
ENDIF
ELSE
IF (or = "center")
ATTR "Bezeichnung" x:(tabx1 + (tabw2 / 2)) y:(taby0 + tabh1 / 2) w:c:(tabw2)
h:c:(tabh1) line-break:rigorous
ELSIF (or = "left")
ATTR "Bezeichnung" x:(tabx1) y:(taby0 + tabh1 / 2) w:l:(tabw2) h:c:(tabh1)
line-break:rigorous
ELSE
ATTR "Bezeichnung" x:(tabx2) y:(taby0 + tabh1 / 2) w:r:(tabw2) h:c:(tabh1)
line-break:rigorous
ENDIF
IF (w="yes")
IF ((tabh1 + tabh2) > 20cm)
SET cl:$b5b5b5
FONT color:(cl) h:14pt bold
IF (or = "center")
ATTR "Bezeichnung" x:(tabx1 + (tabw2 / 2)) y:14cm w:c:(tabw2) h:c:(tabh1)
line-break:rigorous
ELSIF (or = "left")
ATTR "Bezeichnung" x:(tabx1) y:14cm w:l:(tabw2) h:c:(tabh1) linebreak:rigorous
ELSE
ATTR "Bezeichnung" x:(tabx2) y:14cm w:r:(tabw2) h:c:(tabh1) linebreak:rigorous
ENDIF
ENDIF
IF ((tabh1 + tabh2) > 35cm)
IF (or = "center")
ATTR "Bezeichnung" x:(tabx1 + (tabw2 / 2)) y:28cm w:c:(tabw2) h:c:(tabh1)
line-break:rigorous
ELSIF (or = "left")
ATTR "Bezeichnung" x:(tabx1) y:28cm w:l:(tabw2) h:c:(tabh1) linebreak:rigorous
ELSE
ATTR "Bezeichnung" x:(tabx2) y:28cm w:r:(tabw2) h:c:(tabh1) linebreak:rigorous
ENDIF
ENDIF
IF ((tabh1 + tabh2) > 50cm)
IF (or = "center")
ATTR "Bezeichnung" x:(tabx1 + (tabw2 / 2)) y:42cm w:c:(tabw2) h:c:(tabh1)
line-break:rigorous
ELSIF (or = "left")
ATTR "Bezeichnung" x:(tabx1) y:42cm w:l:(tabw2) h:c:(tabh1) line-break:rigorous
ELSE
ATTR "Bezeichnung" x:(tabx2) y:42cm w:r:(tabw2) h:c:(tabh1) linebreak:rigorous
ENDIF
ENDIF
IF ((tabh1 + tabh2) > 65cm)

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 175

Part IV

IF (or = "center")
ATTR "Bezeichnung" x:(tabx1 + (tabw2 / 2)) y:56cm w:c:(tabw2) h:c:(tabh1) linebreak:rigorous
ELSIF (or = "left")
ATTR "Bezeichnung" x:(tabx1) y:56cm w:l:(tabw2) h:c:(tabh1) linebreak:rigorous
ELSE
ATTR "Bezeichnung" x:(tabx2) y:56cm w:r:(tabw2) h:c:(tabh1) linebreak:rigorous
ENDIF
ENDIF
IF ((tabh1 + tabh2) > 80cm)
IF (or = "center")
ATTR "Bezeichnung" x:(tabx1 + (tabw2 / 2)) y:70cm w:c:(tabw2) h:c:(tabh1)
line-break:rigorous
ELSIF (or = "left")
ATTR "Bezeichnung" x:(tabx1) y:70cm w:l:(tabw2) h:c:(tabh1) linebreak:rigorous
ELSE
ATTR "Bezeichnung" x:(tabx2) y:70cm w:r:(tabw2) h:c:(tabh1) linebreak:rigorous
ENDIF
ENDIF
IF ((tabh1 + tabh2) > 95cm)
IF (or = "center")
ATTR "Bezeichnung" x:(tabx1 + (tabw2 / 2)) y:84cm w:c:(tabw2) h:c:(tabh1)
line-break:rigorous
ELSIF (or = "left")
ATTR "Bezeichnung" x:(tabx1) y:84cm w:l:(tabw2) h:c:(tabh1) line-break:rigorous
ELSE
ATTR "Bezeichnung" x:(tabx2) y:84cm w:r:(tabw2) h:c:(tabh1) linebreak:rigorous
ENDIF
ENDIF
IF ((tabh1 + tabh2) > 110cm)
IF (or = "center")
ATTR "Bezeichnung" x:(tabx1 + (tabw2 / 2)) y:98cm w:c:(tabw2) h:c:(tabh1)
line-break:rigorous
ELSIF (or = "left")
ATTR "Bezeichnung" x:(tabx1) y:98cm w:l:(tabw2) h:c:(tabh1) line-break:rigorous
ELSE
ATTR "Bezeichnung" x:(tabx2) y:98cm w:r:(tabw2) h:c:(tabh1) linebreak:rigorous
ENDIF
ENDIF
IF ((tabh1 + tabh2) > 125cm)
IF (or = "center")
ATTR "Bezeichnung" x:(tabx1 + (tabw2 / 2)) y:112cm w:c:(tabw2)
h:c:(tabh1) line-break:rigorous
ELSIF (or = "left")
ATTR "Bezeichnung" x:(tabx1) y:112cm w:l:(tabw2) h:c:(tabh1) line-break:rigorous
ELSE
ATTR "Bezeichnung" x:(tabx2) y:112cm w:r:(tabw2) h:c:(tabh1) linebreak:rigorous
ENDIF
ENDIF
IF ((tabh1 + tabh2) > 140cm)
IF (or = "center")
ATTR "Bezeichnung" x:(tabx1 + (tabw2 / 2)) y:126cm w:c:(tabw2)
h:c:(tabh1) line-break:rigorous
ELSIF (or = "left")

page 176

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS administrators

ATTR "Bezeichnung" x:(tabx1) y:126cm w:l:(tabw2) h:c:(tabh1) line-break:rigorous

ELSE
ATTR "Bezeichnung" x:(tabx2) y:126cm w:r:(tabw2) h:c:(tabh1) linebreak:rigorous
ENDIF
ENDIF
IF ((tabh1 + tabh2) > 155cm)
IF (or = "center")
ATTR "Bezeichnung" x:(tabx1 + (tabw2 / 2)) y:140cm w:c:(tabw2)
h:c:(tabh1) line-break:rigorous
ELSIF (or = "left")
ATTR "Bezeichnung" x:(tabx1) y:140cm w:l:(tabw2) h:c:(tabh1) line-break:rigorous
ELSE
ATTR "Bezeichnung" x:(tabx2) y:140cm w:r:(tabw2) h:c:(tabh1) linebreak:rigorous
ENDIF
ENDIF
IF ((tabh1 + tabh2) > 170cm)
IF (or = "center")
ATTR "Bezeichnung" x:(tabx1 + (tabw2 / 2)) y:154cm w:c:(tabw2)
h:c:(tabh1) line-break:rigorous
ELSIF (or = "left")
ATTR "Bezeichnung" x:(tabx1) y:154cm w:l:(tabw2) h:c:(tabh1) line-break:rigorous
ELSE
ATTR "Bezeichnung" x:(tabx2) y:154cm w:r:(tabw2) h:c:(tabh1) linebreak:rigorous
ENDIF
ENDIF
ENDIF
ENDIF
ELSE
IF (or = "center")
ATTR "Working environment" format:"%o" x:(tabx1 + (tabw2 / 2)) y:(taby0 + tabh1
/ 2) w:c:(tabw2) h:c:(tabh1) line-break:rigorous
ELSIF (or = "left")
ATTR "Working environment" format:"%o" x:(tabx1) y:(taby0 + tabh1 / 2)
w:l:(tabw2) h:c:(tabh1) line-break:rigorous
ELSE
ATTR "Working environment" format:"%o" x:(tabx2) y:(taby0 + tabh1 / 2)
w:r:(tabw2) h:c:(tabh1) line-break:rigorous
ENDIF
IF (w="yes")
IF ((tabh1 + tabh2) > 20cm)
SET cl:$b5b5b5
FONT color:(cl) h:14pt bold
IF (or = "center")
ATTR "Working environment" format:"%o" x:(tabx1 + (tabw2 / 2)) y:14cm
w:c:(tabw2) h:c:(tabh1) line-break:rigorous
ELSIF (or = "left")
ATTR "Working environment" format:"%o" x:(tabx1) y:14cm w:l:(tabw2)
h:c:(tabh1) line-break:rigorous
ELSE
ATTR "Working environment" format:"%o" x:(tabx2) y:14cm w:r:(tabw2)
h:c:(tabh1) line-break:rigorous
ENDIF
ENDIF
IF ((tabh1 + tabh2) > 35cm)
IF (or = "center")
ATTR "Working environment" format:"%o" x:(tabx1 + (tabw2 / 2)) y:28cm
w:c:(tabw2) h:c:(tabh1) line-break:rigorous
ELSIF (or = "left")

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 177

Part IV

ATTR "Working environment" format:"%o" x:(tabx1)

h:c:(tabh1) line-break:rigorous
ELSE
ATTR "Working environment" format:"%o" x:(tabx2)
h:c:(tabh1) line-break:rigorous
ENDIF
ENDIF
IF ((tabh1 + tabh2) > 50cm)
IF (or = "center")
ATTR "Working environment" format:"%o" x:(tabx1 +
w:c:(tabw2) h:c:(tabh1) line-break:rigorous
ELSIF (or = "left")
ATTR "Working environment" format:"%o" x:(tabx1)
h:c:(tabh1) line-break:rigorous
ELSE
ATTR "Working environment" format:"%o" x:(tabx2)
h:c:(tabh1) line-break:rigorous
ENDIF
ENDIF
IF ((tabh1 + tabh2) > 65cm)
IF (or = "center")
ATTR "Working environment" format:"%o" x:(tabx1 +
w:c:(tabw2) h:c:(tabh1) line-break:rigorous
ELSIF (or = "left")
ATTR "Working environment" format:"%o" x:(tabx1)
h:c:(tabh1) line-break:rigorous
ELSE
ATTR "Working environment" format:"%o" x:(tabx2)
h:c:(tabh1) line-break:rigorous
ENDIF
ENDIF
IF ((tabh1 + tabh2) > 80cm)
IF (or = "center")
ATTR "Working environment" format:"%o" x:(tabx1 +
w:c:(tabw2) h:c:(tabh1) line-break:rigorous
ELSIF (or = "left")
ATTR "Working environment" format:"%o" x:(tabx1)
h:c:(tabh1) line-break:rigorous
ELSE
ATTR "Working environment" format:"%o" x:(tabx2)
h:c:(tabh1) line-break:rigorous
ENDIF
ENDIF
IF ((tabh1 + tabh2) > 95cm)
IF (or = "center")
ATTR "Working environment" format:"%o" x:(tabx1 +
w:c:(tabw2) h:c:(tabh1) line-break:rigorous
ELSIF (or = "left")
ATTR "Working environment" format:"%o" x:(tabx1)
h:c:(tabh1) line-break:rigorous
ELSE
ATTR "Working environment" format:"%o" x:(tabx2)
h:c:(tabh1) line-break:rigorous
ENDIF
ENDIF
IF ((tabh1 + tabh2) > 110cm)
IF (or = "center")
ATTR "Working environment" format:"%o" x:(tabx1 +
w:c:(tabw2) h:c:(tabh1) line-break:rigorous
ELSIF (or = "left")

page 178

y:28cm

w:l:(tabw2)

y:28cm

w:r:(tabw2)

(tabw2

2))

y:42cm

y:42cm

w:l:(tabw2)

y:42cm

w:r:(tabw2)

(tabw2

2))

y:56cm

y:56cm

w:l:(tabw2)

y:56cm

w:r:(tabw2)

(tabw2

2))

y:70cm

y:70cm

w:l:(tabw2)

y:70cm

w:r:(tabw2)

(tabw2

2))

y:84cm

y:84cm

w:l:(tabw2)

y:84cm

w:r:(tabw2)

(tabw2

2))

y:98cm

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS administrators

ATTR "Working environment" format:"%o" x:(tabx1) y:98cm

h:c:(tabh1) line-break:rigorous
ELSE
ATTR "Working environment" format:"%o" x:(tabx2) y:98cm
h:c:(tabh1) line-break:rigorous
ENDIF
ENDIF
IF ((tabh1 + tabh2) > 125cm)
IF (or = "center")
ATTR "Working environment" format:"%o" x:(tabx1 + (tabw2 /
w:c:(tabw2) h:c:(tabh1) line-break:rigorous
ELSIF (or = "left")
ATTR "Working environment" format:"%o" x:(tabx1) y:112cm
h:c:(tabh1) line-break:rigorous
ELSE
ATTR "Working environment" format:"%o" x:(tabx2) y:112cm
h:c:(tabh1) line-break:rigorous
ENDIF
ENDIF
IF ((tabh1 + tabh2) > 140cm)
IF (or = "center")
ATTR "Working environment" format:"%o" x:(tabx1 + (tabw2 /
w:c:(tabw2) h:c:(tabh1) line-break:rigorous
ELSIF (or = "left")
ATTR "Working environment" format:"%o" x:(tabx1) y:126cm
h:c:(tabh1) line-break:rigorous
ELSE
ATTR "Working environment" format:"%o" x:(tabx2) y:126cm
h:c:(tabh1) line-break:rigorous
ENDIF
ENDIF
IF ((tabh1 + tabh2) > 155cm)
IF (or = "center")
ATTR "Working environment" format:"%o" x:(tabx1 + (tabw2 /
w:c:(tabw2) h:c:(tabh1) line-break:rigorous
ELSIF (or = "left")
ATTR "Working environment" format:"%o" x:(tabx1) y:140cm
h:c:(tabh1) line-break:rigorous
ELSE
ATTR "Working environment" format:"%o" x:(tabx2) y:140cm
h:c:(tabh1) line-break:rigorous
ENDIF
ENDIF
IF ((tabh1 + tabh2) > 170cm)
IF (or = "center")
ATTR "Working environment" format:"%o" x:(tabx1 + (tabw2 /
w:c:(tabw2) h:c:(tabh1) line-break:rigorous
ELSIF (or = "left")
ATTR "Working environment" format:"%o" x:(tabx1) y:154cm
h:c:(tabh1) line-break:rigorous
ELSE
ATTR "Working environment" format:"%o" x:(tabx2) y:154cm
h:c:(tabh1) line-break:rigorous
ENDIF
ENDIF
ENDIF
ENDIF
FONT
LINE x1:(tabx0) y1:(taby1) x2:(tabx3) y2:(taby1)

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

w:l:(tabw2)

w:r:(tabw2)

2)) y:112cm

w:l:(tabw2)

w:r:(tabw2)

2)) y:126cm

w:l:(tabw2)

w:r:(tabw2)

2)) y:140cm

w:l:(tabw2)

w:r:(tabw2)

2)) y:154cm

w:l:(tabw2)

w:r:(tabw2)

page 179

Part IV

1.1.22

Class "Organizational unit"

ADONIS Standard WE Library 3.81:

GRAPHREP
AVAL sp:"Language"
AVAL sub:"Model reference"
AVAL col:"fontcolor"
AVAL sn:"Submodelname"
PEN w:0.025cm
FONT color:(col)
FILL color:whitesmoke
RECTANGLE x:-1.2cm y:-.75cm w:2.4cm h:1.5cm
FILL color:black
RECTANGLE x:-1.1cm y:-.65cm w:2.2cm h:0.06cm
IF (sub = "")
IF (sp = "English")
ATTR "Name" y:.9cm w:c:2.8cm h:t
ELSE
ATTR "Bezeichnung" y:.9cm w:c:2.8cm h:t
ENDIF
ELSE
IF (sp = "English")
ATTR "Model reference" format:"%m" y:.9cm w:c:2.8cm h:t
ELSE
TEXT (sn) y:.9cm w:c:2.8cm h:t
TEXTBOX (sn) y:.9cm w:c:2.8cm h:t
PEN style:null
FILL style:null
HOTSPOT "Model reference" text:("Klicken um zu ffnen:
" + sn) x:(textx1) y:(texty1) w:(textw) h:(texth)
PEN
FILL
ENDIF
ENDIF
AVAL i:"Order"
IF (i > "0")
FONT "Arial" h:10.0pt bold color:black
ATTR "Order" x:1.1cm y:.6cm w:r:1cm h:b
ENDIF

1.1.23

Class "Performer"

ADONIS Standard WE Library 3.81:

GRAPHREP
AVAL sp:"Language"
AVAL col:"fontcolor"
PEN w:0.025cm
FILL color:peru
RECTANGLE x:-1.1cm y:-.50cm w:2.2cm h:.15cm
RECTANGLE x:-1.0cm y:-.35cm w:.12cm h:1.0cm
RECTANGLE x:0.88cm y:-.35cm w:.12cm h:1.0cm
RECTANGLE x:.3cm y:-.35cm w:.7cm h:.7cm
SHADOW mode:off
LINE x1:.3cm x2:1.0cm
FILL color:black
RECTANGLE x:.55cm y:-.21cm w:.2cm h:.03cm
RECTANGLE x:.55cm y:0.15cm w:.2cm h:.03cm

page 180

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS administrators

FONT color:(col)
IF (sp = "English")
ATTR "Name" y:.8cm w:c:2.8cm h:t
ELSE
ATTR "Bezeichnung" y:.8cm w:c:2.8cm h:t
ENDIF

1.1.24

Class "Role"

ADONIS Standard WE Library 3.81:

GRAPHREP
AVAL sp:"Language"
AVAL col:"fontcolor"
FILL color:lightskyblue
ELLIPSE rx:.75cm ry:.65cm
FONT color:(col)
IF (sp = "English")
ATTR "Name" y:.8cm w:c:2.8cm h:t
ELSE
ATTR "Bezeichnung" y:.8cm w:c:2.8cm h:t
ENDIF
FONT "Arial" h:32pt color:black
TEXT "R" y:.1cm w:c h:c

1.1.25

Class "Resource"

ADONIS Standard WE Library 3.81:

GRAPHREP layer:2
AVAL set-default:"EDP system" rt:"Type of resource"
AVAL sp:"Language"
AVAL col:"fontcolor"
IF (rt = "EDP system")
FILL color:lightgray
RECTANGLE x:-.6cm y:-.7cm w:1.2cm h:1.05cm
RECTANGLE x:-.7cm y:.35cm w:1.4cm h:.35cm
SHADOW mode:off
FILL color:lightskyblue
RECTANGLE x:-.45cm y:-.55cm w:.9cm h:.75cm
FILL color:navy
RECTANGLE x:-.3cm y:-.45cm w:.4cm h:.05cm
FILL color:white
RECTANGLE x:-.3cm y:-.4cm w:.4cm h:.2cm
FILL color:navy
RECTANGLE x:-.1cm y:-.15cm w: .4cm h:.05cm
FILL color:white
RECTANGLE x:-.1cm y:-.1cm w: .4cm h:.2cm
FILL color:lightgreen
RECTANGLE x:-.57cm y:.48cm w:.09cm h:.09cm
FILL color:black
RECTANGLE x:.15cm y:.48cm w:.45cm h:.03cm
ELSIF (rt = "Communication system")
FILL color:slategray
RECTANGLE x:-.275cm y:-.7cm w:.55cm h:1.4cm
FILL color:black
RECTANGLE x:.14cm y:-1cm w:.05cm h:.3cm
SHADOW off
2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 181

Part IV

FILL color:palegreen
RECTANGLE x:-.225cm y:-.55cm w:.45cm h:.3cm
FILL color:black
RECTANGLE x:-.20cm y:-.15cm w:.075cm h:.05cm
RECTANGLE x:-.05cm y:-.15cm w:.075cm h:.05cm
RECTANGLE x:0.10cm y:-.15cm w:.075cm h:.05cm
RECTANGLE x:-.20cm y:-.03cm w:.075cm h:.05cm
RECTANGLE x:-.05cm y:-.03cm w:.075cm h:.05cm
RECTANGLE x:0.10cm y:-.03cm w:.075cm h:.05cm
RECTANGLE x:-.20cm y:0.09cm w:.075cm h:.05cm
RECTANGLE x:-.05cm y:0.09cm w:.075cm h:.05cm
RECTANGLE x:0.10cm y:0.09cm w:.075cm h:.05cm
RECTANGLE x:-.20cm y:0.21cm w:.075cm h:.05cm
RECTANGLE x:-.05cm y:0.21cm w:.075cm h:.05cm
RECTANGLE x:0.10cm y:0.21cm w:.075cm h:.05cm
RECTANGLE x:-.05cm y:.55cm w:.1cm h:.03cm
RECTANGLE x:-.05cm y:-.65cm w:.1cm h:.03cm
ELSE
FILL color:whitesmoke
POLYGON 3 x1:-.7cm y1:.6cm x2:-1cm y2:-.2cm x3:.5cm y3:-.4cm
POLYGON 4 x1:-.9cm y1:-.4cm x2:.7cm y2: -.6cm x3:.9cm y3:.4cm x4:-.7cm y4:.6cm
FILL color:lightsteelblue
POLYGON 3 x1:-.72cm y1:.15cm x2:.72cm y2:.15cm y3:-.6cm
FILL color:whitesmoke
POLYGON 3 x1:-.35cm x2:.35cm y3:-.35cm
FILL color:forestgreen
PEN w:0.025cm
POLYGON 4 x1:-.5cm y1:.4cm x2:.4cm y2:-.5cm x3:.5cm y3:-.4cm x4:-.4cm y4:.5cm
FILL color:mistyrose
POLYGON 3 x1:-.5cm y1:.4cm x2:-.4cm y2:.5cm x3:-.65cm y3:.65cm
FILL color:lightgray
POLYGON 4 x1:.4cm y1:-.5cm x2:.5cm y2:-.4cm x3:.55cm y3:-.45cm x4:.45cm y4:-.55cm
FILL color:orangered
POLYGON 4 x1:.55cm y1:-.45cm x2:.45cm y2:-.55cm x3:.525cm y3:-.625cm x4:.625cm
y4:-.525cm
ENDIF
FONT color:(col)
IF (sp = "English")
ATTR "Name" y:.8cm w:c:2.8cm h:t
ELSE
ATTR "Bezeichnung" y:.8cm w:c:2.8cm h:t
ENDIF

1.1.26

Class "Cost center"

ADONIS Standard WE Library 3.81:

GRAPHREP
AVAL sp:"Language"
AVAL col:"fontcolor"
FILL color:lightseagreen
RECTANGLE x:-1cm y:-.7cm w:2cm h:.4cm
FILL color:gray
RECTANGLE x:-1cm y:-.3cm w:.68cm h:1cm
FILL color:white
RECTANGLE x:-.32cm y:-.3cm w:1.32cm h:1cm
SHADOW mode:off
LINE x1:-1cm y1:-.35cm x2:1cm y2:-.35cm
LINE x1:-1cm y1:-.05cm x2:1cm y2:-.05cm

page 182

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS administrators

LINE x1:-1cm y1:.2cm x2:1cm y2:.2cm

LINE x1:-1cm y1:.45cm x2:1cm y2:.45cm
LINE x1:.12cm y1:-.3cm x2:.12cm y2:.7cm
LINE x1:.56cm y1:-.3cm x2:.56cm y2:.7cm
FONT color:(col)
IF (sp = "English")
ATTR "Name" y:.9cm w:c:2.8cm h:t
ELSE
ATTR "Bezeichnung" y:.9cm w:c:2.8cm h:t
ENDIF
FONT "Arial" h:9pt bold color:black
IF (sp = "English")
TEXT "Cost center" y:-.7cm w:c:2cm h:t
ELSE
TEXT "Kostenstelle" y:-.7cm w:c:2cm h:t
ENDIF

1.1.27

Class "Aggregation"

ADONIS Standard WE Library 3.81:

GRAPHREP layer:-1 sizing:asymmetrical
AVAL sp:"Language"
AVAL set-default:"lightgray" f:"Color"
AVAL s:"Lines"
SHADOW off
IF (s = "Dots")
PEN style:dot
ELSIF (s = "Lines")
PEN style:dash
ELSIF (s = "Dots/Lines")
PEN style:dashdot
ELSIF (s = "Bold")
PEN w:0.05cm
ELSIF (s = "None")
PEN style:null
ENDIF
FILL color:(rgbval (f))
RECTANGLE x:0.0cm y:0.0cm w:6.0cm h:9.0cm
TABLE x:0.0cm y:0.0cm w:6.0cm h:9.0cm
rows:3 cols:3
w1:0.15cm w2:100% w3:.15cm
h1:.1cm h2:100% h3:.1cm
STRETCH off
FONT h:10pt
AVAL d:"Representation"
AVAL n:"Display name"
IF (d = "inside")
AVAL col:"Fontcolor"
ELSE
AVAL col:"fontcolor"
ENDIF
IF (n = "Yes")
AVAL grad:"Font size"
AVAL typ:"Font style"
IF (typ = "Standard")
FONT h:(PT grad)
ELSIF (typ = "Italic")
FONT h:(PT grad) italic

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 183

Part IV

ELSIF (typ = "Bold")

FONT h:(PT grad) bold
ELSIF (typ = "Underline")
FONT h:(PT grad) underline
ELSIF (typ = "Bold Italic")
FONT h:(PT grad) bold italic
ELSIF (typ = "Bold Underline")
FONT h:(PT grad) bold underline
ENDIF
IF (d = "inside")
IF (sp = "English")
ATTR "Name" x:(tabx1) y:(taby1) w:(tabw2) h:(tabh2)
ELSE
ATTR "Bezeichnung" x:(tabx1) y:(taby1) w:(tabw2) h:(tabh2)
ENDIF
ELSE
IF (sp = "English")
ATTR "Name" x:(tabx1) y:-.05cm w:(tabw2) h:b
ELSE
ATTR "Bezeichnung" x:(tabx1) y:-.05cm w:(tabw2) h:b
ENDIF
ENDIF
ENDIF

1.1.28

Class "Note"

ADONIS Standard WE Library 3.81:

GRAPHREP layer:0 sizing:asymmetrical
AVAL set-default:"" a:"External graphic"
AVAL sp:"Language"
AVAL set-default:"No" autoB:"Calculate size of graphic automatically"
AVAL set-default:"lemonchiffon" f:"Color"
SET found:(search(a,"\"",0))
IF (found >= 0)
IF (found = (LEN a - 1))
SET s:(search(a,"@",0) + 1)
SET e:((LEN a) - 1)
ELSE
SET s:((found) + 1)
SET foundend:(search(a,"\"",s))
IF (foundend >= 0)
SET e:((LEN a) - 1)
ELSE
SET e:(LEN a)
ENDIF
ENDIF
ELSE
SET e:(LEN a)
SET s:(search(a,"@",0) + 1)
ENDIF
SET grfk:(copy (a, s, e - s))
SET s:((LEN grfk) - 4)
SET e:((LEN grfk))
SET ext:(copy (grfk, s, e))
# -- build obj -# --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --IF (autoB = "No")

page 184

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS administrators

IF ((ext = ".bmp") OR (ext = ".BMP") OR (ext = ".bmP") OR (ext = ".bMp") OR (ext

= ".Bmp") OR (ext = ".bMP") OR (ext = ".BMp") OR (ext = ".BmP"))
BITMAP (grfk) w:1cm h:1cm
ELSE
PEN color:darkgray outline
FILL color:(rgbval (f))
RECTANGLE w:4.5cm h:4.5cm
TABLE w:4.5cm h:4.5cm cols:3 rows:3
w1:.15cm w2:100% w3:.15cm
h1:.15cm h2:100% h3:.15cm
STRETCH off
AVAL grad:"Font size"
AVAL typ:"Font style"
IF (typ = "Standard")
FONT h:(PT grad)
ELSIF (typ = "Italic")
FONT h:(PT grad) italic
ELSIF (typ = "Bold")
FONT h:(PT grad) bold
ELSIF (typ = "Underline")
FONT h:(PT grad) underline
ELSIF (typ = "Bold Italic")
FONT h:(PT grad) bold italic
ELSIF (typ = "Bold Underline")
FONT h:(PT grad) bold underline
ENDIF
IF (sp="English")
ATTR "Text" x:(tabx1) y:(taby1) w:(tabw2) h:(tabh2)
ELSE
ATTR "Notiz" x:(tabx1) y:(taby1) w:(tabw2) h:(tabh2)
ENDIF
ENDIF
# --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --ELSIF (autoB = "Yes")
SET d:4.5cm # default width and height
PEN color:white
FILL style:null
SHADOW off
RECTANGLE w:(d) h:(d) # a border marking the object's size
SHADOW on
IF ((ext = ".bmp") OR (ext = ".BMP") OR (ext = ".bmP") OR (ext = ".bMp") OR (ext
= ".Bmp") OR (ext = ".bMP") OR (ext = ".BMp") OR (ext = ".BmP"))
TABLE w:(d) h:(d) rows:1 cols:1 w1:100% h1:100% # get the current size of the
object
BITMAPINFO (grfk) # get the bitmap size
STRETCH off
IF (bmpwidth / CMS tabw1 < bmpheight / CMS tabh1)
# use maximum height, space left and right
SET w:(tabh1 * (bmpwidth / bmpheight))
BITMAP (grfk) x:((tabw1 - w) / 2) y:0cm w:(w) h:(tabh1)
ELSE
# use maximum width, space at top and bottom
SET h:(tabw1 * (bmpheight / bmpwidth))
BITMAP (grfk) x:0cm y:((tabh1 - h) / 2) w:(tabw1) h:(h)
ENDIF
ELSE
PEN color:darkgray outline
FILL color:(rgbval (f))
RECTANGLE w:(d) h:(d)
TABLE w:(d) h:(d) cols:3 rows:3
w1:.15cm w2:100% w3:.15cm

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 185

Part IV

h1:.15cm h2:100% h3:.15cm

STRETCH off
AVAL grad:"Font size"
AVAL typ:"Font style"
IF (typ = "Standard")
FONT h:(PT grad)
ELSIF (typ = "Italic")
FONT h:(PT grad) italic
ELSIF (typ = "Bold")
FONT h:(PT grad) bold
ELSIF (typ = "Underline")
FONT h:(PT grad) underline
ELSIF (typ = "Bold Italic")
FONT h:(PT grad) bold italic
ELSIF (typ = "Bold Underline")
FONT h:(PT grad) bold underline
ENDIF
IF (sp="English")
ATTR "Text" x:(tabx1) y:(taby1) w:(tabw2) h:(tabh2)
ELSE
ATTR "Notiz" x:(tabx1) y:(taby1) w:(tabw2) h:(tabh2)
ENDIF
ENDIF
ENDIF

1.1.29

Relation "Subsequent"

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

GRAPHREP rounded:0.1cm
PEN w:0.05cm
EDGE
END
LINE x1:-.3cm y1:.1cm x2:0cm y2:0cm
LINE x1:-.3cm y1:-.1cm x2:0cm y2:0cm
MIDDLE
AVAL v:"Visualized values"
AVAL d:"Representation"
AVAL sp:"Language"
AVAL cl:"Font colour"
IF (cl="black")
FONT color:black
ELSE
FONT color:white
ENDIF
IF (d = "above/below")
IF (v = "Denomination" OR v = "Transition probability and denomination" OR v =
"Transition condition and denomination")
IF (sp = "English")
ATTR "Denomination" y:.1cm w:c:3cm h:t
ELSE
ATTR "Bezeichnung" y:.1cm w:c:3cm h:t
ENDIF
ENDIF
IF (v = "Transition condition" OR v = "Transition probability and transition
condition")
IF (sp = "English")
ATTR "Transition condition" y:.1cm w:c:3cm h:t
ELSE

page 186

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS administrators

ATTR "Info zur bergangsbedingung" y:.1cm w:c:3cm h:t

ENDIF
ENDIF
IF (v = "Transition condition and denomination")
IF (sp = "English")
ATTR "Transition condition" y:-.05cm w:c:3cm h:b
ELSE
ATTR "Info zur bergangsbedingung" y:-.05cm w:c:3cm h:b
ENDIF
ENDIF
IF (v = "Transition probability" OR v = "Transition probability and transition
condition" OR v = "Transition probability and denomination")
ATTR "Transition probability" y:-.05cm w:c:3cm h:b
ENDIF
ENDIF
IF (d = "left/right")
IF (v = "Denomination" OR v = "Transition probability and denomination" OR v =
"Transition condition und Denomination")
IF (sp = "English")
ATTR "Denomination" x:0.15cm w:l:3cm h:c
ELSE
ATTR "Bezeichnung" x:0.15cm w:l:3cm h:c
ENDIF
ENDIF
IF (v = "Transition condition" OR v = "Transition probability and transition
condition")
IF (sp = "English")
ATTR "Transition condition" x:0.15cm w:l:3cm h:c
ELSE
ATTR "Info zur bergangsbedingung" x:0.15cm w:l:3cm h:c
ENDIF
ENDIF
IF (v = "Transition condition and denomination")
IF (sp = "English")
ATTR "Transition condition" x:-.10cm w:r:3cm h:c
ELSE
ATTR "Info zur bergangsbedingung" x:-.10cm w:r:3cm h:c
ENDIF
ENDIF
IF (v = "Transition probability" OR v = "Transition probability and transition
condition" OR v = "Transition probability and denomination")
ATTR "Transition probability" x:-.10cm w:r:3cm h:c
ENDIF
ENDIF

1.1.30

Relation "Sets variable"

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

GRAPHREP rounded:0.1cm
PEN style:dot
EDGE
PEN style:solid
START
LINE x1:0cm y1:.1cm x2:0cm y2:-.1cm
END
LINE x1:-.3cm y1:.1cm x2:0cm y2:0cm
LINE x1:-.3cm y1:-.1cm x2:0cm y2:0cm

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 187

Part IV

1.1.31

Relation "Sets"

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

GRAPHREP rounded:0.1cm
PEN style:dot
EDGE
PEN style:solid
START
LINE x1:0cm y1:.1cm x2:0cm y2:-.1cm
END
FILL color:black
POLYGON 3 x1:-.3cm y1:.1cm x2:0cm y2:0cm x3:-.3cm y3:-.1cm

1.1.32

Relation "uses"

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

GRAPHREP
START
FILL color:black
ELLIPSE x:-.1cm rx:.1cm ry:.1cm
END
FILL color:black
ELLIPSE x:-.1cm rx:.1cm ry:.1cm

1.1.33

Relation "communicates"

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

GRAPHREP
SHADOW mode:off
PEN w:0.02cm
EDGE
MIDDLE
AVAL sp:"Language"
IF (sp = "English")
ATTR "Name" y:0.00cm w:c:2.00cm h:b
ELSE
ATTR "Bezeichnung" y:0.00cm w:c:2.00cm h:b
ENDIF

1.1.34

Relation "contains"

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

GRAPHREP
SHADOW mode:off
PEN style:dash w:0.02cm
EDGE
PEN style:solid w:0.02cm
MIDDLE
AVAL sp:"Language"
IF (sp = "English")
ATTR "Name" x:0.00cm y:0.00cm w:c:2.00cm h:b
ELSE
page 188

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS administrators

ATTR "Bezeichnung" x:0.00cm y:0.00cm w:c:2.00cm h:b

ENDIF
AVAL set-default:"small" s:"State"
IF (s = "small")
FONT h:8.0pt
TEXT "includes" x:0.00cm y:0.00cm w:c:2.00cm h:t
ELSE
TEXT "<

1.1.35

Relation "extends"

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

GRAPHREP
SHADOW mode:off
PEN w:0.02cm
EDGE
MIDDLE
AVAL sp:"Language"
IF (sp = "English")
ATTR "Name" x:0.00cm y:0.00cm w:c:2.00cm h:b
ELSE
ATTR "Bezeichnung" x:0.00cm y:0.00cm w:c:2.00cm h:b
ENDIF
AVAL set-default:"small" s:"State"
IF (s = "small")
FONT h:8.0pt
TEXT "extends" x:0.00cm y:0.00cm w:c:2.00cm h:t
ELSE
TEXT "<

1.1.36

Relation "Generalisation"

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

GRAPHREP
SHADOW mode:off
PEN w:0.02cm
EDGE
MIDDLE
AVAL sp:"Language"
IF (sp = "English")
ATTR "Name" x:0.00cm y:0.00cm w:c:2.00cm h:b
ELSE
ATTR "Bezeichnung" x:0.00cm y:0.00cm w:c:2.00cm h:b
ENDIF
END
FILL color:white
POLYGON 3 x1:-.4cm y1:.2cm x2:0cm y2:0cm x3:-.4cm y3:-.2cm

1.1.37

Relation "Uses (use case)"

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

GRAPHREP
SHADOW mode:off
2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 189

Part IV

PEN style:solid w:0.02cm

EDGE
MIDDLE
AVAL sp:"Language"
IF (sp = "English")
ATTR "Name" x:0.00cm y:0.00cm w:c:2.00cm h:b
ELSE
ATTR "Bezeichnung" x:0.00cm y:0.00cm w:c:2.00cm h:b
ENDIF
AVAL set-default:"small" s:"State"
IF (s = "small")
FONT h:8.0pt
TEXT "uses" x:0.00cm y:0.00cm w:c:2.00cm h:t
ELSE
TEXT "<

1.1.38

Relation "Has process"

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

GRAPHREP
PEN w:0.025cm
EDGE
START
LINE x1:0.00cm y1:-.14cm x2:0.00cm y2:0.14cm
END
LINE x1:-.3cm y1:-.1cm x2:0.00cm y2:0.00cm
LINE x1:-.3cm y1:0.1cm x2:0.00cm y2:0.00cm

1.1.39

Relation "has Subdocument"

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

GRAPHREP
SHADOW mode:off
PEN w:0.02cm
EDGE
START
FILL color:white
ELLIPSE x:-0.1cm y:0cm rx:0.1cm ry:0.1cm
END
FILL color:black
POLYGON 3 x1:-0.28cm y1:0.11cm x2:0cm y2:0cm
x3:-0.28cm y3:-0.11cm

1.1.40

Relation "Owns"

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

GRAPHREP
SHADOW mode:off
PEN w:0.02cm
EDGE
START
FILL color:dodgerblue
ELLIPSE x:-0.05cm y:0cm rx:0.05cm ry:0.05cm
page 190

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS administrators

END
FILL color:dodgerblue
POLYGON 3 x1:-0.2cm y1:0.11cm x2:0cm y2:0cm
x3:-0.2cm y3:-0.11cm

1.1.41

Relation "has Note"

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

GRAPHREP
PEN w:0.02cm color:lightyellow outline style:dot
EDGE

1.1.42

Relation "Is subordinated"

ADONIS Standard WE Library 3.81:

GRAPHREP rounded:0.1cm
PEN w:0.03cm
EDGE
END
LINE x1:-.3cm y1:.1cm x2:0cm y2:0cm
LINE x1:-.3cm y1:-.1cm x2:0cm y2:0cm

1.1.43

Relation "has Resource"

ADONIS Standard WE Library 3.81:

GRAPHREP rounded:0.1cm
FILL color:dimgray
START
POLYGON 4 x1:-.16cm y1:-.08cm x2:0cm y2:-.08cm x3:0cm y3:.08cm x4:-.16cm y4:.08cm
END
POLYGON 4 x1:-.16cm y1:-.08cm x2:0cm y2:-.08cm x3:0cm y3:.08cm x4:-.16cm y4:.08cm

1.1.44

Relation "Belongs to "

ADONIS Standard WE Library 3.81:

GRAPHREP rounded:0.1cm
PEN w:0.03cm
EDGE
FILL color:black
START
ELLIPSE x:-.1cm rx:.1cm ry:.1cm
END
POLYGON 3 x1:-.3cm y1:.1cm x2:0cm y2:0cm x3:-.3cm y3:-.1cm

1.1.45

Relation "Is manager"

ADONIS Standard WE Library 3.81:

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 191

Part IV

GRAPHREP rounded:0.1cm
PEN w:0.03cm
EDGE
START
LINE x1:0cm y1:-.1cm x2:0cm y2:.1cm
LINE x1:-.1cm y1:-.05cm x2:-.1cm y2:.05cm
END
LINE x1:-.3cm y1:.1cm x2:0cm y2:0cm
LINE x1:-.3cm y1:-.1cm x2:0cm y2:0cm

1.1.46

Relation "Has role"

ADONIS Standard WE Library 3.81:

GRAPHREP rounded:0.1cm
PEN style:dot
EDGE
PEN style:solid
START
LINE x1:-.18cm y1:-.1cm y2:-.1cm
LINE x1:-.18cm x2:0cm
LINE x1:-.18cm y1:.1cm y2:.1cm
END
LINE x1:-.3cm y1:.1cm x2:0cm y2:0cm
LINE x1:-.3cm x2:0cm
LINE x1:-.3cm y1:-.1cm x2:0cm y2:0cm

1.1.47

Relation "Uses resource"

ADONIS Standard WE Library 3.81:

GRAPHREP rounded:0.1cm
FILL color:dimgray
START
ELLIPSE x:-.1cm rx:.1cm ry:.1cm
END
ELLIPSE x:-.1cm rx:.1cm ry:.1cm

1.1.48

Relation "Is charged to"

ADONIS Standard WE Library 3.81:

GRAPHREP rounded:0.1cm
PEN w:.04cm
START
LINE x1:-.15cm x2:0cm
LINE x1:-.075cm y1:-.075cm x2:-.075cm y2:.075cm
PEN w:0.01cm
END
LINE x1:-.2cm y1:.1cm x2:0cm y2:0cm
LINE x1:-.2cm y1:-.1cm x2:0cm y2:0cm
LINE x1:-.2cm x2:0cm

page 192

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS administrators

1.1.49

Relation "Is cost center manager"

ADONIS Standard WE Library 3.81:

GRAPHREP rounded:0.1cm
PEN w:.04cm
START
LINE x1:-.2cm x2:0cm
LINE x1:-.1cm y1:-.075cm x2:-.1cm y2:.075cm
LINE y1:-.1cm y2:.1cm
PEN w:.01cm
END
LINE x1:-.2cm y1:.1cm x2:0cm y2:0cm
LINE x1:-.2cm y1:-.1cm x2:0cm y2:0cm
LINE x1:-.2cm x2:0cm

1.1.50

Relation "has Note"

ADONIS Standard WE Library 3.81:

GRAPHREP
PEN w:0.02cm color:lightyellow outline style:dot
EDGE

1.2

AttrRep

The class attriubte "Attrrep" is set for the following classes of the ADONIS Standard BP Library
3.81:
Actor (see chap. 1.2.1, p. 194)
Use case (see chap. 1.2.2, p. 195)
System boundary (see chap. 1.2.3, p. 195)
Process start (see chap. 1.2.4, p. 195)
Subprocess (see chap. 1.2.5, p. 196)
Activity (see chap. 1.2.6, p. 197)
Decision (see chap. 1.2.7, p. 198)
Parallelity (see chap. 1.2.8, p. 198)
Merging (see chap. 1.2.9, p. 199)
End (see chap. 1.2.10, p. 199)
Variable (see chap. 1.2.11, p. 199)
Random generator (see chap. 1.2.12, p. 200)
Resource (see chap. 1.2.13, p. 200)
Process (see chap. 1.2.14, p. 200)
Performance indicator overview (see chap. 1.2.15, p. 201)
Performance indicator (see chap. 1.2.16, p. 202)

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 193

Part IV

Document (see chap. 1.2.17, p. 202)

Note (see chap. 1.2.18, p. 203)
Aggregation (see chap. 1.2.19, p. 203)
Swimlane (horizontal) (see chap. 1.2.20, p. 204)
Swimlane (vertical) (see chap. 1.2.21, p. 204)
The class attriubte "Attrrep" is set for the following relations of the ADONIS Standard BP Library
3.81::
Subsequent (see chap. 1.2.29, p. 207)
Communicates (see chap. 1.2.30, p. 208)
Contains (see chap. 1.2.31, p. 208)
Extends (see chap. 1.2.32, p. 208)
Generalisation (see chap. 1.2.33, p. 208)
Uses (see chap. 1.2.34, p. 209)
The class attribute "Attrrep" is set for the following classes of the ADONIS Standard WE Library
3.81:
Organisational unit (see chap. 1.2.22, p. 204)
Performer (see chap. 1.2.23, p. 205)
Role (see chap. 1.2.24, p. 205)
Resource (see chap. 1.2.25, p. 206)
Cost center (see chap. 1.2.26, p. 206)
Aggregation (see chap. 1.2.27, p. 206)
Note (see chap. 1.2.28, p. 207)
Note: The class attribute "Attrrep" is set for the following relations of the ADONIS
Standard WE Library 3.81.

1.2.1

Class "Actor"

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

NOTEBOOK
CHAPTER "Description"
ATTR "Name"
ATTR "Description" lines:5
ATTR "Comment" lines:5
ATTR "Open questions" lines:5
CHAPTER "Deutsch"
GROUP "Akteur"
ATTR "Bezeichnung"
ATTR "Beschreibung" lines:5
ATTR "Kommentar" lines:5
ENDGROUP

page 194

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS administrators

1.2.2

Class "Use case"

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

NOTEBOOK
CHAPTER "Description"
ATTR "Name"
ATTR "Description" lines:5
ATTR "Comment" lines:5
ATTR "External documentation"
ATTR "Details"
ATTR "Open questions" lines:5
CHAPTER "Deutsch"
GROUP "Anwendungsfall"
ATTR "Bezeichnung"
ATTR "Beschreibung" lines:5
ATTR "Kommentar" lines:5
ENDGROUP

1.2.3

Class "System boundary"

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

NOTEBOOK
CHAPTER "Description"
ATTR "Name"
ATTR "Representation"
ATTR "Description" lines:5
ATTR "Comment" lines:5
ATTR "Open questions" lines:5
CHAPTER "Deutsch"
GROUP "Systemgrenze"
ATTR "Bezeichnung"
ATTR "Beschreibung" lines:5
ATTR "Kommentar" lines:5
ENDGROUP

1.2.4

Class "Process start"

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

NOTEBOOK
CHAPTER "Description"
ATTR "Name"
ATTR "Order"
ATTR "Description" lines:5
ATTR "Comment" lines:5
ATTR "Trigger" lines:3
ATTR "Result" lines:3
ATTR "External documentation"
ATTR "Referenced documents" lines:5
ATTR "Process responsibility"
ATTR "Open questions" lines:5
CHAPTER "Input/Output"
ATTR "Input"
ATTR "Output"
CHAPTER "Simulation data"

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 195

Part IV

GROUP "Capacity analysis"

ATTR "Quantity"
ATTR "Time period" ctrltype:radio
ENDGROUP
GROUP "Workload analysis"
ATTR "Process calendar" dialog:processstart-calendar
ATTR "Tolerance waiting time"
ATTR "Abandon after tolerance waiting time"
ctrltype:check checked-value:"yes"
unchecked-value:"no"
ENDGROUP
GROUP "Process cost analysis"
ATTR "Cost driver"
ATTR "Cost driver quantity"
ENDGROUP
CHAPTER "Simulation results"
GROUP "Time"
ATTR "Aggregated cycle time" write-protected
ATTR "Aggregated execution time" write-protected
ATTR "Aggregated waiting time" write-protected
ATTR "Aggregated resting time" write-protected
ATTR "Aggregated transport time" write-protected
ENDGROUP
GROUP "Costs"
ATTR "Aggregated costs" write-protected
ATTR "Aggregated personnel costs" write-protected
ENDGROUP
ATTR "Info on results" write-protected lines:5
CHAPTER "Deutsch"
GROUP "Prozestart"
ATTR "Bezeichnung"
ATTR "Beschreibung" lines:5
ATTR "Kommentar" lines:5
ENDGROUP

1.2.5

Class "Subprocess"

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

NOTEBOOK
CHAPTER "Description"
GROUP "Representation"
ATTR "Name"
ATTR "Referenced subprocess"
ATTR "Display name and reference" ctrltype:check
value:"no"
ENDGROUP
ATTR "Order"
ATTR "Description" lines:5
ATTR "Comment" lines:5
ATTR "Open questions" lines:5
CHAPTER "Working environment"
ATTR "Performer" dialog:actor lines:3
CHAPTER "Simulation results"
GROUP "Time"
ATTR "Aggregated execution time" write-protected
ATTR "Aggregated waiting time" write-protected
ATTR "Aggregated resting time" write-protected
ATTR "Aggregated transport time" write-protected
ENDGROUP

page 196

checked-value:"yes"

unchecked-

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS administrators

GROUP "Costs"
ATTR "Aggregated costs" write-protected
CHAPTER "Deutsch"
GROUP "Prozeaufruf"
ATTR "Bezeichnung"
ATTR "Beschreibung" lines:5
ATTR "Kommentar" lines:5
ENDGROUP

1.2.6

Class "Activity"

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

NOTEBOOK
CHAPTER "Description"
ATTR "Name"
ATTR "Order"
ATTR "Description" lines:5
ATTR "Comment" lines:5
GROUP "Responsible role"
ATTR "Responsible role"
ATTR "Display responsible role" ctrltype:check checked-value:"Yes" uncheckedvalue:"No"
ENDGROUP
ATTR "Classification"
ATTR "External documentation"
ATTR "Referenced documents" lines:5
ATTR "Referenced use cases"
ATTR "Open questions" lines:5
CHAPTER "Input/Output"
ATTR "Input"
ATTR "Output"
CHAPTER "Time/Costs"
GROUP "Activity times"
ATTR "Execution time"
ATTR "Waiting time"
ATTR "Resting time"
ATTR "Transport time"
ENDGROUP
GROUP "Activity costs"
ATTR "Costs"
ENDGROUP
GROUP "Process cost analysis"
ATTR "EDP transaction costs"
ATTR "EDP batch costs"
ATTR "Print costs"
ATTR "Postal costs"
ENDGROUP
CHAPTER "Working environment"
GROUP "Simulation"
ATTR "Performer" dialog:actor lines:3
ATTR "Continuous execution" ctrltype:check checked-value:"yes" unchecked-value:"no"
ATTR
"Execution
interruptable"
ctrltype:check
checked-value:"yes"
uncheckedvalue:"no"
ATTR "Task stack"
ATTR "Done by"
ENDGROUP
CHAPTER "Other simulation data"
GROUP "Cooperation"

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 197

Part IV

ATTR "Cooperative" ctrltype:check checked-value:"yes" unchecked-value:"no"

ATTR "Cooperation mode" ctrltype:radio
ATTR "Average number of participants"
ATTR "Min. quota of presence"
ATTR "Max. start period"
ENDGROUP
GROUP "Conflict strategies"
ATTR "Priority"
ATTR "Max. resource waiting time"
ENDGROUP
CHAPTER "Simulation results"
ATTR "Number" write-protected
GROUP "Aggregated times"
ATTR "Aggregated execution time" write-protected
ATTR "Aggregated waiting time" write-protected
ATTR "Aggregated resting time" write-protected
ATTR "Aggregated transport time" write-protected
ENDGROUP
GROUP "Aggregated costs"
ATTR "Aggregated costs" write-protected
ATTR "Aggregated personnel costs" write-protected
ENDGROUP
ATTR "Info on results" write-protected lines:5
CHAPTER "External tool coupling"
ATTR "External tool coupling" write-protected
CHAPTER "Deutsch"
GROUP "Aktivitt"
ATTR "Bezeichnung"
ATTR "Beschreibung" lines:5
ATTR "Kommentar" lines:5
ENDGROUP

1.2.7

Class "Decision"

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

NOTEBOOK
CHAPTER "Description"
ATTR "Name"
ATTR "Order"
ATTR "Description" lines:5
ATTR "Comment" lines:5
ATTR "Open questions" lines:5
CHAPTER "Deutsch"
GROUP "Entscheidung"
ATTR "Bezeichnung"
ATTR "Beschreibung" lines:5
ATTR "Kommentar" lines:5
ENDGROUP

1.2.8

Class "Parallelity"

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

NOTEBOOK
CHAPTER "Description"
ATTR "Name"
ATTR "Representation"
page 198

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS administrators

ATTR "Order"
ATTR "Modeling direction" ctrltype:radio
ATTR "Description" lines:5
ATTR "Comment" lines:5
CHAPTER "Deutsch"
GROUP "Parallelitt"
ATTR "Bezeichnung"
ATTR "Beschreibung" lines:5
ATTR "Kommentar" lines:5
ENDGROUP

1.2.9

Class "Merging"

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

NOTEBOOK
CHAPTER "Description"
ATTR "Name"
ATTR "Representation"
ATTR "Order"
ATTR "Modeling direction" ctrltype:radio
ATTR "Description" lines:5
ATTR "Comment" lines:5
CHAPTER "Deutsch"
GROUP "Vereinigung"
ATTR "Bezeichnung"
ATTR "Beschreibung" lines:5
ATTR "Kommentar" lines:5
ENDGROUP

1.2.10

Class "End"

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

NOTEBOOK
CHAPTER "Description"
ATTR "Name"
ATTR "Representation"
ATTR "Order"
ATTR "Type" ctrltype:radio
ATTR "Description" lines:5
ATTR "Comment" lines:5
CHAPTER "Deutsch"
GROUP "Ende"
ATTR "Bezeichnung"
ATTR "Beschreibung" lines:5
ATTR "Kommentar" lines:5
ENDGROUP

1.2.11

Class "Variable"

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

NOTEBOOK
CHAPTER "Description"
ATTR "Name"
2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 199

Part IV

ATTR "Description" lines:5

ATTR "Comment" lines:5
ATTR "Variable type"
ATTR "Variable scope"
CHAPTER "Deutsch"
GROUP "Variable"
ATTR "Bezeichnung"
ATTR "Beschreibung" lines:5
ATTR "Kommentar" lines:5
ENDGROUP

1.2.12

Class "Random generator"

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

NOTEBOOK
CHAPTER "Description"
ATTR "Value" dialog:distribution
ATTR "Description" lines:5
ATTR "Comment" lines:5
ATTR "Information on data collection"
ATTR "Manual random generator" ctrltype:check
value:"No"
CHAPTER "Deutsch"
ATTR "Info zum Wert der Variablenbelegung"
ATTR "Beschreibung" lines:5
ATTR "Kommentar" lines:5

1.2.13

checked-value:"Yes"

unchecked-

Class "Resource"

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

NOTEBOOK
CHAPTER "Description"
ATTR "Name"
ATTR "Order"
ATTR "Description" lines:5
ATTR "Comment" lines:5
ATTR "Type of resource"
ATTR "Selection" dialog:resource lines:3
CHAPTER "Deutsch"
GROUP "Ressource"
ATTR "Bezeichnung"
ATTR "Beschreibung" lines:5
ATTR "Kommentar" lines:5
ENDGROUP

1.2.14

Class "Process"

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

NOTEBOOK
CHAPTER "Description"
GROUP "Representation"
ATTR "Name"
ATTR "Referenced process"
page 200

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS administrators

ATTR "Display name and reference" ctrltype:check

value:"no"
ENDGROUP
ATTR "Order"
ATTR "Description" lines:5
ATTR "Comment" lines:5
ATTR "Open questions" lines:5
CHAPTER "Input/Output"
ATTR "Input"
ATTR "Output"
CHAPTER "Simulation results"
GROUP "Time"
ATTR "Aggregated cycle time" write-protected
ATTR "Aggregated execution time" write-protected
ATTR "Aggregated waiting time" write-protected
ATTR "Aggregated resting time" write-protected
ATTR "Aggregated transport time" write-protected
ENDGROUP
GROUP "Costs"
ATTR "Aggregated costs" write-protected
ATTR "Aggregated personnel costs" write-protected
ENDGROUP
CHAPTER "Deutsch"
GROUP "Proze"
ATTR "Bezeichnung"
ATTR "Beschreibung" lines:5
ATTR "Kommentar" lines:5
ENDGROUP

1.2.15

checked-value:"yes"

unchecked-

Class "Performance indicator overview"

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

NOTEBOOK
CHAPTER "Description"
ATTR "Name"
ATTR "Description" lines:5
ATTR "Comment" lines:5
CHAPTER "Performance indicators"
ATTR "Performance indicator overview" lines:5
CHAPTER "Database parameter"
ATTR "Database access"
CHAPTER "Period configuration"
ATTR "Planning period"
CHAPTER "Cockpit"
GROUP "Visualization"
ATTR "Display current value" ctrltype:check checked-value:"1" unchecked-value:"0"
ATTR "Display score" ctrltype:check checked-value:"ja" unchecked-value:"nein"
ATTR "Display periodicity" ctrltype:check checked-value:"1" unchecked-value:"0"
ATTR "Display status" ctrltype:check checked-value:"1" unchecked-value:"0"
ATTR "Display weighting" ctrltype:check checked-value:"1" unchecked-value:"0"
ENDGROUP
CHAPTER "Deutsch"
GROUP "Kennzahlenbersicht"
ATTR "Bezeichnung"
ATTR "Beschreibung" lines:5
ATTR "Kommentar" lines:5
ENDGROUP

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 201

Part IV

1.2.16

Class "Performance indicator"

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

NOTEBOOK
CHAPTER "Description"
ATTR "Name"
ATTR "Order"
ATTR "Description" lines:5
ATTR "Comment" lines:5
CHAPTER "Details"
GROUP "Indicator details"
ATTR "Periodicity" ctrltype:dropdown
ATTR "Change of referenced date (year)"
ATTR "Change of referenced date (month)"
ENDGROUP
ATTR "Indicator type"
ATTR "Unit"
ATTR "Limit type" ctrltype:dropdown
ATTR "Threshold green/yellow"
ATTR "Threshold yellow/red"
ATTR "Responsibility"
ATTR "Data source" ctrltype:dropwon
ENDGROUP
CHAPTER "History"
ATTR "History" lines:15
CHAPTER "DB data source"
#ATTR "Data source" ctrltype:dropwon
ATTR "SELECT-Statement" lines:13
CHAPTER "Excel data source"
#ATTR "Data source" ctrltype:dropwon
ATTR "Table"
ATTR "Sheet"
ATTR "Cell"
CHAPTER "Manual data source"
#ATTR "Data source" ctrltype:dropwon
ATTR "Manual data input"
CHAPTER "Representation"
ATTR "Font size"
ATTR "Font style"
GROUP "Visualization"
ATTR "Display current value" ctrltype:check checked-value:"1" unchecked-value:"0"
ATTR "Display score" ctrltype:check checked-value:"1" unchecked-value:"0"
ATTR "Display periodicity" ctrltype:check checked-value:"1" unchecked-value:"0"
ATTR "Display status" ctrltype:check checked-value:"1" unchecked-value:"0"
ENDGROUP
CHAPTER "Deutsch"
GROUP "Kennzahlendetails"
ATTR "Bezeichnung"
ATTR "Beschreibung" lines:5
ATTR "Kommentar" lines:5
ENDGROUP

1.2.17

Class "Document"

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

NOTEBOOK
CHAPTER "Description"

page 202

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS administrators

ATTR "Name"
ATTR "Referenced document"
ATTR "Description" lines:5
ATTR "Comment" lines:5
ATTR "Responsible role"
ATTR "Referenced document model"
CHAPTER "Deutsch"
GROUP "Dokument"
ATTR "Bezeichnung"
ATTR "Beschreibung" lines:5
ATTR "Kommentar" lines:5
ENDGROUP

1.2.18

Class "Note"

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

NOTEBOOK
CHAPTER "Description"
ATTR "Text" lines:15
ATTR "Font size"
ATTR "Font style"
ATTR "Color" dialog:color
ATTR "External graphic"
ATTR "Calculate size of graphic automatically" ctrltype:check checked-value:"Yes"
unchecked-value:"No"
CHAPTER "Deutsch"
ATTR "Notiz" lines:15

1.2.19

Class "Aggregation"

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

NOTEBOOK
CHAPTER "Description"
ATTR "Name"
GROUP "Name display"
ATTR "Display name" ctrltype:check checked-value:"Yes" unchecked-value:"No"
ATTR "Representation"
ATTR "Font size"
ATTR "Font style"
ENDGROUP
ATTR "Description" lines:5
ATTR "Comment" lines:5
CHAPTER "Object display"
ATTR "Color" dialog:color
ATTR "Lines"
CHAPTER "Deutsch"
GROUP "Aggregation"
ATTR "Bezeichnung"
ATTR "Beschreibung" lines:5
ATTR "Kommentar" lines:5
ENDGROUP

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 203

Part IV

1.2.20

Class "Swimlane (horizontal)"

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

NOTEBOOK
CHAPTER "Description"
ATTR "Name"
ATTR "Working environment"
ATTR "Description" lines:5
ATTR "Comment" lines:5
ATTR "Open questions" lines:5
CHAPTER "Representation"
GROUP "Swimlane"
ATTR "Color" dialog:color
ATTR "Display water marks" ctrltype:check unchecked-value:"nein" checked-value:"ja"
ENDGROUP
GROUP "Text"
ATTR "Alignment" ctrltype:dropdown
ENDGROUP
CHAPTER "Deutsch"
GROUP "Schimmbahneigenschaften"
ATTR "Bezeichnung"
ATTR "Beschreibung" lines:5
ATTR "Kommentar" lines:5
ENDGROUP

1.2.21

Class "Swimlane (vertical)"

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

NOTEBOOK
CHAPTER "Description"
ATTR "Name"
ATTR "Working environment"
ATTR "Description" lines:5
ATTR "Comment" lines:5
ATTR "Open questions" lines:5
CHAPTER "Representation"
GROUP "Swimlane"
ATTR "Color" dialog:color
ATTR "Display water marks" ctrltype:check unchecked-value:"nein" checked-value:"ja"
ENDGROUP
GROUP "Text"
ATTR "Alignment" ctrltype:dropdown
ENDGROUP
CHAPTER "Deutsch"
GROUP "Schimmbahneigenschaften"
ATTR "Bezeichnung"
ATTR "Beschreibung" lines:5
ATTR "Kommentar" lines:5
ENDGROUP

1.2.22

Class "Organizational unit"

ADONIS Standard WE Library 3.81:

NOTEBOOK

page 204

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS administrators

CHAPTER "Description"
ATTR "Name"
ATTR "Order"
ATTR "Description" lines:5
ATTR "Comment" lines:5
ATTR "Model reference"
CHAPTER "Deutsch"
GROUP "Organisationseinheit"
ATTR "Bezeichnung"
ATTR "Beschreibung" lines:5
ATTR "Kommentar" lines:5
ENDGROUP

1.2.23

Class "Performer"

ADONIS Standard WE Library 3.81:

NOTEBOOK
CHAPTER "Description"
ATTR "Name"
ATTR "Description" lines:5
ATTR "Comment" lines:4
ATTR "Further education"
ATTR "Presence"
CHAPTER "Simulation data"
ATTR "Hourly wages"
GROUP "Capacity analysis"
ATTR "Availability"
ENDGROUP
GROUP "Workload analysis"
ATTR "Calendar" dialog:person-calendar
ENDGROUP
GROUP "Process cost analysis"
ATTR "Time dependent costs"
ENDGROUP
CHAPTER "Simulation results"
ATTR "Personnel costs" write-protected
ATTR "Capacity" write-protected
ATTR "Workload" write-protected
ATTR "Info on results" write-protected lines:5
CHAPTER "Deutsch"
GROUP "Bearbeiter"
ATTR "Bezeichnung"
ATTR "Beschreibung" lines:5
ATTR "Kommentar" lines:5
ENDGROUP

1.2.24

Class "Role"

ADONIS Standard WE Library 3.81:

NOTEBOOK
CHAPTER "Beschreibung"
ATTR "Name"
ATTR "Description" lines:5
ATTR "Comment" lines:5
ATTR "Referenced actor"
CHAPTER "Deutsch"
2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 205

Part IV

GROUP "Rolle"
ATTR "Bezeichnung"
ATTR "Beschreibung" lines:5
ATTR "Kommentar" lines:5
ENDGROUP

1.2.25

Class "Resource"

ADONIS Standard WE Library 3.81:

NOTEBOOK
CHAPTER "Description"
ATTR "Name"
ATTR "Beschreibung" lines:5
ATTR "Kommentar" lines:5
ATTR "Resourcentyp"
ATTR "Stundensatz"
CHAPTER "English"
GROUP "Resource Characteristics"
ATTR "Name (english)"
ATTR "Description" lines:5
ATTR "Comment" lines:5
ENDGROUP

1.2.26

Class "Cost center"

ADONIS Standard WE Library 3.81:

NOTEBOOK
CHAPTER "Description"
ATTR "Name"
ATTR "Description" lines:5
ATTR "Comment" lines:5
ATTR "Type of resource"
ATTR "Hourly wages"
CHAPTER "Deutsch"
GROUP "Resource"
ATTR "Bezeichnung"
ATTR "Beschreibung" lines:5
ATTR "Kommentar" lines:5
ENDGROUP

1.2.27

Class "Aggregation"

ADONIS Standard WE Library 3.81:

NOTEBOOK
CHAPTER "Description"
ATTR "Name"
ATTR "Order"
ATTR "Description" lines:5
ATTR "Comment" lines:5
CHAPTER "Data for analysis"
ATTR "Budget"
GROUP "ON processes"
ATTR "ON time"
page 206

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS administrators

ATTR "ON fixed costs"

ATTR "ON processes" lines:5
ENDGROUP
CHAPTER "Deutsch"
GROUP "Kostenstelle"
ATTR "Bezeichnung"
ATTR "Beschreibung" lines:5
ATTR "Kommentar" lines:5
ENDGROUP

1.2.28

Class "Note"

ADONIS Standard WE Library 3.81:

NOTEBOOK
CHAPTER "Description"
ATTR "Text" lines:15
ATTR "Font size"
ATTR "Font style"
ATTR "Color" dialog:color
ATTR "External graphic"
ATTR "Calculate size of graphic automatically" ctrltype:check checked-value:"Yes"
unchecked-value:"No"
CHAPTER "Deutsch"
ATTR "Notiz" lines:15

1.2.29

Relation "Subsequent"

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

NOTEBOOK
CHAPTER "Description"
ATTR "Denomination"
ATTR "Description" lines:5
ATTR "Comment" lines:5
CHAPTER "Details"
GROUP "Simulation"
ATTR "Transition condition" dialog:transcond
ENDGROUP
GROUP "Analytical evaluation"
ATTR "Transition probability"
ENDGROUP
GROUP "View"
ATTR "Visualized values" ctrltype:dropdown
ATTR "Representation"
ATTR "Font colour"
ENDGROUP
CHAPTER "Deutsch"
GROUP "Nachfolger"
ATTR "Info zur bergangsbedingung"
ENDGROUP
GROUP "Einstellungen"
ATTR "Bezeichnung"
ATTR "Beschreibung" lines:5
ATTR "Kommentar" lines:5
ENDGROUP

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 207

Part IV

1.2.30

Relation "communicates"

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

NOTEBOOK
CHAPTER "Description"
ATTR "Name"
ATTR "Description" lines:5
ATTR "Comment" lines:5
CHAPTER "Deutsch"
ATTR "Bezeichnung"
ATTR "Beschreibung" lines:5
ATTR "Kommentar" lines:5

1.2.31

Relation "contains"

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

NOTEBOOK
CHAPTER "Description"
ATTR "Name"
ATTR "Description" lines:5
ATTR "Comment" lines:5
CHAPTER "Deutsch"
ATTR "Bezeichnung"
ATTR "Beschreibung" lines:5
ATTR "Kommentar" lines:5

1.2.32

Relation "extends"

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

NOTEBOOK
CHAPTER "Description"
ATTR "Name"
ATTR "Description" lines:5
ATTR "Comment" lines:5
CHAPTER "Deutsch"
ATTR "Bezeichnung"
ATTR "Beschreibung" lines:5
ATTR "Kommentar" lines:5

1.2.33

Relation "Generalisation"

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

NOTEBOOK
CHAPTER "Description"
ATTR "Name"
ATTR "Description" lines:5
ATTR "Comment" lines:5
CHAPTER "Deutsch"
ATTR "Bezeichnung"
ATTR "Beschreibung" lines:5
ATTR "Kommentar" lines:5

page 208

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS administrators

1.2.34

Relation "uses"

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

NOTEBOOK
CHAPTER "Description"
ATTR "Name"
ATTR "Description" lines:5
ATTR "Comment" lines:5
CHAPTER "Deutsch"
ATTR "Bezeichnung"
ATTR "Beschreibung" lines:5
ATTR "Kommentar" lines:5

1.3

Model pointer

The class attribute "Modellzeiger" is set for the following classes of ADONIS Standard BP
Library 3.81:
Use case (see chap. 1.3.1, p. 209)
Subprocess (see chap. 1.3.2, p. 209)
Process (see chap. 1.3.3, p. 209)
Note: The class attribute is not set for any relations of the ADONIS Standard BP
Library 3.81.
The class attribute "Modellzeiger" is set for the following classes of ADONIS Standard WE
Library 3.81:
Organisational unit (see chap. 1.3.4, p. 210)
Note: The class attribute is not set for any relations of the ADONIS Standard WE
Library 3.81.

1.3.1

Class "Use case"

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

Details

1.3.2

Class "Subprocess"

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

Called process

1.3.3

Class "Process"

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

Referenced process

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 209

Part IV

1.3.4

Class "Organizational unit"

ADONIS Standard WE Library 3.81:

Model reference

1.4

Class cardinality

The class attribute "class cardinality" is set for the following classes of ADONIS Standard BP
Library 3.81:
Process start (see chap. 1.4.1, p. 210)
Subprocess (see chap. 1.4.2, p. 210)
Activity (see chap. 1.4.3, p. 211)
Decision (see chap. 1.4.4, p. 211)
Parallelity (see chap. 1.4.5, p. 211)
Merging (see chap. 1.4.6, p. 211)
End (see chap. 1.4.7, p. 211)
Variable (see chap. 1.4.8, p. 212)
Random generator (see chap. 1.4.9, p. 212)
Performance indicator overview (see chap. 1.4.10, p. 212)
Note: The class attribute "class cardinality" is not set for any relations of the ADONIS
Standard BP Library 3.81.
The class attribute "class cardinality" is set for the following classes of ADONIS Standard WE
Library 3.81:
Cost center (see chap. 1.4.11, p. 212)
Note: The class attribute "class cardinality" is not set for any relations of the ADONIS
Standard WE Library 3.81.

1.4.1

Class "Process start"

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

CCARDINALITIES
max-objects:1
min-objects:1
RELATION "Subsequent"
max-outgoing:1
min-outgoing:1
max-incoming:0

1.4.2

Class "Subprocess"

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

page 210

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS administrators

CARDINALITIES
RELATION "Subsequent"
max-outgoing:1
min-outgoing:1
min-incoming:1

1.4.3

Class "Activity"

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

CARDINALITIES
RELATION "Subsequent"
max-outgoing: 1
min-outgoing:1
min-incoming:1
RELATION "verwEndt"
max-outgoing: 1

1.4.4

Class "Decision"

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

CARDINALITIES
RELATION "Subsequent"
min-outgoing:2
min-incoming:1

1.4.5

Class "Parallelity"

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

CARDINALITIES
RELATION "Subsequent"
min-outgoing:2
min-incoming:1

1.4.6

Class "Merging"

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

CARDINALITIES
RELATION "Subsequent"
max-outgoing:1
min-incoming:2

1.4.7

Class "End"

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

CARDINALITIES
min-objects:1
RELATION "Subsequent"
max-outgoing:0
2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 211

Part IV

min-incoming:1

1.4.8

Class "Variable"

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

CARDINALITIES
RELATION "Sets variable"
min-incoming:1

1.4.9

Class "Random generator"

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

CARDINALITIES
RELATION "Sets variable"
min-outgoing:1
RELATION "belegt"
min-outgoing:1

1.4.10

Class "Performance indicator overview"

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

CARDINALITIES
max-objects: 1
max-imcoming: 0
RELATION "Owns"
max-outgoing:0

1.4.11

Class "Cost center"

ADONIS Standard WE Library 3.81:

CARDINALITIES
RELATION "Is cost center manager"
max-incoming:1

1.5

Conversion

The class attribute "Conversion" is set for the following classes of the ADONIS Standard BP
Library 3.81:
Subprocess (see chap. 1.5.1, p. 213)
Activity (see chap. 1.5.2, p. 213)
Note: The class attribute "Conversion" is not set for any relations of ADONIS Standard
BP Library 3.81.
Note: The class attribute "Conversion" is not set for any classes of ADONIS Standard
WE Library 3.81.

page 212

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS administrators

Note: The class attribute "Conversion" is not set for any relations of ADONIS Standard
WE Library 3.81..

1.5.1

Class "Subprocess"

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

CLASS "Activity"
ATTR "Name"
ATTR "Order"
ATTR "Description"
ATTR "Comment"
ATTR "Open questions"
ATTR "Execution time" from:"Aggregated execution time"
ATTR "Waiting time" from:"Aggregated waiting time"
ATTR "Resting time" from:"Aggregated resting time"
ATTR "Transport time" from:"Aggregated transport time"
ATTR "Costs" from:"Aggregated costs"
ATTR "referenced subprocess" from:"Referenced subprocess"
ATTR "Language"
ATTR "Bezeichnung"
ATTR "Beschreibung"
ATTR "Kommentar"
ATTR "Performer"
ATTR "Responsible role"
ATTR "Classification"
ATTR "External documentation"
ATTR "Referenced documents"
ATTR "Referenced use cases"

1.5.2

Class "Subprocess"

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

CLASS "Subprocess"
ATTR "Name"
ATTR "Order"
ATTR "Description"
ATTR "Comment"
ATTR "Open questions"
ATTR "Referenced subprocess" from:"referenced subprocess"
ATTR "Language"
ATTR "Bezeichnung"
ATTR "Beschreibung"
ATTR "Kommentar"
ATTR "Performer"
ATTR "Responsible role"
ATTR "Classification"
ATTR "External documentation"
ATTR "Referenced documents"
ATTR "Referenced use cases"

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 213

Part IV

2.

Library attributes
Chapter "Description"
-

Key words (see chap. 2.1, p. 215)

Description (see chap. 2.2, p. 215)

Comments (see chap. 2.3, p. 215)

Service (see chap. 2.4, p. 215)

Author (see chap. 2.5, p. 216)

Creation date (see chap. 2.6, p. 216)

Last user (see chap. 2.7, p. 216)

Date last changed (see chap. 2.8, p. 216)

Chapter "Layout"
-

Modes (see chap. 2.9, p. 216)

Versioning format (see chap. 2.10, p. 219)

External coupling (see chap. 2.13, p. 220)

Chapter "Modelling"
-

Default settings (see chap. 2.19, p. 237)

Page layout (see chap. 2.11, p. 219)

Connector marks:

Numbering (see chap. 2.14, p. 225)

Graphical representation (see chap. 2.15, p. 225)

Object arrangement (see chap. 2.12, p. 219)

Chapter "Analysis"
-

Relation analysis (see chap. 2.20, p. 237)

Chapter "Simulation"
-

Simulation definition:
-

Simtext (see chap. 2.21, p. 238)

Simmapping (see chap. 2.22, p. 239)

Simresult mapping (see chap. 2.23, p. 239)

Variable check (see chap. 2.24, p. 240)

Agent definition (see chap. 2.25, p. 240)

Enterprise:
-

Days per year (see chap. 2.26, p. 241)

Hours per day (see chap. 2.27, p. 241)

Chapter "Evaluation"
-

Process cost analysis

page 214

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS administrators

CCC mapping (see chap. 2.28, p. 241)

CCC default setting (see chap. 2.29, p. 242)

Dynamic evaluation modules (see chap. 2.30, p. 242)

Chapter "Documentation"
-

2.1

Documentations-Configuration (see chap. 2.18, p. 226)

Key words (Description)

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

ADONIS Standard Business Process Library for version ADONIS 3.81

ADONIS Standard WE Library 3.81:

ADONIS Standard Working Environmental Library for version ADONIS 3.81

2.2

Description (Description)

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

This BP-library is defined for ADONIS version 3.81. It contains the model types:
- 'Company map'
- 'Business process model'
- 'Document model'
- 'Use case diagram'

ADONIS Standard WE Library 3.81:

This WE library is defined for ADONIS version 3.81. It contains the model type
'Working environment model'

2.3

Comments (Comments)

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

This library is defined for being used under the operating system MS Windows, since
any GraphRep attributes require the font "Wingdings".

ADONIS Standard WE Library 3.81:

This library is defined for being used under the operating system MS Windows, since
any GraphRep attributes require the font "Wingdings".

2.4

Service (Description)

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

Address:
BOC ITC Ltd
80 Haddington Road

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 215

Part IV

Dublin 4, Ireland
Hotline (email):
[email protected]

ADONIS Standard WE Library 3.81:

This attribute is not set for the ADONIS Standard WE Library 3.81.

2.5

Author (Description)

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

Admin

ADONIS Standard WE Library 3.81:

Admin

2.6

Creation date (Description)

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

27.05.2004, 18:08

ADONIS Standard WE Library 3.81:

27.05.2004, 18:08

2.7

Last user (Description)

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

Admin

ADONIS Standard WE Library 3.81:

Admin

2.8

Date last changed (Description)

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

27.05.2004, 18:09

ADONIS Standard WE Library 3.81:

27.05.2004, 18:10

2.9

Modes (Layout)

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

page 216

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS administrators

MODELTYPE "Business process model" from:all plural:"Business process models" pos:1

attrrep:"BP Model Attributes"
EXCL "actor"
EXCL "use case"
EXCL "system boundary"
EXCL "Process"
EXCL "Parameter"
EXCL "Call parameter"
EXCL "Document"
EXCL "Has process"
EXCL "communicates"
EXCL "contains"
EXCL "extends"
MODE "Flow" from:all
EXCL "Variable"
EXCL "Random generator"
EXCL "Resource"
EXCL "Performance indicator"
EXCL "Performance indicator overview"
EXCL "Sets variable"
EXCL "Sets"
EXCL "Uses"
MODE "Flow - including Variables and Random generators" from:"Flow"
INCL "Variable"
INCL "Random generator"
INCL "Sets variable"
INCL "Sets"
MODE "Flow - including Resources" from:"Flow"
INCL "Resource"
INCL "Uses"
MODE "Flow - including Performance indicators" from:"Flow"
INCL "Performance indicator overview"
INCL "Performance indicator"
INCL "Owns"
MODE "All modeling objects" from:all no-documentation
MODE "Documentation" from:none no-modeling
INCL "Subprocess"
INCL "Process start"
INCL "Activity"
INCL "Decision"
INCL "Subsequent"
INCL "Resource"
INCL "Performance indicator overview"
INCL "Performance indicator"
MODELTYPE "Company map" from:none plural:"Company maps" pos:0 not-simulateable
bitmap:"db:\\compmap.bmp" attrrep:"BP Model Attributes"
INCL "Process"
INCL "Aggregation"
INCL "Note"
INCL "Has process"
INCL "Is inside"
INCL "has Note"
INCL "Performance indicator overview"
INCL "Performance indicator"
INCL "Owns"
MODE "Standard" from:all
EXCL "Performance indicator overview"
EXCL "Performance indicator"
EXCL "Owns"
MODE "Standard - including Performance indicators" from:"Standard"
INCL "Performance indicator overview"

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 217

Part IV

INCL "Performance indicator"

INCL "Owns"
MODE "All modeling objects" from:"Standard"
INCL "Performance indicator overview"
INCL "Performance indicator"
INCL "Owns"
MODE "Documentation" from:all no-modeling
INCL "Process"
INCL "Performance indicator overview"
INCL "Performance indicator"
MODELTYPE
"Document
model"
from:none
plural:"Document
models"
pos:3
simulateable bitmap:"db:\\doc_mod.bmp" attrrep:"BP Model Attributes"
INCL "Document"
INCL "Aggregation"
INCL "Note"
INCL "has Subdocument"
INCL "has Note"
MODE "Standard" from:all
MODE "Documentation" from:all no-modeling
EXCL "Aggregation"
EXCL "Note"
MODELTYPE "Use case diagram" from:none plural:"Use case diagrams" pos:4
simulateable bitmap:"db:\\uml_use.bmp" attrrep:"BP Model Attributes"
INCL "actor"
INCL "use case"
INCL "system boundary"
INCL "Note"
INCL "communicates"
INCL "contains"
INCL "uses"
INCL "extends"
INCL "has Note"
INCL "Is inside"
INCL "Generalisation"
MODE "Standard" from:all
MODE "Documentation" from:all no-modeling
EXCL "Note"
EXCL "system boundary"

not-

not-

ADONIS Standard WE Library 3.81:

MODELTYPE "Working environment model" from:all plural:"Working environment models"
pos:2 attrrep:"WE Model Attributes"
MODE "Standard" from:all
EXCL "Resource"
EXCL "Cost center"
MODE "Standard - including Resources" from:all
EXCL "Cost center"
MODE "Standard - with cost center" from:all
EXCL "Resource"
MODE "Organization" from:"Standard"
EXCL "Performer"
EXCL "Role"
MODE "Role diagram" from:"Standard"
EXCL "Organizational unit"
MODE "Resource diagram" from:"Standard"
INCL "Resource"
EXCL "Role"
EXCL "Belongs to"
EXCL "Is manager"
EXCL "Is subordinated"

page 218

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS administrators

MODE
MODE
INCL
INCL
INCL
INCL
INCL

"All modeling objects" from:all

"Documentation" from:none no-modeling
"Role"
"Organizational unit"
"Performer"
"Cost center"
"Resource"

2.10

Versioning format (Layout)

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

This attribute is not set in the ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81.

ADONIS Standard WE Library 3.81:

This attribute is not set in the ADONIS Standard WE Library 3.81.

2.11

Page layout (Layout)

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

LAYOUT "Full page (without header/footer)" PAGE w:p h:p

ADONIS Standard WE Library 3.81:

LAYOUT "Full page (without header/footer)" PAGE w:p h:p

2.12

Object arrangement (Layout)

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

DISABLE edit arrange
PROFILE "Standard (horizontal)" type:"std"
DEFMODELTYPE "Business process model"
DEFMODELTYPE "Company map"
MINCROSS upon upcount:10 dwnon dwncount:10
PENDULUM upon upcount:10 dwnon dwncount:10
FLIPFLY mirrhor toright
DOUBLEBP dist:3
CHNGSIZE vertdist:5 hordist:5
CLASSMODELTYPE "Business process model"
CLASSPAR "Subsequent" space:1 turn:0 priority:1
CLASSPAR "Sets" space:1 turn:1 priority:1
CLASSPAR "Uses" space:1 turn:0 priority:1
CLASSPAR "Sets variable" space:1 turn:0 priority:1
CLASSPAR "Uses" space:1 turn:0 priority:1
CLASSMODELTYPE "Company map"
CLASSPAR "Has process" space:1 turn:0 priority:1
PROFILE "Standard (vertikal)" type:"std"
DEFMODELTYPE "Business process model"
DEFMODELTYPE "Company map"
MINCROSS upon upcount:10 dwnon dwncount:10
PENDULUM upon upcount:10 dwnon dwncount:10
FLIPFLY dwn
2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 219

Part IV

DOUBLEBP dist:3
CHNGSIZE vertdist:5 hordist:5
CLASSMODELTYPE "Business process model"
CLASSPAR "Subsequent" space:1 turn:0 priority:1
CLASSPAR "Sets" space:1 turn:1 priority:1
CLASSPAR "Uses" space:1 turn:0 priority:1
CLASSPAR "Sets variable" space:1 turn:0 priority:1
CLASSPAR "Uses" space:1 turn:0 priority:1
CLASSMODELTYPE "Company map"
CLASSPAR "Has process" space:1 turn:0 priority:1
PROFILE "Hierarchy" type:"hier"
DEFMODELTYPE "Company map"
MINCROSS upon upcount:10 dwnon dwncount:10
PENDULUM upon upcount:10 dwnon dwncount:10
FLIPFLY dwn
DOUBLEBP dist:3
CHNGSIZE vertdist:5 hordist:4
CLASSMODELTYPE "Company map"
CLASSPAR "Has process" space:1 turn:0 priority:1
HIERPROFILE "BP-Hierarchy" use:"Hierarchy"
HIERMODELTYPE "Business process model" usetype:"Company map"
HIERATTRIB "Referenced subprocess"
HIERCLASS "Subprocess"
HIERUSECLASS "Process"
HIERUSEREL "Has process"
HIERUSEATTRIB "Referenced process"
ENUMPROFILE "Numbering"
ENUMMODELTYPE "Business process model"
ENUMREL "Subsequent"
ENUMCLASS "Activity" attrib:"Order" inflow
ENUMCLASS "Decision" attrib:"Order" inflow
ENUMCLASS "Parallelity" attrib:"Order" inflow
ENUMCLASS "Merging" attrib:"Order" inflow
ENUMCLASS "Subprocess" attrib:"Order" inflow
ENUMCLASS "Process start" attrib:"Order" inflow
ENUMCLASS "End" attrib:"Order" inflow
ENUMMODELTYPE "Company map"
ENUMREL "Has process" turn:0
ENUMCLASS "Process" attrib:"Order" inflow
ENUMMODELTYPE "Working environment model"
ENUMREL "Is subordinated" turn:0
ENUMCLASS "Organizational unit" attrib:"Order" inflow

ADONIS Standard WE Library 3.81:

This attribute is not set in the ADONIS Standard WE Library 3.81.

2.13

External coupling (Layout)

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

#===============================================
#---- INIT GLOBAL VARS
ON_EVENT "AppInitialized"
{
SETG process_stepper_bearbzeit_state:"activated"
SETG g_b_ps_printProcessingTime:1
SETG g_str_ps_speed:"medium"

page 220

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS administrators

SETG g_b_filesInDB:1
# declare and init label for const strings
SETG g_b_strings_initialized:0
# declare path variable to ADONIS
SETG g_path_ado:""
#Get path to ADONIS
CC "Application" GET_PATH
SET g_path_ado:(path)
#Erase trailing blanks
SET a:(LEN (g_path_ado) - 1)
WHILE (a > 0 AND (g_path_ado SUB a) = " ")
{
SET a:(a - 1)
}
IF (a >= 0)
{
SET g_path_ado:(copy (g_path_ado, 0, a + 1))
}
ELSE
{
CC "AdoScript" MSGWIN hide
CC "AdoScript" ERRORBOX ("The path to the customer directory could not be
determined. AdoScript-AddOn capabilities are not available.")
EXIT
}
# Read script for global settings
CC "AdoScript" FREAD file:("db:\\globals.asc")
# CC "AdoScript" FREAD file:(g_path_ado + "\\TEMP\\globals.asc")
IF (text = "")
{
CC "AdoScript" MSGWIN hide
CC "AdoScript" ERRORBOX ("AdoScript could not be initialized. AdoScript-AddOn
capabilities are not available.")
EXIT
}
# Init global settings
EXECUTE (text)
# Set Icon for HTML-generation
CC "Application" raw SET_ICON_CLICK_HDL component:"importexport" name:"HTML"
{
CC "AdoScript" FREAD file:(g_path_asc + "make_html.asc")
IF (text = "")
{
CC "AdoScript" ERRORBOX ("AdoScript could not be initialized. AdoScript-AddOn
capabilities are not available.")
EXIT
}
EXECUTE (text)
}
}
#===============================================
#--SIMULATION--#
#----------------------------------------------ITEM separator
simulation:"~Edit" pos2:4
#----------------------------------------------#----------------------------------------------ITEM "Activate manual random generator"
sub-of:"Random generator" pos2:4
simulation:"~Edit"

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 221

Part IV

#----------------------------------------------CC "AdoScript" FREAD file:(g_path_asc + "var_set_man.asc")

EXECUTE (text)
#----------------------------------------------ITEM "Activate automatic random generator"
sub-of:"Random generator"
simulation:"~Edit"
#----------------------------------------------CC "AdoScript" FREAD file:(g_path_asc + "var_set_aut.asc")
EXECUTE (text)
#--IMPORT/EXPORT--#
#----------------------------------------------ITEM "HTML generation"
importexport:"~Documentation" pos2:2
#----------------------------------------------CC "AdoScript" FREAD file:(g_path_asc + "make_html.asc")
EXECUTE (text)
#----------------------------------------------ITEM "Delta generation (HTML)..."
importexport:"~Documentation" pos2:3
#----------------------------------------------CC "AdoScript" FREAD file:(g_path_asc + "delta_gen2.asc")
EXECUTE (text)
#----------------------------------------------ITEM "Attribute and class filter..."
importexport:"~Documentation" pos2:13
#----------------------------------------------CC "Documentation" EXEC_ACFILTER attribute:"Attribute and class filter"
#
# [AGu 25.05.2004]
#----------------------------------------------#ITEM "XML Import (V. 2.0)..."
#
importexport:"~Model" pos2:3
#----------------------------------------------#CC "AdoScript" FREAD file:(g_path_asc + "xmlimp2.asc")
#EXECUTE (text)
#----------------------------------------------#ITEM "XML Export (V. 2.0)..."
#
importexport:"~Model" pos2:4
#----------------------------------------------#CC "AdoScript" FREAD file:(g_path_asc + "xmlexp2.asc")
#EXECUTE (text)
#----------------------------------------------#ITEM separator
#
importexport:"~Model" pos2:5
#----------------------------------------------#--MODELING--#
#----------------------------------------------ITEM "Inter model references (multiple models)..."
modeling:"~Model" pos2:14
#----------------------------------------------CC "AdoScript" FREAD file:(g_path_asc + "check_references_main.asc")
EXECUTE (text)
#----------------------------------------------ITEM "Select the language for visualizing the attributes..."
sub-of:"Views"
modeling:"~View" pos2:4
#----------------------------------------------CC "AdoScript" FREAD file:(g_path_asc + "lang_views.asc")
EXECUTE (text)
#-----------------------------------------------

page 222

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS administrators

ITEM separator
sub-of:"Update attributes"
modeling:"~Edit" pos3:1
#----------------------------------------------#----------------------------------------------ITEM "Reset object numbering"
sub-of:"Update attributes"
modeling:"~Edit" pos3:1
#----------------------------------------------CC "AdoScript" FREAD file:(g_path_asc + "reset_numbering.asc")
EXECUTE (text)
#----------------------------------------------ITEM "Show responsible role..."
sub-of:"Views"
modeling:"~View" pos2:4
#----------------------------------------------SETG g_strRoleOption:("Yes")
CC "AdoScript" FREAD file:(g_path_asc + "show_responsible_role.asc")
EXECUTE (text)
#----------------------------------------------ITEM "Hide responsible role..."
sub-of:"Views"
modeling:"~View" pos2:4
#----------------------------------------------SETG g_strRoleOption:("No")
CC "AdoScript" FREAD file:(g_path_asc + "show_responsible_role.asc")
EXECUTE (text)
#--EVALUATION--#
#----------------------------------------------ITEM "Current value initialisation..."
evaluation:"~Monitoring"
#----------------------------------------------CC "AdoScript" FREAD file:(g_path_asc + "resettargets.asc")
EXECUTE (text)
#----------------------------------------------ITEM "Current value calculation..."
evaluation:"~Monitoring"
#----------------------------------------------CC "AdoScript" FREAD file:(g_path_asc + "updactval.asc")
EXECUTE (text)
#--DIVERSE--#
#----------------------------------------------ITEM "ADONIS standard method"
acquisition:"~Help"
modeling:"~Help"
analysis:"~Help"
simulation:"~Help"
evaluation:"~Help"
importexport:"~Help"
#----------------------------------------------CC "Application" GET_PATH "adostd.hlp"
START ("\"" + path + "\"")
#----------------------------------------------ITEM separator acquisition:"~Help" pos2:5
ITEM separator modeling:"~Help" pos2:5
ITEM separator analysis:"~Help" pos2:5
ITEM separator simulation:"~Help" pos2:5
ITEM separator evaluation:"~Help" pos2:5
ITEM separator importexport:"~Help" pos2:5
#----------------------------------------------#-----------------------------------------------

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 223

Part IV

ITEM "BOC home page"

acquisition:"~Help" pos2:5
modeling:"~Help" pos2:5
analysis:"~Help" pos2:5
simulation:"~Help" pos2:5
evaluation:"~Help" pos2:5
importexport:"~Help" pos2:5
#----------------------------------------------START ("http://www.boc-eu.com")
#-- P R O C E S S - S T E P P E R --#
#----------------------------------------------# 1. Process animation
ITEM "1. Process animation" modeling:"~Process stepper"
#----------------------------------------------SETG parameter:(1)
CC "AdoScript" FREAD file:(g_path_asc + "stepper_animation.asc")
IF (text = "")
{
CC "AdoScript" INFOBOX "The function can not be executed. The required external
files are not available."
EXIT
}
EXECUTE (text)
#----------------------------------------------# 2. Play-back process animation
ITEM "2. Play-back process animation..." modeling:"~Process stepper"
#----------------------------------------------CC "AdoScript" FREAD file:(g_path_asc + "stepper_play.asc")
IF (text = "")
{
CC "AdoScript" INFOBOX "The function can not be executed. The required external
files are not available."
EXIT
}
EXECUTE (text)
#----------------------------------------------# 3. Remove marking of objects
ITEM "3. Remove marking of objects" modeling:"~Process stepper"
#----------------------------------------------CC "AdoScript" FREAD file:(g_path_asc + "undye_all_obj.asc")
IF (text = "")
{
CC "AdoScript" INFOBOX "The function can not be executed. The required external
files are not available."
EXIT
}
EXECUTE (text)
#----------------------------------------------ITEM separator modeling:"~Process stepper"
#----------------------------------------------#----------------------------------------------# Settings
ITEM "Settings..." modeling:"~Process stepper"
#----------------------------------------------SETG global_check:"yes"
SETG namegeneration_running:"yes"
CC "AdoScript" FREAD file:(g_path_asc + "stepper_settings_dlg.asc")
EXECUTE (text)
SETG global_check:"no"
SETG namegeneration_running:"no"
#-----------------------------------------------

page 224

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS administrators

# 5. Working time
#ITEM "Working time" sub-of:"Settings" modeling:"~Proze-Stepper"
#----------------------------------------------#SETG global_check:"yes"
#SETG namegeneration_running:"yes"
#CC "AdoScript" FREAD file:(g_path_asc + "stepper_settings_bearbzeit.asc")
#EXECUTE (text)
#SETG global_check:"no"
#SETG namegeneration_running:"no"
#--EXTERNAL COUPLING--#
#----------------------------------------------OBJECTIF
#----------------------------------------------CLASS "Activity"

ADONIS Standard WE Library 3.81:

This attribute is not set in the ADONIS Standard WE Library 3.81.

2.14

Connector marks - Numbers (Layout)

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

numeric

ADONIS Standard WE Library 3.81:

numeric

2.15

Connector marks - Graphical representation (Layout)

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

GRAPHREP
FILL color:aliceblue
RECTANGLE x:-.3cm y:-.3cm w:.6cm h:.6cm

ADONIS Standard WE Library 3.81:

GRAPHREP
FILL color:powderblue
RECTANGLE x:-.3cm y:-.3cm w:.6cm h:.6cm

2.16

Quick access bars - User defined (Layout)

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

yes

ADONIS Standard WE Library 3.81:

yes

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 225

Part IV

2.17

Quick access bars - Library bars (Layout)

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

This attribute is not set in the ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81.

ADONIS Standard WE Library 3.81:

This attribute is not set in the ADONIS Standard WE Library 3.81.

2.18

Configuration of documentation (Layout)

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

ATTRIBUTEMODI "@Documentation@@Doku@@Documentation with simulation data@@DokuSim@"
#@Cockpit@@Cockpit
EXPORT "RTF generation"
smarticon:rtf
menuname: "~RTF generation..."
filedescription: "RTF files"
fileextension: "*.rtf"
filename:attribute: "filename"
temp1: "tempfilename"
requirefile1:"db:\\std2rtf4.dsl"
requirefile2:"db:\\ger2rtf4.dsl"
requirefile3:"db:\\eng2rtf4.dsl"
requirefile4:"db:\\ado_utl.dsl"
requirefile5:"db:\\boclogo.bmp"
requirefile6:"db:\\make_rtf.asc"
copy1: "db:\\boclogo.bmp"
SOURCE "Model2SGML"
filename:attribute: "tempfilename"
basename:attribute: "filename"
libraryspecific:attribute: "Apply model type specific settings"
subprocesses:attribute: "Display subprocesses"
acfilter:attribute: "Attribute and class filter"
LIBRARY
gfxformat:attribute: "Graphic format for RTF"
gfxdpi: 96.000000
notebookattr:attribute: "Attribute mode"
graphics:attribute: "Create graphics"
gfxorientation:attribute: "Orientation"
gfxlayout:attribute: "Page layout"
mode:attribute: "Mode"
gfxmode:attribute: "Graphic file mode"
LIBRARY "Company map"
gfxformat:attribute: "Graphic format for RTF (CM)"
gfxdpi: 96.000000
notebookattr:attribute: "Attribute mode (CM)"
graphics:attribute: "Create graphics (CM)"
gfxorientation:attribute: "Orientation (CM)"
gfxlayout:attribute: "Page layout (CM)"
mode:attribute: "Mode (CM)"
gfxmode:attribute: "Graphic file mode (CM)"
LIBRARY "Business process model"
gfxformat:attribute: "Graphic format for RTF (BP)"
gfxdpi: 96.000000
notebookattr:attribute: "Attribute mode (BP)"

page 226

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS administrators

graphics:attribute: "Create graphics (BP)"

gfxorientation:attribute: "Orientation (BP)"
gfxlayout:attribute: "Page layout (BP)"
mode:attribute: "Mode (BP)"
gfxmode:attribute: "Graphic file mode (BP)"
LIBRARY "Working environment model"
gfxformat:attribute: "Graphic format for RTF (WE)"
gfxdpi: 96.000000
notebookattr:attribute: "Attribute mode (WE)"
graphics:attribute: "Create graphics (WE)"
gfxorientation:attribute: "Orientation (WE)"
gfxlayout:attribute: "Page layout (WE)"
mode:attribute: "Mode (WE)"
gfxmode:attribute: "Graphic file mode (WE)"
LIBRARY "Document model"
gfxformat:attribute: "Graphic format for RTF (DOC)"
gfxdpi: 96.000000
notebookattr:attribute: "Attribute mode (DOC)"
graphics:attribute: "Create graphics (DOC)"
gfxorientation:attribute: "Orientation (DOC)"
gfxlayout:attribute: "Page layout (DOC)"
mode:attribute: "Mode (DOC)"
gfxmode:attribute: "Graphic file mode (DOC)"
LIBRARY "Use case diagram"
gfxformat:attribute: "Graphic format for RTF (UC)"
gfxdpi: 96.000000
notebookattr:attribute: "Attribute mode (UC)"
graphics:attribute: "Create graphics (UC)"
gfxorientation:attribute: "Orientation (UC)"
gfxlayout:attribute: "Page layout (UC)"
mode:attribute: "Mode (UC)"
gfxmode:attribute: "Graphic file mode (UC)"
SOURCE "UserVariable"
filename:attribute:"tempfilename"
var1:attribute:"Language"
SOURCE "AdoScript"
name: "Jade Converter"
var1:attribute: "tempfilename"
var2:attribute: "filename"
var3:attribute: "homedir"
{
SETG filename:(filename)
SETG homedir:(homedir)
SETG tempfilename:(tempfilename)
CC "AdoScript" FREAD file:("db:\\make_rtf.asc")
EXECUTE (text)
}
EXPORT "HTML generation"
smarticon:html
visible:0
menuname: "~HTML generation..."
filedescription: "HTML files"
fileextension: "*.htm"
filename:attribute: "filename"
temp1: "tempfilename"
requirefile1:"db:\\help.htm"
requirefile2:"db:\\help_men_eng.htm"
requirefile3:"db:\\boclogo.png"
requirefile4:"db:\\instr.gif"
requirefile5:"db:\\instr_en.gif"
requirefile6:"db:\\help_pnt.gif"

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 227

Part IV

requirefile7:"db:\\design.gif"
requirefile8:"db:\\resize.gif"
requirefile9:"db:\\std2htm8.dsl"
requirefile10:"db:\\ger2htm8.dsl"
requirefile11:"db:\\eng2htm8.dsl"
requirefile12:"db:\\make-x-fi.dsl"
requirefile13:"db:\\ado_utl.dsl"
requirefile14:"db:\\tree.jar"
requirefile15:"db:\\BOCJavaVM.jar"
requirefile16:"db:\\BOCTree.jar"
requirefile17:"db:\\applet.js"
requirefile18:"db:\\parallel.js"
requirefile19:"db:\\std_func.js"
requirefile20:"db:\\browser_functions.js"
requirefile21:"db:\\ievminclude.js"
requirefile22:"db:\\svg_functions.js"
requirefile23:"db:\\mkmap.exe"
requirefile24:"db:\\make_html.asc"
requirefile25:"db:\\header1.htm"
requirefile26:"db:\\header2.htm"
requirefile27:"db:\\search_eng.htm"
requirefile28:"db:\\search_pnt.gif"
requirefile29:"db:\\print_pnt.gif"
requirefile30:"db:\\jumper_action.gif"
requirefile31:"db:\\transred.gif"
requirefile32:"db:\\transblue.gif"
requirefile33:"db:\\mo.css"
requirefile34:"db:\\help.css"
requirefile35:"db:\\boclogowhite.png"
requirefile36:"db:\\help_men_ger.htm"
requirefile37:"db:\\search_ger.htm"
requirefile38:"db:\\blue.htm"
requirefile39:"db:\\menu_funcs.js"
copy1:"db:\\help.htm"
copy2:"db:\\help_men_eng.htm"
copy3:"db:\\boclogo.png"
copy4:"db:\\instr.gif"
copy5:"db:\\instr_en.gif"
copy6:"db:\\help_pnt.gif"
copy7:"db:\\design.gif"
copy8:"db:\\resize.gif"
copy9:"db:\\tree.jar"
copy10:"db:\\BOCJavaVM.jar"
copy11:"db:\\BOCTree.jar"
copy12:"db:\\applet.js"
copy13:"db:\\parallel.js"
copy14:"db:\\std_func.js"
copy15:"db:\\browser_functions.js"
copy16:"db:\\ievminclude.js"
copy17:"db:\\svg_functions.js"
copy18:"db:\\header1.htm"
copy19:"db:\\header2.htm"
copy20:"db:\\search_eng.htm"
copy21:"db:\\search_pnt.gif"
copy22:"db:\\print_pnt.gif"
copy23:"db:\\jumper_action.gif"
copy24:"db:\\transred.gif"
copy25:"db:\\transblue.gif"
copy26:"db:\\mo.css"
copy27:"db:\\help.css"
copy28:"db:\\boclogowhite.png"

page 228

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS administrators

copy29:"db:\\help_men_ger.htm"
copy30:"db:\\search_ger.htm"
copy31:"db:\\blue.htm"
copy32:"db:\\std2htm8.dsl"
copy33:"db:\\ger2htm8.dsl"
copy34:"db:\\eng2htm8.dsl"
copy35:"db:\\make-x-fi.dsl"
copy36:"db:\\ado_utl.dsl"
copy37:"db:\\menu_funcs.js"
SOURCE "Model2SGML"
filename:attribute: "tempfilename"
basename:attribute: "filename"
libraryspecific:attribute: "Apply model type specific settings"
subprocesses:attribute: "Display subprocesses"
acfilter:attribute: "Attribute and class filter"
copydocuments:attribute: "Copy referenced documents"
#copydocuments:"documents\\"
LIBRARY
gfxformat:attribute: "Graphic format for HTML"
gfxdpi: 75.000000
notebookattr:attribute: "Attribute mode"
graphics:attribute: "Create graphics"
gfxorientation:"do not change"
gfxlayout:"do not split graphic files"
gfxmode:attribute: "Graphic file mode"
mode:attribute: "Mode"
LIBRARY "Company map"
gfxformat:attribute: "Graphic format for HTML (CM)"
gfxdpi: 100.000000
notebookattr:attribute: "Attribute mode (CM)"
graphics:attribute: "Create graphics (CM)"
gfxorientation:"do not change"
gfxlayout:"do not split graphic files"
mode:attribute: "Mode (CM)"
gfxmode:attribute: "Graphic file mode (CM)"
LIBRARY "Business process model"
gfxformat:attribute: "Graphic format for HTML (BP)"
gfxdpi: 75.000000
notebookattr:attribute: "Attribute mode (BP)"
graphics:attribute: "Create graphics (BP)"
gfxorientation:"do not change"
gfxlayout:"do not split graphic files"
mode:attribute: "Mode (BP)"
gfxmode:attribute: "Graphic file mode (BP)"
LIBRARY "Working environment model"
gfxformat:attribute: "Graphic format for HTML (WE)"
gfxdpi: 75.000000
notebookattr:attribute: "Attribute mode (WE)"
graphics:attribute: "Create graphics (WE)"
gfxorientation:"do not change"
gfxlayout:"do not split graphic files"
mode:attribute: "Mode (WE)"
gfxmode:attribute: "Graphic file mode (WE)"
LIBRARY "Document model"
gfxformat:attribute: "Graphic format for HTML (DOC)"
gfxdpi: 75.000000
notebookattr:attribute: "Attribute mode (DOC)"
graphics:attribute: "Create graphics (DOC)"
gfxorientation:"do not change"
gfxlayout:"do not split graphic files"
mode:attribute: "Mode (DOC)"

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 229

Part IV

gfxmode:attribute: "Graphic file mode (DOC)"

LIBRARY "Use case diagram"
gfxformat:attribute: "Graphic format for HTML (UC)"
gfxdpi: 75.000000
notebookattr:attribute: "Attribute mode (UC)"
graphics:attribute: "Create graphics (UC)"
gfxorientation:"do not change"
gfxlayout:"do not split graphic files"
mode:attribute: "Mode (UC)"
gfxmode:attribute: "Graphic file mode (UC)"
SOURCE "ModelGroups"
filename:attribute:"tempfilename"
exportall:0
SOURCE "UserVariable"
filename:attribute:"tempfilename"
var1:attribute:"Language"
var2:attribute:"str_TopModelID"
SOURCE "AdoScript"
name: "Jade Converter"
var1:attribute: "tempfilename"
var2:attribute: "filename"
var3:attribute: "homedir"
{
SETG filename:(filename)
SETG homedir:(homedir)
SETG tempfilename:(tempfilename)
SET nPos:(bsearch (filename , "\\", -1))
#when char is found save path and file name into different vars
IF (nPos > 0)
{
SET dest_path:(copy (filename, 0, nPos))
SET file_name:(copy (filename, nPos, LEN (filename) - 1))
}
ELSE
{
SET dest_path:(filename)
SET file_name:(filename)
}
CC "AdoScript" FCOPY from:(tempfilename) to:(dest_path + "\\out0.sgm")
}
EXPORT "Delta generation (Menu)"
visible:0
menuname: "Delta generation (Menu)"
filedescription: "HTML files"
fileextension: "*.htm"
filename:attribute: "filename"
temp1: "tempfilename"
requirefile1:"db:\\help.htm"
requirefile2:"db:\\help_men_ger.htm"
requirefile3:"db:\\boclogo.png"
requirefile4:"db:\\instr.gif"
requirefile5:"db:\\instr_en.gif"
requirefile6:"db:\\help_pnt.gif"
requirefile7:"db:\\design.gif"
requirefile8:"db:\\resize.gif"
requirefile9:"db:\\dmen_std2htm8.dsl"
requirefile10:"db:\\dmen_ger2htm8.dsl"
requirefile11:"db:\\dmen_eng2htm8.dsl"
requirefile12:"db:\\dmod_std2htm8.dsl"
requirefile13:"db:\\dmod_ger2htm8.dsl"
requirefile14:"db:\\dmod_eng2htm8.dsl"

page 230

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS administrators

requirefile15:"db:\\make-x-fi.dsl"
requirefile16:"db:\\ado_utl.dsl"
requirefile17:"db:\\tree.jar"
requirefile18:"db:\\BOCJavaVM.jar"
requirefile19:"db:\\BOCTree.jar"
requirefile20:"db:\\applet.js"
requirefile21:"db:\\parallel.js"
requirefile22:"db:\\std_func.js"
requirefile23:"db:\\browser_functions.js"
requirefile24:"db:\\ievminclude.js"
requirefile25:"db:\\svg_functions.js"
requirefile26:"db:\\mkmap.exe"
requirefile27:"db:\\clean_dir.bat"
requirefile28:"db:\\make_delta.asc"
requirefile29:"db:\\help_men_eng.htm"
requirefile30:"db:\\header1.htm"
requirefile31:"db:\\header2.htm"
requirefile32:"db:\\boclogowhite.png"
requirefile33:"db:\\search_ger.htm"
requirefile34:"db:\\search_eng.htm"
requirefile35:"db:\\search_pnt.gif"
requirefile36:"db:\\print_pnt.gif"
requirefile37:"db:\\mo.css"
requirefile38:"db:\\help.css"
requirefile39:"db:\\jumper_action.gif"
requirefile40:"db:\\transred.gif"
requirefile41:"db:\\transblue.gif"
requirefile42:"db:\\dtree_std2htm8.dsl"
requirefile43:"db:\\blue.htm"
requirefile44:"db:\\frameset.htm"
copy1:"db:\\help.htm"
copy2:"db:\\help_men_ger.htm"
copy3:"db:\\boclogo.png"
copy4:"db:\\instr.gif"
copy5:"db:\\instr_en.gif"
copy6:"db:\\help_pnt.gif"
copy7:"db:\\design.gif"
copy8:"db:\\resize.gif"
copy9:"db:\\tree.jar"
copy10:"db:\\BOCJavaVM.jar"
copy11:"db:\\BOCTree.jar"
copy12:"db:\\applet.js"
copy13:"db:\\parallel.js"
copy14:"db:\\std_func.js"
copy15:"db:\\browser_functions.js"
copy16:"db:\\ievminclude.js"
copy17:"db:\\mkmap.exe"
copy18:"db:\\clean_dir.bat"
copy19:"db:\\help_men_eng.htm"
copy20:"db:\\header1.htm"
copy21:"db:\\header2.htm"
copy22:"db:\\boclogowhite.png"
copy23:"db:\\search_ger.htm"
copy24:"db:\\search_eng.htm"
copy25:"db:\\search_pnt.gif"
copy26:"db:\\print_pnt.gif"
copy27:"db:\\mo.css"
copy28:"db:\\help.css"
copy29:"db:\\jumper_action.gif"
copy30:"db:\\transred.gif"
copy31:"db:\\transblue.gif"

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 231

Part IV

copy32:"db:\\blue.htm"
copy33:"db:\\frameset.htm"
copy34:"db:\\svg_functions.js"
SOURCE "Model2SGML"
filename:attribute: "tempfilename"
basename:attribute: "filename"
libraryspecific:attribute: "Apply model type specific settings"
subprocesses:attribute: "Display subprocesses"
acfilter:attribute: "Attribute and class filter"
LIBRARY
gfxformat:attribute: "Graphic format for HTML"
gfxdpi: 75.000000
notebookattr:attribute: "Attribute mode"
graphics:0
gfxorientation:"do not change"
gfxlayout:"do not split graphic files"
mode:attribute: "Mode"
gfxmode:attribute: "Graphic file mode"
LIBRARY "Company map"
gfxformat:attribute: "Graphic format for HTML (CM)"
gfxdpi: 75.000000
notebookattr:attribute: "Attribute mode (CM)"
graphics:0
gfxorientation:"do not change"
gfxlayout:"do not split graphic files"
mode:attribute: "Mode (CM)"
gfxmode:attribute: "Graphic file mode (CM)"
LIBRARY "Business process model"
gfxformat:attribute: "Graphic format for HTML (BP)"
gfxdpi: 75.000000
notebookattr:attribute: "Attribute mode (BP)"
graphics:0
gfxorientation:"do not change"
gfxlayout:"do not split graphic files"
mode:attribute: "Mode (BP)"
gfxmode:attribute: "Graphic file mode (BP)"
LIBRARY "Working environment model"
gfxformat:attribute: "Graphic format for HTML (WE)"
gfxdpi: 75.000000
notebookattr:attribute: "Attribute mode (WE)"
graphics:0
gfxorientation:"do not change"
gfxlayout:"do not split graphic files"
mode:attribute: "Mode (WE)"
gfxmode:attribute: "Graphic file mode (WE)"
LIBRARY "Document model"
gfxformat:attribute: "Graphic format for HTML (DOC)"
gfxdpi: 75.000000
notebookattr:attribute: "Attribute mode (DOC)"
graphics:0
gfxorientation:"do not change"
gfxlayout:"do not split graphic files"
mode:attribute: "Mode (DOC)"
gfxmode:attribute: "Graphic file mode (DOC)"
LIBRARY "Use case diagram"
gfxformat:attribute: "Graphic format for HTML (UC)"
gfxdpi: 75.000000
notebookattr:attribute: "Attribute mode (UC)"
graphics:0
gfxorientation:"do not change"
gfxlayout:"do not split graphic files"

page 232

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS administrators

mode:attribute: "Mode (UC)"

gfxmode:attribute: "Graphic file mode (UC)"
SOURCE "ModelGroups"
filename:attribute:"tempfilename"
exportall:0
SOURCE "UserVariable"
filename:attribute:"tempfilename"
var1:attribute:"Language"
SOURCE "AdoScript"
name: "Jade Converter"
var1:attribute: "tempfilename"
var2:attribute: "filename"
var3:attribute: "homedir"
{
SETG filename:(filename)
SETG homedir:(homedir)
SETG tempfilename:(tempfilename)
CC "AdoScript" FREAD file:("db:\\make_delta.asc")
EXECUTE (text)
}
EXPORT "Delta generation (Model)"
visible:0
menuname: "Delta generation (Model)"
filedescription: "HTML files"
fileextension: "*.htm"
filename:attribute: "filename"
temp1: "tempfilename"
requirefile1:"db:\\help.htm"
requirefile2:"db:\\help_men_ger.htm"
requirefile3:"db:\\boclogo.png"
requirefile4:"db:\\instr.gif"
requirefile5:"db:\\instr_en.gif"
requirefile6:"db:\\help_pnt.gif"
requirefile7:"db:\\design.gif"
requirefile8:"db:\\resize.gif"
requirefile9:"db:\\dmen_std2htm8.dsl"
requirefile10:"db:\\dmen_ger2htm8.dsl"
requirefile11:"db:\\dmen_eng2htm8.dsl"
requirefile12:"db:\\dmod_std2htm8.dsl"
requirefile13:"db:\\dmod_ger2htm8.dsl"
requirefile14:"db:\\dmod_eng2htm8.dsl"
requirefile15:"db:\\make-x-fi.dsl"
requirefile16:"db:\\ado_utl.dsl"
requirefile17:"db:\\tree.jar"
requirefile18:"db:\\BOCJavaVM.jar"
requirefile19:"db:\\BOCTree.jar"
requirefile20:"db:\\applet.js"
requirefile21:"db:\\parallel.js"
requirefile22:"db:\\std_func.js"
requirefile23:"db:\\browser_functions.js"
requirefile24:"db:\\ievminclude.js"
requirefile25:"db:\\mkmap.exe"
requirefile26:"db:\\clean_dir.bat"
requirefile27:"db:\\make_delta.asc"
requirefile28:"db:\\header1.htm"
requirefile29:"db:\\header2.htm"
requirefile30:"db:\\help_men_eng.htm"
requirefile31:"db:\\boclogowhite.png"
requirefile32:"db:\\search_ger.htm"
requirefile33:"db:\\search_eng.htm"
requirefile34:"db:\\search_pnt.gif"

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 233

Part IV

requirefile35:"db:\\print_pnt.gif"
requirefile36:"db:\\mo.css"
requirefile37:"db:\\help.css"
requirefile38:"db:\\jumper_action.gif"
requirefile39:"db:\\transred.gif"
requirefile40:"db:\\transblue.gif"
SOURCE "Model2SGML"
filename:attribute: "tempfilename"
basename:attribute: "filename"
libraryspecific:attribute: "Apply model type specific settings"
subprocesses:attribute: "Display subprocesses"
acfilter:attribute: "Attribute and class filter"
LIBRARY
gfxformat:attribute: "Graphic format for HTML"
gfxdpi: 75.000000
notebookattr:attribute: "Attribute mode"
graphics:attribute: "Create graphics"
gfxorientation:"do not change"
gfxlayout:"do not split graphic files"
mode:attribute: "Mode"
gfxmode:attribute: "Graphic file mode"
LIBRARY "Company map"
gfxformat:attribute: "Graphic format for HTML (CM)"
gfxdpi: 75.000000
notebookattr:attribute: "Attribute mode (CM)"
graphics:attribute: "Create graphics (CM)"
gfxorientation:"do not change"
gfxlayout:"do not split graphic files"
mode:attribute: "Mode (CM)"
gfxmode:attribute: "Graphic file mode (CM)"
LIBRARY "Business process model"
gfxformat:attribute: "Graphic format for HTML (BP)"
gfxdpi: 75.000000
notebookattr:attribute: "Attribute mode (BP)"
graphics:attribute: "Create graphics (BP)"
gfxorientation:"do not change"
gfxlayout:"do not split graphic files"
mode:attribute: "Mode (BP)"
gfxmode:attribute: "Graphic file mode (BP)"
LIBRARY "Working environment model"
gfxformat:attribute: "Graphic format for HTML (WE)"
gfxdpi: 75.000000
notebookattr:attribute: "Attribute mode (WE)"
graphics:attribute: "Create graphics (WE)"
gfxorientation:"do not change"
gfxlayout:"do not split graphic files"
mode:attribute: "Mode (WE)"
gfxmode:attribute: "Graphic file mode (WE)"
LIBRARY "Document model"
gfxformat:attribute: "Graphic format for HTML (DOC)"
gfxdpi: 75.000000
notebookattr:attribute: "Attribute mode (DOC)"
graphics:attribute: "Create graphics (DOC)"
gfxorientation:"do not change"
gfxlayout:"do not split graphic files"
mode:attribute: "Mode (DOC)"
gfxmode:attribute: "Graphic file mode (DOC)"
LIBRARY "Use case diagram"
gfxformat:attribute: "Graphic format for HTML (UC)"
gfxdpi: 75.000000
notebookattr:attribute: "Attribute mode (UC)"

page 234

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS administrators

graphics:attribute: "Create graphics (UC)"

gfxorientation:"do not change"
gfxlayout:"do not split graphic files"
mode:attribute: "Mode (UC)"
gfxmode:attribute: "Graphic file mode (UC)"
SOURCE "ModelGroups"
filename:attribute:"tempfilename"
exportall:0
SOURCE "UserVariable"
filename:attribute:"tempfilename"
var1:attribute:"Language"
SOURCE "AdoScript"
name: "Jade Converter"
var1:attribute: "tempfilename"
var2:attribute: "filename"
var3:attribute: "homedir"
{
SETG filename:(filename)
SETG homedir:(homedir)
SETG tempfilename:(tempfilename)
CC "AdoScript" FREAD file:("db:\\make_delta.asc")
EXECUTE (text)
}
EXPORT "Load settings ..."
visible:0
menuname:"Load settings ..."
filedescription:"HTML-Files"
fileextension:"*.htm"
filename:attribute:"filename"
DIALOG
notebook:"NOTEBOOK
CHAPTER \"General Settings\"
ATTR \"Apply model type specific settings\" ctrltype:check
GROUP \"Attribute settings\"
ATTR \"Language\" ctrltype:dropdown
ATTR \"Mode\" ctrltype:dropdown
ATTR \"Attribute mode\" ctrltype:dropdown
ATTR \"Attribute and class filter\" dialog:acfilter
ENDGROUP
GROUP \"Graphic settings\"
ATTR \"Create graphics\" ctrltype:check
ATTR \"Graphic file mode\" ctrltype:dropdown
ENDGROUP
GROUP \"Settings for RTF\"
ATTR \"Graphic format for RTF\" ctrltype:dropdown
ATTR \"Page layout\" ctrltype:dropdown
ATTR \"Orientation\" ctrltype:dropdown
ENDGROUP
GROUP \"Settings for HTML\"
ATTR \"Graphic format for HTML\" ctrltype:dropdown
ATTR \"Model tree\" ctrltype:dropdown
ATTR \"Copy referenced documents\" ctrltype:check unchecked-value:\"\"
value:\"documents\\\\\\\\\"
ENDGROUP
CHAPTER \"Company map\"
GROUP \"Attribute settings in company maps\"
ATTR \"Mode (CM)\" ctrltype:dropdown
ATTR \"Attribute mode (CM)\" ctrltype:dropdown
ENDGROUP
GROUP \"Graphic settings for company maps\"
ATTR \"Create graphics (CM)\" ctrltype:check

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

checked-

page 235

Part IV

ATTR \"Graphic file mode (CM)\" ctrltype:dropdown

ENDGROUP
GROUP \"Settings for RTF (CM)\"
ATTR \"Graphic format for RTF (CM)\" ctrltype:dropdown
ATTR \"Page layout (CM)\" ctrltype:dropdown
ATTR \"Orientation (CM)\" ctrltype:dropdown
ENDGROUP
GROUP \"Settings for HTML (CM)\"
ATTR \"Graphic format for HTML (CM)\" ctrltype:dropdown
ENDGROUP
CHAPTER \"Business process model\"
GROUP \"Attribute settings in business process models\"
ATTR \"Mode (BP)\" ctrltype:dropdown
ATTR \"Attribute mode (BP)\" ctrltype:dropdown
ENDGROUP
GROUP \"Graphic settings for business process models\"
ATTR \"Create graphics (BP)\" ctrltype:check
ATTR \"Graphic file mode (BP)\" ctrltype:dropdown
ENDGROUP
GROUP \"Settings for RTF (BP)\"
ATTR \"Graphic format for RTF (BP)\" ctrltype:dropdown
ATTR \"Page layout (BP)\" ctrltype:dropdown
ATTR \"Orientation (BP)\" ctrltype:dropdown
ENDGROUP
GROUP \"Settings for HTML (BP)\"
ATTR \"Graphic format for HTML (BP)\" ctrltype:dropdown
ENDGROUP
CHAPTER \"Working environment model\"
GROUP \"Attribute settings in working environment models\"
ATTR \"Mode (WE)\" ctrltype:dropdown
ATTR \"Attribute mode (WE)\" ctrltype:dropdown
ENDGROUP
GROUP \"Graphic settings for working environment models\"
ATTR \"Create graphics (WE)\" ctrltype:check
ATTR \"Graphic file mode (WE)\" ctrltype:dropdown
ENDGROUP
GROUP \"Settings for RTF (WE)\"
ATTR \"Graphic format for RTF (WE)\" ctrltype:dropdown
ATTR \"Page layout (WE)\" ctrltype:dropdown
ATTR \"Orientation (WE)\" ctrltype:dropdown
ENDGROUP
GROUP \"Settings for HTML (WE)\"
ATTR \"Graphic format for HTML (WE)\" ctrltype:dropdown
ENDGROUP
CHAPTER \"Document model\"
GROUP \"Attribute settings in document models\"
ATTR \"Mode (DOC)\" ctrltype:dropdown
ATTR \"Attribute mode (DOC)\" ctrltype:dropdown
ENDGROUP
GROUP \"Graphic settings for document models\"
ATTR \"Create graphics (DOC)\" ctrltype:check
ATTR \"Graphic file mode (DOC)\" ctrltype:dropdown
ENDGROUP
GROUP \"Settings for RTF (DOC)\"
ATTR \"Graphic format for RTF (DOC)\" ctrltype:dropdown
ATTR \"Page layout (DOC)\" ctrltype:dropdown
ATTR \"Orientation (DOC)\" ctrltype:dropdown
ENDGROUP
GROUP \"Settings for HTML (DOC)\"
ATTR \"Graphic format for HTML (DOC)\" ctrltype:dropdown
ENDGROUP

page 236

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS administrators

CHAPTER \"Use case diagram\"

GROUP \"Attribute settings in use case diagrams\"
ATTR \"Mode (UC)\" ctrltype:dropdown
ATTR \"Attribute mode (UC)\" ctrltype:dropdown
ENDGROUP
GROUP \"Graphic settings for use case diagrams\"
ATTR \"Create graphics (UC)\" ctrltype:check
ATTR \"Graphic file mode (UC)\" ctrltype:dropdown
ENDGROUP
GROUP \"Settings for RTF (UC)\"
ATTR \"Graphic format for RTF (UC)\" ctrltype:dropdown
ATTR \"Page layout (UC)\" ctrltype:dropdown
ATTR \"Orientation (UC)\" ctrltype:dropdown
ENDGROUP
GROUP \"Settings for HTML (UC)\"
ATTR \"Graphic format for HTML (UC)\" ctrltype:dropdown
ENDGROUP
"

ADONIS Standard WE Library 3.81:

This attribute is not set in the ADONIS Standard WE Library 3.81.

2.19

Default settings (Layout)

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

GRID snap:on visible:off w:0.50cm h:0.50cm

ADONIS Standard WE Library 3.81:

GRID snap:on visible:off w:0.5cm h:0.5cm

2.20

Relation analysis (Analysis)

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

RELATIONTABLE "~Activity-Resource table"
modeltype:"Business process model"
fromclass:"Activity"
fromattribute:"Name"
toclass:"Resource"
toattribute:"Name"
relation:"Uses"
RELATIONTABLE "Activity-~Document table"
modeltype:"Business process model"
fromclass:"Activity"
fromattribute:"Name"
tomodeltype:"Document model"
toclass:"Document"
toattribute:"Name"
FOREACHFROM
EXPR " --> \"Referenced documents\""
RELATIONTABLE "Activity-~Input document table"
modeltype:"Business process model"
fromclass:"Activity"
fromattribute:"Name"

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 237

Part IV

tomodeltype:"Document model"
toclass:"Document"
toattribute:"Name"
FOREACHFROM
EXPR " --> \"Input\""
RELATIONTABLE "Activity-~Output document table"
modeltype:"Business process model"
fromclass:"Activity"
fromattribute:"Name"
tomodeltype:"Document model"
toclass:"Document"
toattribute:"Name"
FOREACHFROM
EXPR " --> \"Output\""
RELATIONTABLE "~Variable-Activity table"
modeltype:"Business process model"
fromclass:"Variable"
fromattribute:"Name"
toclass:"Activity"
toattribute:"Name"
FOREACHFROM
EXPR "<- \"Sets variable\" -> \"Sets\""

ADONIS Standard WE Library 3.81:

RELATIONTABLE "~Role table"
fromclass:"Performer"
fromattribute:"Name"
toclass:"Role"
toattribute:"Name"
relation:"Has role"
RELATIONTABLE "~Organizational hierarchy table"
fromclass:"Organizational unit"
fromattribute:"Name"
toclass:"Organizational unit"
toattribute:"Name"
relation:"Is subordinated"

2.21

Simulation definition - Simtext (Simulation)

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

SIMTEXT
bp: "Business process"
cycletime: "Cycle time"
activity: "Activity"
number: "Number"
actor: "Performer"
perscost: "Personnel costs"
resource: "Resource"
rescost: "Resource costs"

ADONIS Standard WE Library 3.81:

This attribute is not set in the ADONIS Standard WE Library 3.81.

page 238

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS administrators

2.22

Simulation definition - Simmapping (Simulation)

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

SIMOPTION
name: "Standard"
activity: "Activity"
helptext: "The standard input parameters contain the activity attributes 'Execution
time', 'Waiting time', 'Resting time', 'Transport time' and 'Costs'."
executiontime: "Execution time"
waitingtime: "Waiting time"
restingtime: "Resting time"
transporttime: "Transport time"
userattribute-1: "Costs"
processcall: "Subprocess" subperformerattr:"Performer"
SIMOPTION
name: "Without resting and transport time"
activity: "Activity"
helptext: "The activity attributes 'Resting time' and 'Transport time' are not
contained within this set of input parameters."
executiontime: "Execution time"
waitingtime: "Waiting time"
userattribute-1: "Costs"
processcall: "Subprocess" subperformerattr:"Performer"
SIMCLASSES
bp-1: "Activity"
bp-2: "Subprocess"
we-1: "Performer"
we-2: "Resource"
we-3: "Organizational unit"
we-4: "Role"

ADONIS Standard WE Library 3.81:

SIMOPTION undefined

2.23

Simulation definition - Sim result mapping (Simulation)

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

PROCESSSTART "Process start"
fixedinfo:"Info on results"
fixedcycletime:"Aggregated cycle time"
fixedpersonalcosts:"Aggregated personnel costs"
FROMCLASS "Activity"
fromattribute:"Costs"
resultattribute:"Aggregated costs"
FROMCLASS "Activity"
fromattribute:"Execution time"
resultattribute:"Aggregated execution time"
FROMCLASS "Activity"
fromattribute:"Waiting time"
resultattribute:"Aggregated waiting time"
FROMCLASS "Activity"
fromattribute:"Transport time"
resultattribute:"Aggregated transport time"
FROMCLASS "Activity"
fromattribute:"Resting time"

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 239

Part IV

resultattribute:"Aggregated resting time"

ACTIVITY "Activity"
fixedinfo:"Info on results"
fixednumber:"Number"
fixedpersonalcosts:"Aggregated personnel costs"
FROMCLASS "Activity"
fromattribute:"Execution time"
resultattribute:"Aggregated execution time"
FROMCLASS "Activity"
fromattribute:"Waiting time"
resultattribute:"Aggregated waiting time"
FROMCLASS "Activity"
fromattribute:"Transport time"
resultattribute:"Aggregated transport time"
FROMCLASS "Activity"
fromattribute:"Resting time"
resultattribute:"Aggregated resting time"
FROMCLASS "Activity"
fromattribute:"Costs"
resultattribute:"Aggregated costs"

ADONIS Standard WE Library 3.81:

PERSON "Performer"
fixedinfo:"Ergebnisinfo"
fixedworkload:"Belastung"
fixedcapacity:"Auslastung"
fixedpersonalcosts:"Personalkosten"

2.24

Simulation definition - Variable check (Simulation)

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

on

ADONIS Standard WE Library 3.81:

on

2.25

Agent definition (Simulation)

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

AGENT "Standard"
auto-buildsum
objects: "<\"Activity\"> OR <\"Subprocess\">"
allowed-modeltype-1: "Business process model"
infotext: "Computes the standard results of the simulation. The computation can be
limited to subprocesses or to part processes. Note: The capacity will only be
displayed \"per

ADONIS Standard WE Library 3.81:

This attribute is not set in the ADONIS WE Library 3.81.

page 240

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Information for ADONIS administrators

2.26

Enterprise time - days per year (Simulation)

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

170,000000

ADONIS Standard WE Library 3.81:

0,000000

2.27

Enterprise time - hours per day (Simulation)

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

8,000000

ADONIS Standard WE Library 3.81:

0,000000

2.28

Process cost analysis - CCC Mapping (Evaluation)

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

CCCLASS
costcenter: "Cost center"
relcount: "Is charged to"
relmanager: "Is cost center manager"
SYNONYMS
budget: "Budget"
lmntime: "ON time"
lmnproc: "ON processes"
lmnfix: "ON fixed costs"
ccmanager: "CC manager"
cccap: "CC capacity"
lmiproc: "OI processes"
costdriver: "Cost driver"
cdquantity: "Cost driver quantity"
quantity: "Quantity"
idlecap: "Idle capacity"
executioncost: "Execution costs"
stuffcost: "Time dependent costs"
totalfixcost: "Total fixed costs"
lmncost: "ON costs"
idlecost: "Idle costs"
totalcost: "Total costs"
lmipcs: "OI-PCR"
pcs: "PCR"

ADONIS Standard WE Library 3.81:

This attribute is not set in the ADONIS WE Library 3.81.

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

page 241

Part IV

2.29

Process cost analysis - CCC Default setting (Evaluation)

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

CURRENCY "Euro"
FIXCOST "EDP transaction costs"
FIXCOST "EDP batch costs"
FIXCOST "Print costs"
FIXCOST "Postal costs"

ADONIS Standard WE Library 3.81:

This attribute is not set in the ADONIS WE Library 3.81.

2.30

Dynamic evaluation modules (Evaluation)

ADONIS Standard BP Library 3.81:

This attribute is not set in the ADONIS BP Library 3.81.

ADONIS Standard WE Library 3.81:

This attribute is not set in the ADONIS WE Library 3.81.

page 242

ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Part V
Index
A
Acquisition component, 76
HOMER scenarios, 76
Activation of automatic random generator, 94
Activation of manual random generator, 93
Activity, 19
Actor, 13
ADONIS, 3
ADONIS Example models, 117
ADONIS standard method, 5
"Activity", 19
"Actor", 13
Agent definition, 240
"Aggregation", 39
AttrRep, 193
Author, 216
"Belongs to", 56
CCC Default setting (Process cost analysis),
242
CCC Mapping (Process cost analysis), 241
Class cardinality, 210
Classes, 13
Comments, 215
"communicates", 50
Configuration of documentation, 226
"contains", 51
Conversion, 212
"Cost center", 46
Creation date, 216
Date last changed, 216
Days per year (Enterprise time), 241
"Decision", 24
Default settings, 237
Description, 215
"Document", 38
Dynamic evaluation modules, 242
"End", 27
"extends", 52
External coupling, 220
"Generalisation", 52
Graphical representation (Connector marks),
225
GraphRep, 143
"has Note", 55
"Has process", 54
"has Resource", 55
"Has role", 56
"has Subdocument", 54
Hours per day (Enterprise time), 241
"Is charged to", 57
"Is cost center manager", 57
2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

"Is manager", 56
"Is subordinated", 55
Key words, 215
Last user, 216
Library bars (Quick access bars), 226
"Merging", 26
Model pointer, 209
Modes, 216
"Note", 38
Numbers (Connector marks), 225
Object arrangement, 219
"Organizational unit", 42
"Owns", 54
Page layout, 219
"Parallelity", 25
"Performance indicator overview", 33
"Performance indicator", 34
"Performer", 43
"Process start", 15
"Process", 31
QuickAccess Bars (Quick access bars), 225
"Random generator", 29
Relation analysis, 237
Relations, 48
"Resource", 30, 45
"Role", 45
Service, 215
"Sets variable", 49
"Sets", 50
Sim result mapping (Simulation definition),
239
Simmapping (Simulation definition), 239
Simtext (Simulation definition), 238
"Subprocess", 17
"Subsequent", 48
Swimlane (horizontal), 40
Swimlane (vertical), 41
"System boundary", 14
"use case", 14
"Uses resource", 57
uses", 53
Uses", 50
Variable check (Simulation definition), 240
Variable", 28
Versioning format, 219
Aggregation, 39
Analysis component, 58
Attribute and class filter, 109
Attribute profiles, 114
AttrRep, 193

page 243

Part V

B
Belongs to, 56
BP model, 9
Business Process Model, 9
C
Cardinality, 78
Class "Activity", 148, 197, 211
Class "Actor", 145, 194
Class "Aggregation", 164, 183, 203, 206
Class "Cost center", 182, 206, 212
Class "Decision", 150, 198, 211
Class "Document", 159, 202
Class "End", 152, 199, 211
Class "Merging", 152, 199, 211
Class "Note", 162, 184, 203, 207
Class "Organizational unit", 180, 204, 210
Class "Parallelity", 151, 198, 211
Class "Performance indicator overview", 157,
201, 212
Class "Performance indicator", 158, 202
Class "Performer", 180, 205
Class "Process start", 146, 195, 210
Class "Process", 155, 200, 209
Class "Random generator", 153, 200, 212
Class "Resource", 154, 181, 200, 206
Class "Role", 181, 205
Class "Subprocess", 147, 196, 209, 210, 213
Class "Swimlane (horizontal)", 165, 204
Class "Swimlane (vertical)", 172, 204
Class "System boundary", 146, 195
Class "Use case", 145, 195, 209
Class "Variable", 153, 199, 212
Class cardinality, 210
Classes, 13
communicates, 50
Company map, 8
contains, 51
Conversion, 212
Cost center, 46
Current value calculation, 96
Current value initialisation, 95
Requirements, 96
D
Decision, 24
Delta generation, 101
Display attributes in English, 85
Implementation, 88
Requirements, 86
Translation of model names, 87
Display attributes in German, 85
Implementation, 88
Requirements, 86
Translation of model names, 87
Document, 38
Document model, 11

page 244

E
End, 27
Evaluation component, 70
Example models, 117
Example-General.adl, 117
Example-General_with_resources.adl, 123
Expressions, 112
extends, 52
G
Generalisation, 52
GraphRep, 143
H
has Note, 55
Has process, 54
has Resource, 55
Has role, 56
has Subdocument, 54
HOMER scenarios, 76
HTML Generation, 99, 101
HTML-Generation, 97
I
Intermodel references (multiple models), 80
Is charged to, 57
Is cost center manager, 57
Is manager, 56
Is subordinated, 55
L
Library attributes, 214
Library specific functions, 76
Acquisition, 76
Activation of automatic random generator, 94
Activation of manual random generator, 93
Analysis, 58
Attribute and class filter, 109
Cardinality, 78
copy referenced documents, 99
Current value calculation, 96
Current value initialisation, 95
Delta generation, 101
Display attributes in English, 85
Display attributes in German, 85
Evaluation, 70, 95
HTML Generation, 99, 101
HTML-Generation, 97
Import/Export, 97
Modelling, 78
Monitoring, 95
Number objects, 82
Object conversion, 84
Options (Documentation), 104
Page layout, 90
Process Stepper, 90
Reset object numbering, 83
RTF Generation, 102
Simulation, 93
ADONIS Standard Method Manual

Index

M
Merging, 26
Model pointer, 209
Model types, 7
Business Process Model, 9
Company map, 8
Document model, 11
Use Case Diagram, 11
Working Environment model, 10
Modelling component, 78
Monitoring, 95
N
Note, 38
Number objects, 82
O
Object conversion, 84
Options (Documentation), 104
Organizational unit, 42
Owns, 54
P
Page layout, 90
Parallelity, 25
Performance indicator, 34
Performance indicator overview, 33
Performer, 43
Predefined queries, 58
Activity-oriented queries on Business
Process Models, 72
Consistency checks on Business Process
Models, 59
Evaluation of the open questions in Business
Process Models, 62
Evaluation of the open questions in company
maps, 58
Evaluation of the open questions in Use Case
diagrams, 65
Predefined queries on Business Process
Models, 61
Predefined queries on Working Environment
models, 63
Process-oriented queries on Business
Process Models, 70
Queries on Working Environment models, 73
Predefined relation tables, 58
Activity-Document table, 67
Activity-Input document table, 67
Activity-Output document table, 68
Activity-Resource table, 66
Organisational hierarchy table, 69
Role table, 69
Variable-Activity table, 68
Process, 31
Process start, 15
Process Stepper, 90
Additional functions, 92
Play back process animation, 92

2005 BOC, www.boc-group.com

Play back speed, 92

Process animation, 91
Remove marking of objects, 92
Turning execution time on/off, 92
R
Random generator, 29
Relation "Belongs to ", 191
Relation "communicates", 188, 208
Relation "contains", 188, 208
Relation "extends", 189, 208
Relation "Generalisation", 189, 208
Relation "has Note", 191, 193
Relation "Has process", 190
Relation "has Resource", 191
Relation "Has role", 192
Relation "has Subdocument", 190
Relation "Is charged to", 192
Relation "Is cost center manager", 193
Relation "Is manager", 191
Relation "Is subordinated", 191
Relation "Owns", 190
Relation "Sets variable", 187
Relation "Sets", 188
Relation "Subsequent", 186, 207
Relation "Uses (use case)", 189
Relation "Uses resource", 192
Relation "uses", 188, 209
Relations, 48
Reset object numbering, 83
Resource, 30, 45
Role, 45
RTF Generation, 102
S
Sets, 50
Sets variable, 49
Subprocess, 17
Subsequentr, 48
Swimlane (horizontal), 40
Swimlane (vertical), 41
System boundary, 14
T
Tables, 116
The class attributes, 143
U
use case, 14
Use case diagram, 11
Use Case Diagram, 11
uses, 53
Uses, 50
Uses resource, 57
V
Variable, 28

page 245

Part V

page 246

WE model, 10
Working Environment model, 10

ADONIS Standard Method Manual